Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Hardware Description
Issue Date 01 2011-07-30
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website: Email:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Related Versions
Product Name OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 iManager U2000 iManager U2000 Web LCT Version V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R005C00 V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board. This document is intended for: l l l l l l l Network Planning Engineer Hardware Installation Engineer Installation and Commissioning Engineer Field Maintenance Engineer Network Monitoring Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
Symbol
Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
Diagram Conventions
The Diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Description Indicates the flow of optical signals. Indicates the flow of electrical signals. Indicates an optical module.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
iii
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection". l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".
Description l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages. l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features" table. Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
15.11 TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators is added.
vi
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
vii
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 N63B Cabinet..................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Appearance.........................................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................4
2 N66B Cabinet..................................................................................................................................6
2.1 Appearance.........................................................................................................................................................7 2.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................8 2.3 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................9
Contents
6.4.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................58 6.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................59 6.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.........................................................................................................................60 6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces........................................................................60 6.5.1 ATE.........................................................................................................................................................63 6.5.2 EFI...........................................................................................................................................................70 6.5.3 EFI1.........................................................................................................................................................79 6.5.4 EFI2.........................................................................................................................................................83 6.5.5 STI...........................................................................................................................................................90
Contents
10.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................151 10.5.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................152 10.5.6 Specifications of the APIU..................................................................................................................152 10.6 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces....................................................................153 10.6.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board................................................................................153 10.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................154
13 Overview of Boards.................................................................................................................174
13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions.............................................................................................................175 13.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions...............................................................................................................175 13.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label....................................................................................................................177 13.2 Bar Code for Boards.....................................................................................................................................178 13.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................178 13.2.2 Characteristic Code..............................................................................................................................181
Contents
14.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................211 14.2.11 Specifications of the L4G..................................................................................................................213 14.3 LDGD...........................................................................................................................................................218 14.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................218 14.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................218 14.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................219 14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................221 14.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................224 14.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................225 14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD......................................................................................................226 14.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................226 14.3.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................227 14.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................229 14.3.11 Specifications of the LDGD..............................................................................................................231 14.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................236 14.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................237 14.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................237 14.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................237 14.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................240 14.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................243 14.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................244 14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................245 14.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................245 14.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................246 14.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................247 14.4.11 Specifications of the LDGS...............................................................................................................249 14.5 LDM.............................................................................................................................................................256 14.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................256 14.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................256 14.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................257 14.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................261 14.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................264 14.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................265 14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM........................................................................................................266 14.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................266 14.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................266 14.5.10 Specifications of the LDM................................................................................................................269 14.6 LDMD..........................................................................................................................................................278 14.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................278 14.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................278 14.6.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................279 14.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................282 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
14.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................285 14.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................286 14.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD.....................................................................................................287 14.6.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................287 14.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................288 14.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD..............................................................................................................291 14.7 LDMS...........................................................................................................................................................298 14.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................298 14.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................299 14.7.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................299 14.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................303 14.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................306 14.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................307 14.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS......................................................................................................308 14.7.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................308 14.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................308 14.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS..............................................................................................................311 14.8 LDX..............................................................................................................................................................319 14.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................319 14.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................319 14.8.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................320 14.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................322 14.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................325 14.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................327 14.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX.........................................................................................................327 14.8.8 Board Service Configuration...............................................................................................................327 14.8.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................328 14.8.10 LDX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................328 14.8.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................330 14.8.12 Specifications of the LDX.................................................................................................................333 14.9 LEM24..........................................................................................................................................................339 14.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................339 14.9.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................340 14.9.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................340 14.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................344 14.9.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................348 14.9.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................350 14.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ....................................................................................................351 14.9.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................351 14.9.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................353 14.9.10 Board Function Configuration...........................................................................................................354 14.9.11 LEM24 loopback...............................................................................................................................354 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii
Contents
14.9.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................360 14.9.13 Specifications of the LEM24.............................................................................................................363 14.10 LEX4..........................................................................................................................................................370 14.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................370 14.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................370 14.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................371 14.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................374 14.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................378 14.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................379 14.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ....................................................................................................380 14.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................380 14.10.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................381 14.10.10 Board Function Configuration.........................................................................................................382 14.10.11 LEX4 loopback................................................................................................................................382 14.10.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................385 14.10.13 Specifications of the LEX4 .............................................................................................................388 14.11 LOA............................................................................................................................................................393 14.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................393 14.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................394 14.11.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................396 14.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................401 14.11.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................404 14.11.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................406 14.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOA.......................................................................................................407 14.11.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................407 14.11.9 Configuring Cross-Connections........................................................................................................412 14.11.10 LOA Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................414 14.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................424 14.11.12 Specifications of the LOA...............................................................................................................429 14.12 LOG............................................................................................................................................................442 14.12.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................442 14.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................443 14.12.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................444 14.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................446 14.12.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................450 14.12.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................452 14.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................453 14.12.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................453 14.12.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................454 14.12.10 LOG Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................456 14.12.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................457 14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG...............................................................................................................460 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
14.13 LOM...........................................................................................................................................................470 14.13.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................470 14.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................472 14.13.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................472 14.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................476 14.13.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................481 14.13.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................485 14.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM......................................................................................................485 14.13.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................486 14.13.9 LOM loopback...................................................................................................................................487 14.13.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................489 14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM..............................................................................................................493 14.14 LQG............................................................................................................................................................503 14.14.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................503 14.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................504 14.14.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................504 14.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................506 14.14.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................509 14.14.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................510 14.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.......................................................................................................511 14.14.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................511 14.14.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................512 14.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................513 14.14.11 Specifications of the LQG...............................................................................................................516 14.15 LQM...........................................................................................................................................................522 14.15.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................522 14.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................................523 14.15.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................524 14.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................528 14.15.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................532 14.15.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................534 14.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM......................................................................................................534 14.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................535 14.15.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................537 14.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................538 14.15.11 Specifications of the LQM..............................................................................................................541 14.16 LQMD........................................................................................................................................................550 14.16.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................550 14.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................................551 14.16.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................551 14.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................556 14.16.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................560 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv
Contents
14.16.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................562 14.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD...................................................................................................563 14.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................563 14.16.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................565 14.16.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................567 14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD............................................................................................................570 14.17 LQMS.........................................................................................................................................................580 14.17.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................580 14.17.2 Application........................................................................................................................................581 14.17.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................582 14.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................588 14.17.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................593 14.17.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................595 14.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS....................................................................................................596 14.17.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................596 14.17.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................598 14.17.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................601 14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS............................................................................................................604 14.18 LSQ.............................................................................................................................................................614 14.18.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................614 14.18.2 Application........................................................................................................................................615 14.18.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................615 14.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................617 14.18.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................620 14.18.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................621 14.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ.......................................................................................................622 14.18.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................622 14.18.9 LSQ Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................622 14.18.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................625 14.18.11 Specifications of the LSQ................................................................................................................628 14.19 LSX.............................................................................................................................................................631 14.19.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................631 14.19.2 Application........................................................................................................................................633 14.19.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................633 14.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................636 14.19.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................640 14.19.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................642 14.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX.......................................................................................................643 14.19.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................643 14.19.9 LSX Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................643 14.19.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................646 14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX................................................................................................................649 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Contents
14.20 LSXL..........................................................................................................................................................659 14.20.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................659 14.20.2 Application........................................................................................................................................660 14.20.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................661 14.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................663 14.20.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................667 14.20.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................670 14.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL.....................................................................................................671 14.20.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................671 14.20.9 LSXL Loopbacks...............................................................................................................................672 14.20.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................675 14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL.............................................................................................................678 14.21 LSXLR........................................................................................................................................................682 14.21.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................682 14.21.2 Application........................................................................................................................................682 14.21.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................683 14.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................685 14.21.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................687 14.21.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................690 14.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR..................................................................................................691 14.21.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................691 14.21.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................692 14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR...........................................................................................................694 14.22 LSXR..........................................................................................................................................................696 14.22.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................697 14.22.2 Application........................................................................................................................................697 14.22.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................697 14.22.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................699 14.22.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................701 14.22.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................703 14.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.....................................................................................................704 14.22.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................704 14.22.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................704 14.22.10 Specifications of the LSXR.............................................................................................................706 14.23 LWX2.........................................................................................................................................................710 14.23.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................710 14.23.2 Application........................................................................................................................................710 14.23.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................711 14.23.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................714 14.23.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................716 14.23.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................717 14.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2....................................................................................................718 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi
Contents
14.23.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................718 14.23.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................719 14.23.10 Specifications of the LWX2............................................................................................................721 14.24 LWXD........................................................................................................................................................728 14.24.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................728 14.24.2 Application........................................................................................................................................729 14.24.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................729 14.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................733 14.24.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................735 14.24.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................736 14.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD...................................................................................................736 14.24.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................737 14.24.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................737 14.24.10 Specifications of the LWXD...........................................................................................................739 14.25 LWXS.........................................................................................................................................................747 14.25.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................747 14.25.2 Application........................................................................................................................................748 14.25.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................748 14.25.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................752 14.25.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................754 14.25.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................756 14.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................................757 14.25.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................757 14.25.9 LWXS loopback................................................................................................................................757 14.25.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................759 14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS............................................................................................................762 14.26 TMX...........................................................................................................................................................769 14.26.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................769 14.26.2 Application........................................................................................................................................771 14.26.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................771 14.26.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................773 14.26.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................776 14.26.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................777 14.26.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX......................................................................................................778 14.26.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................778 14.26.9 TMX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................779 14.26.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................781 14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX..............................................................................................................783
Contents
15.1.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................803 15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................809 15.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................817 15.1.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................819 15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2.........................................................................................................820 15.1.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................820 15.1.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................825 15.1.10 ND2 loopbacks..................................................................................................................................838 15.1.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................849 15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2..................................................................................................................853 15.2 NQ2..............................................................................................................................................................860 15.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................860 15.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................861 15.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................864 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................870 15.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................879 15.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................881 15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2.........................................................................................................882 15.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................882 15.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................889 15.2.10 NQ2 Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................902 15.2.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................919 15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2..................................................................................................................922 15.3 NS2...............................................................................................................................................................928 15.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................928 15.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................929 15.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................931 15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................938 15.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................947 15.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................948 15.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2..........................................................................................................949 15.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................949 15.3.9 Configuring Cross-Connections..........................................................................................................955 15.3.10 NS2 Loopbacks..................................................................................................................................966 15.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................978 15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2..................................................................................................................982 15.4 NS3...............................................................................................................................................................989 15.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................990 15.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................991 15.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................993 15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1000 15.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1007 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xviii
Contents
15.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1009 15.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NS3........................................................................................................1010 15.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1011 15.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1015 15.4.10 NS3 Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1021 15.4.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1047 15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3................................................................................................................1052 15.5 TBE.............................................................................................................................................................1055 15.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1055 15.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1056 15.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1056 15.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1059 15.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1062 15.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1064 15.5.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1064 15.5.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1066 15.5.9 TBE Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................1067 15.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1072 15.5.11 Specifications of the TBE................................................................................................................1072 15.6 TDG............................................................................................................................................................1078 15.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1078 15.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1079 15.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1079 15.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1081 15.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1083 15.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1085 15.6.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1085 15.6.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1087 15.6.9 TDG Parameters................................................................................................................................1089 15.6.10 Specifications of the TDG...............................................................................................................1090 15.7 TDX............................................................................................................................................................1093 15.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1094 15.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1095 15.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1096 15.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1099 15.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1104 15.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1107 15.7.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1108 15.7.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1110 15.7.9 TDX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1113 15.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1117 15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX...............................................................................................................1121 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Contents
15.8 THA............................................................................................................................................................1125 15.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1125 15.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1125 15.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1128 15.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1131 15.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1134 15.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1135 15.8.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1136 15.8.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1140 15.8.9 THA Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1145 15.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1155 15.8.11 Specifications of the THA...............................................................................................................1159 15.9 TOA............................................................................................................................................................1161 15.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1161 15.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1162 15.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1165 15.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1169 15.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1171 15.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1173 15.9.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1173 15.9.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1178 15.9.9 TOA Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1183 15.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1194 15.9.11 Specifications of the TOA...............................................................................................................1198 15.10 TOG..........................................................................................................................................................1205 15.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1205 15.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1206 15.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1206 15.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1208 15.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1211 15.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1213 15.10.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1213 15.10.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1215 15.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1216 15.10.10 Specifications of the TOG.............................................................................................................1218 15.11 TOM.........................................................................................................................................................1221 15.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1221 15.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1222 15.11.3 Function and Feature.......................................................................................................................1236 15.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1243 15.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1272 15.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1273 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xx
Contents
15.11.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1274 15.11.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1286 15.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1308 15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM............................................................................................................1313 15.12 TQM.........................................................................................................................................................1323 15.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1323 15.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1324 15.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1325 15.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1329 15.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1332 15.12.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1333 15.12.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1334 15.12.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1336 15.12.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1338 15.12.10 Specifications of the TQM............................................................................................................1340 15.13 TQS...........................................................................................................................................................1347 15.13.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1347 15.13.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1348 15.13.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1348 15.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1350 15.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1353 15.13.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1354 15.13.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1354 15.13.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1356 15.13.9 TQS Loopbacks...............................................................................................................................1357 15.13.10 TQS Parameters.............................................................................................................................1358 15.13.11 Specifications of the TQS..............................................................................................................1360 15.14 TQX..........................................................................................................................................................1364 15.14.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1364 15.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1366 15.14.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1367 15.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1369 15.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1374 15.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1376 15.14.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1377 15.14.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1378 15.14.9 TQX Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................1380 15.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1382 15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX.............................................................................................................1386 15.15 TSXL........................................................................................................................................................1390 15.15.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1390 15.15.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1391 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi
Contents
15.15.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1392 15.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1394 15.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1397 15.15.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1400 15.15.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1400 15.15.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1402 15.15.9 TSXL Loopbacks.............................................................................................................................1403 15.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1406 15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL...........................................................................................................1408
16 PID Unit...................................................................................................................................1410
16.1 BMD4.........................................................................................................................................................1411 16.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1411 16.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1411 16.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1412 16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1413 16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1414 16.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1416 16.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4.....................................................................................................1417 16.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................................................1417 16.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1418 16.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4............................................................................................................1419 16.2 BMD8.........................................................................................................................................................1420 16.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1421 16.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1421 16.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1422 16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1422 16.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1424 16.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1426 16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8.....................................................................................................1427 16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8........................................................................................................1427 16.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1430 16.2.10 Specifications of the BMD8............................................................................................................1431 16.3 ELQX..........................................................................................................................................................1433 16.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1433 16.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1433 16.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1434 16.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1436 16.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1439 16.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1440 16.3.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1440 16.3.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1442 16.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1445 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxii
Contents
16.3.10 Specifications of the ELQX.............................................................................................................1448 16.4 PTQX..........................................................................................................................................................1452 16.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1452 16.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1454 16.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1455 16.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1457 16.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1460 16.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1462 16.4.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX......................................................................................................1462 16.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1463 16.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1465 16.4.10 PTQX Parameters............................................................................................................................1468 16.4.11 Specifications of the PTQX.............................................................................................................1471 16.5 NPO2E........................................................................................................................................................1476 16.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1476 16.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1479 16.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1481 16.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1484 16.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1487 16.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1489 16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E....................................................................................................1490 16.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1490 16.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1493 16.5.10 NPO2E Loopbacks..........................................................................................................................1497 16.5.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1503 16.5.12 Specifications of the NPO2E...........................................................................................................1505 16.6 NPO2..........................................................................................................................................................1507 16.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1507 16.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1511 16.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1514 16.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1517 16.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1521 16.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1523 16.6.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2......................................................................................................1523 16.6.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1524 16.6.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1527 16.6.10 NPO2 Loopbacks.............................................................................................................................1537 16.6.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1546 16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2.............................................................................................................1549 16.7 ENQ2..........................................................................................................................................................1551 16.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1551 16.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1552 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii
Contents
16.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1553 16.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1557 16.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1559 16.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1560 16.7.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1561 16.7.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1564 16.7.9 ENQ2 Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................1570 16.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1579 16.7.11 Specifications of the ENQ2.............................................................................................................1581
Contents
17.3.10 Specifications of the D40................................................................................................................1616 17.4 D40V..........................................................................................................................................................1617 17.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1617 17.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1618 17.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1618 17.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1619 17.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1621 17.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1624 17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.....................................................................................................1625 17.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1625 17.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1626 17.4.10 Specifications of the D40V..............................................................................................................1627 17.5 DFIU...........................................................................................................................................................1628 17.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1628 17.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1628 17.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1629 17.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1629 17.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1631 17.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1632 17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU......................................................................................................1632 17.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1633 17.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1633 17.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU..............................................................................................................1634 17.6 FIU..............................................................................................................................................................1635 17.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1635 17.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1637 17.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1638 17.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1638 17.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1641 17.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1646 17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU.........................................................................................................1647 17.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1648 17.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1648 17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU.................................................................................................................1650 17.7 ITL..............................................................................................................................................................1651 17.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1651 17.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1652 17.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1653 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1653 17.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1655 17.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1658 17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL.........................................................................................................1659 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv
Contents
17.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1659 17.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1660 17.7.10 Specifications of the ITL.................................................................................................................1660 17.8 SFIU............................................................................................................................................................1663 17.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1663 17.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1663 17.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1664 17.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1664 17.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1666 17.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1667 17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU......................................................................................................1668 17.8.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1668 17.8.9 SFIU Parameters................................................................................................................................1668 17.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU...............................................................................................................1670
Contents
18.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1692 18.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1694 18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4....................................................................................................1694 18.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1695 18.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1696 18.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4............................................................................................................1696 18.4 DMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1698 18.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1698 18.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1699 18.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1699 18.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1700 18.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1701 18.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1704 18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1....................................................................................................1704 18.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1705 18.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1705 18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1............................................................................................................1706 18.5 MR2............................................................................................................................................................1707 18.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1707 18.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1708 18.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1708 18.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1709 18.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1710 18.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1713 18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.......................................................................................................1713 18.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1714 18.5.9 MR2 Parameters................................................................................................................................1714 18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2...............................................................................................................1715 18.6 MR4............................................................................................................................................................1716 18.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1716 18.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1717 18.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1718 18.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1718 18.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1720 18.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1722 18.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR4.......................................................................................................1722 18.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1723 18.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1724 18.6.10 Specifications of the MR4...............................................................................................................1724 18.7 MR8............................................................................................................................................................1727 18.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1727 18.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1727 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvii
Contents
18.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1727 18.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1728 18.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1729 18.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1731 18.7.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.......................................................................................................1731 18.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1732 18.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1733 18.7.10 Specifications of the MR8...............................................................................................................1733 18.8 MR8V.........................................................................................................................................................1736 18.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1736 18.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1736 18.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1737 18.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1737 18.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1739 18.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1741 18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V....................................................................................................1742 18.8.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1742 18.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1743 18.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V............................................................................................................1744 18.9 SBM2..........................................................................................................................................................1747 18.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1747 18.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1748 18.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1748 18.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1748 18.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1750 18.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1751 18.9.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1752 18.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1752 18.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2...............................................................................................................1753
Contents
19.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1764 19.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1764 19.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1765 19.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1767 19.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1769 19.2.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1770 19.2.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1770 19.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9..............................................................................................................1772 19.3 ROAM........................................................................................................................................................1773 19.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1773 19.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1774 19.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1774 19.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1775 19.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1777 19.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1780 19.3.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1781 19.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1781 19.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM.............................................................................................................1782 19.4 WSD9.........................................................................................................................................................1783 19.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1783 19.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1784 19.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1785 19.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1786 19.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1788 19.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1790 19.4.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1791 19.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1792 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9..............................................................................................................1793 19.5 WSM9.........................................................................................................................................................1795 19.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1795 19.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1796 19.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1797 19.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1798 19.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1799 19.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1801 19.5.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1802 19.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1803 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9..............................................................................................................1804 19.6 WSMD2......................................................................................................................................................1806 19.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1806 19.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1806 19.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1807 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxix
Contents
19.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1808 19.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1809 19.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1811 19.6.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1812 19.6.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1812 19.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2...........................................................................................................1814 19.7 WSMD4......................................................................................................................................................1815 19.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1815 19.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1816 19.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1817 19.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1818 19.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1819 19.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1821 19.7.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1822 19.7.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1823 19.7.9 Specifications of the WSMD4...........................................................................................................1824 19.8 WSMD9......................................................................................................................................................1826 19.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1826 19.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1826 19.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1827 19.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1828 19.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1829 19.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1831 19.8.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1832 19.8.8 WSMD9 Parameters..........................................................................................................................1832 19.8.9 Specifications of the WSMD9...........................................................................................................1834
Contents
20.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1849 20.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1851 20.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1854 20.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1856 20.2.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1856 20.2.8 DAS1 Parameters..............................................................................................................................1857 20.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1...............................................................................................................1861 20.3 HBA............................................................................................................................................................1863 20.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1863 20.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1863 20.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1864 20.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1864 20.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1866 20.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1868 20.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.......................................................................................................1869 20.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1869 20.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1870 20.3.10 Specifications of the HBA...............................................................................................................1872 20.4 OAU1..........................................................................................................................................................1873 20.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1873 20.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1875 20.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1875 20.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1876 20.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1879 20.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1883 20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1....................................................................................................1885 20.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1885 20.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1886 20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1.............................................................................................................1889 20.5 OBU1..........................................................................................................................................................1896 20.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1896 20.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1898 20.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1898 20.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1899 20.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1902 20.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1905 20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.....................................................................................................1906 20.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1906 20.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1907 20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1.............................................................................................................1910 20.6 OBU2..........................................................................................................................................................1912 20.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1912 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxi
Contents
20.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1913 20.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1914 20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1915 20.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1917 20.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1920 20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.....................................................................................................1921 20.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1922 20.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1922 20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2.............................................................................................................1925
Contents
21.4.8 Specifications of the TN16XCH........................................................................................................1952 21.5 XCM...........................................................................................................................................................1952 21.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1952 21.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1953 21.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1953 21.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1954 21.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1955 21.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1957 21.5.7 Specifications of the XCM................................................................................................................1957 21.6 XCS............................................................................................................................................................1957 21.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1957 21.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1958 21.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1959 21.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1959 21.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1960 21.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1961 21.6.7 Specifications of the XCS..................................................................................................................1962 21.7 XCT............................................................................................................................................................1962 21.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1962 21.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1963 21.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1963 21.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1964 21.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1965 21.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1967 21.7.7 Specifications of the XCT.................................................................................................................1967 21.8 SCC.............................................................................................................................................................1968 21.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1968 21.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1970 21.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1970 21.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1973 21.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1974 21.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1980 21.8.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1981 21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC..................................................................................................................1984 21.9 AUX............................................................................................................................................................1985 21.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1985 21.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1987 21.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1987 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1989 21.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1991 21.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1996 21.9.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1997 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiii
Contents
Contents
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2........................................................................................................2038 22.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2039 22.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2039 22.4.10 Specifications of the ST2.................................................................................................................2040
Contents
24.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2080 24.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2080 24.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2082 24.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2083 24.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4....................................................................................................2084 24.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2084 24.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2084 24.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4............................................................................................................2086 24.2 MCA8.........................................................................................................................................................2087 24.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2087 24.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2087 24.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2088 24.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2089 24.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2090 24.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2092 24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8....................................................................................................2092 24.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2093 24.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2093 24.2.10 Specifications of the MCA8............................................................................................................2094 24.3 OPM8..........................................................................................................................................................2095 24.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2095 24.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2096 24.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2096 24.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2097 24.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2098 24.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2100 24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8....................................................................................................2100 24.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2101 24.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8...............................................................................................................2102 24.4 WMU..........................................................................................................................................................2102 24.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2103 24.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2103 24.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2104 24.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2104 24.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2106 24.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2107 24.4.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2107 24.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2108 24.4.9 Specifications of the WMU...............................................................................................................2108
Contents
25.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2111 25.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2112 25.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2113 25.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2114 25.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2115 25.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1.......................................................................................................2116 25.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2116 25.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2117 25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1................................................................................................................2118 25.2 VA4............................................................................................................................................................2119 25.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2119 25.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2120 25.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2120 25.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2121 25.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2123 25.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2124 25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4.......................................................................................................2125 25.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2125 25.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2126 25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4................................................................................................................2127
Contents
27 Clock Unit...............................................................................................................................2146
27.1 STG.............................................................................................................................................................2147 27.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2147 27.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2147 27.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2149 27.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2149 27.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2151 27.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2153 27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG.......................................................................................................2154 27.1.8 Specifications of the STG..................................................................................................................2154
Contents
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH.....................................................................................................2193 28.3.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2193 28.3.10 Board Protection..............................................................................................................................2194 28.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2196 28.3.12 Specifications of the EGSH.............................................................................................................2204 28.4 SF64............................................................................................................................................................2206 28.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2206 28.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2206 28.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2206 28.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2208 28.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2210 28.4.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2212 28.4.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2212 28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64.......................................................................................................2212 28.4.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2212 28.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2213 28.4.11 Specifications of the SF64...............................................................................................................2214 28.5 SF64A.........................................................................................................................................................2217 28.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2217 28.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2217 28.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2218 28.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2220 28.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2222 28.5.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2224 28.5.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2224 28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A....................................................................................................2224 28.5.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2224 28.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2225 28.5.11 Specifications of the SF64A............................................................................................................2226 28.6 SFD64.........................................................................................................................................................2228 28.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2228 28.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2228 28.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2229 28.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2231 28.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2233 28.6.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2234 28.6.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2234 28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64....................................................................................................2234 28.6.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2235 28.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2235 28.6.11 Specifications of the SFD64............................................................................................................2236 28.7 SL64............................................................................................................................................................2239 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxix
Contents
28.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2239 28.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2239 28.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2240 28.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2242 28.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2244 28.7.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2246 28.7.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2246 28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64......................................................................................................2246 28.7.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2246 28.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2247 28.7.11 Specifications of the SL64...............................................................................................................2248 28.8 SLD64.........................................................................................................................................................2250 28.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2250 28.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2250 28.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2251 28.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2253 28.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2255 28.8.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2257 28.8.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2257 28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64...................................................................................................2257 28.8.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2257 28.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2258 28.8.11 Specifications of the SLD64............................................................................................................2259 28.9 SLH41.........................................................................................................................................................2260 28.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2260 28.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2260 28.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2261 28.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2263 28.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2265 28.9.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2268 28.9.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2268 28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41...................................................................................................2268 28.9.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2268 28.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2269 28.9.11 Specifications of the SLH41............................................................................................................2270 28.10 SLO16.......................................................................................................................................................2272 28.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2272 28.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2272 28.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2273 28.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2275 28.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2277 28.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2279 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xl
Contents
28.10.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2279 28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16.................................................................................................2279 28.10.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2279 28.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2280 28.10.11 Specifications of the SLO16..........................................................................................................2281 28.11 SLQ16.......................................................................................................................................................2282 28.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2282 28.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2282 28.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2283 28.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2285 28.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2287 28.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2289 28.11.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2289 28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16.................................................................................................2289 28.11.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2289 28.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2290 28.11.11 Specifications of the SLQ16..........................................................................................................2291 28.12 SLQ64.......................................................................................................................................................2292 28.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2292 28.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2292 28.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2293 28.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2295 28.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2297 28.12.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2298 28.12.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2298 28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64.................................................................................................2298 28.12.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2299 28.12.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2299 28.12.11 Specifications of the SLQ64..........................................................................................................2300
29 Cables.......................................................................................................................................2302
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables..............................................................................................................2303 29.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables.....................................................................................2303 29.1.2 Subrack Power Cables.......................................................................................................................2307 29.2 Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................2309 29.2.1 Classification.....................................................................................................................................2309 29.2.2 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................2310 29.3 Ground Cables............................................................................................................................................2314 29.3.1 Cabinet Door Ground Cables............................................................................................................2314 29.3.2 PDU Ground Cable............................................................................................................................2315 29.4 Alarm Cables..............................................................................................................................................2316 29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable.....................................................................................................................2316 29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable...........................................................................................................2318 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xli
Contents
29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable..............................................................................................................2319 29.5 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................2321 29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable......................................................................................................................2321 29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................2322 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable......................................................................................................2327 29.6 Clock/Time Cable.......................................................................................................................................2328 29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections...........................................................................................2328 29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections........................................................................................................2333 29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections.......................................................................................2335
30 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................2339
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ...........................................................................................................................2340 30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................... 2340
31 Filler Panels............................................................................................................................2341
31.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................2342 31.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................2342 31.3 Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................................2343 31.4 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................2344
A Indicators..................................................................................................................................2346
A.1 Cabinet Indicators........................................................................................................................................ 2347 A.2 Subrack Indicator.........................................................................................................................................2347 A.3 Chassis Indicators........................................................................................................................................2348 A.4 Board Indicators...........................................................................................................................................2348 A.5 Fan Indicator................................................................................................................................................ 2352 A.6 PIU Indicator...............................................................................................................................................2352
Contents
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................2367 B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................2367 B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU...................................................................................................................2367 B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................2367 B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................2368 B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................2369 B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................2369 B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC......................................................................................................2370 B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit................................................................................2370 B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................2370 B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................2371 B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.......................................................................................................2371 B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................2372 B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................2372 B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................2372 B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................2373 B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.....................................................................................................2374 B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................2374 B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................2374 B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................2374 B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA.....................................................................................................................2375 B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................2375 B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................2375 B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit............................................................................................................2376 B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................2376 B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................2376 B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................2377
D Parameter Reference..............................................................................................................2438
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)............................................................................................2441 D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................................2442 D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold....................................................................................................2444 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xliii
Contents
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface).........................................................................................................2446 D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2446 D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................................2447 D.7 Default VLAN ID .......................................................................................................................................2448 D.8 Enabled/Disabled ........................................................................................................................................2448 D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................2449 D.10 Enabling LCAS..........................................................................................................................................2450 D.11 Entry Detection .........................................................................................................................................2451 D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)...............................................................................................2451 D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2452 D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2453 D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2454 D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2454 D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................2455 D.18 Hardware REG Enabled............................................................................................................................2456 D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)................2457 D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2458 D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)..............................................................................................................2459 D.22 Laser-in-Position Status.............................................................................................................................2460 D.23 LCAS Mode...............................................................................................................................................2461 D.24 Line Rate....................................................................................................................................................2461 D.25 Loop Detection..........................................................................................................................................2464 D.26 Loop Port Shutdown..................................................................................................................................2464 D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2465 D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................2467 D.29 MAC Loopback ........................................................................................................................................2468 D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface).........................................................................................2469 D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)................................................................2469 D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2470 D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2471 D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).................................................................2471 D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction............................................................................................................2472 D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2472 D.37 MSP Sharing..............................................................................................................................................2473 D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2474 D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................2475 D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................2476 D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ...............................................................................................2476 D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)......................................................................2477 D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)........................................................................................................2478 D.44 PHY Loopback .........................................................................................................................................2479 D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2480 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xliv
Contents
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)...............................2480 D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2482 D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2484 D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2485 D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................2485 D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2486 D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface).............................................................................2488 D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)...................................................................................2489 D.54 TSD............................................................................................................................................................2489 D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)....................2490 D.56 VLAN Priority ..........................................................................................................................................2491
E Glossary....................................................................................................................................2492
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
xlv
1 N63B Cabinet
1
About This Chapter
N63B Cabinet
1.1 Appearance The N63B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 300 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. 1.2 Configuration Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. 1.3 Technical Specifications Technical specifications of the N63B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 N63B Cabinet
1.1 Appearance
The N63B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 300 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. The following subracks can be installed on the N63B cabinet: OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16 and OptiX OSN 6800. The N63B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front door, rear panel fixed by screws, and side panels at the left and right sides. Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have grounding points. Keys to the front door of all N63B cabinets are the same. Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the N63B cabinet. Figure 1-1 N63B cabinet appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 N63B Cabinet
1.2 Configuration
Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. Table 1-1 lists the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
NOTE
There are two types of ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinets: T63B and N63B. These two types of cabinets differ in color and door. You can perform an expansion installation on the T63B cabinet based on the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
Table 1-1 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet Typ ical Con figu rati on 1 Number of Subracks and Frames PDU Model Circuit Breaker a Maximum Power Consumpti on of Integrated Equipment
b
2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 1 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 2 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16 + 1 x DCM frame 4 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16 + 1 x DCM frame 3 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16+1 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame 2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16+ 2 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Eight 63 A circuit breakers Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breakers Eight 63 A circuit breakers
5400 W
TN16
5400 W
< 4000 W
TN16
5000 W
< 4000 W
TN16
Eight 63 A circuit breakers Six 63 A and two 32 A circuit breakers Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W
TN16
5000 W
< 4000 W
TN16
5000 W
< 4000 W
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 N63B Cabinet
PDU Model
Circuit Breaker a
1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16+ 3 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame 4 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 1 x DCM frame 3 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x CRPC frame + 3 x DCM frame
TN16
Two 63 A and six 32 A circuit breakers Four 63 A circuit breakers Four 63 A circuit breakers
5000 W
TN11
4800 W
< 4000 W
TN11
4800 W
< 4000 W
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF. b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment can not exceed the maximum power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh). Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.
1 N63B Cabinet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
2
About This Chapter
N66B Cabinet
2.1 Appearance The N66B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 600 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. 2.2 Configuration TTypical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. 2.3 Technical Specifications Technical specifications of the N66B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
2.1 Appearance
The N66B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 600 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. The following subracks can be installed on the N66B cabinet: OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16, and OptiX OSN 6800. The N66B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front and rear doors, and side panels at the left and right sides. Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have grounding points. Keys to the front and rear doors of all N63B cabinets are the same. Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the N66B cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
2.2 Configuration
TTypical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. Table 2-1 lists the typical configurations of the N66B cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
Table 2-1 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet Typic al Confi gurat ion 1 Number of Subracks and Frames PDU Mode Circuit Breaker a Maximum Power Consumptio n of Integrated Equipment b 10800 W Power Consumptio n for the Typical Configuratio n < 6000 W
1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T64 + 2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 2 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T64 + 4 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 4 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T64 + 4 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16 + 2 x DCM frame
TN16
TN16
10800 W
< 6000 W
TN16
10000 W
< 6000 W
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF. b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment do not exceed the maximum power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh). Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.
2 N66B Cabinet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
10
3
Appearance
Used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, a fiber management frame can enhance the fiber capacity of the N63B or N66B cabinet and make fiber installation and routing more flexible.
There are two types of fiber management frames: left-side fiber management frame and rightside fiber management frame. Fiber management frames are used together with N63B and N66B cabinets, as shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
11
Figure 3-1 Fiber management frames used with the N63B cabinet
3 1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
12
Figure 3-2 Fiber management frames used with the N66B cabinet
2 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
13
Configuration Principle
Left-side and right-side fiber management frames are installed to the left and right of a cabinet respectively. Fiber management frames can be used with N63B or N66B cabinet only. You can determine whether to configure a fiber management frame based on the required fiber capacity. Observe the following rules when configuring an 80-channel system (fibers with 2 mm diameters are used as an example): l l When N63B cabinets are used, fiber management frames must be used for overhead cabling if more than 320 internal fibers and 720 external fibers are required. When N66B cabinets are used, fiber management frames must be used for overhead cabling if more than 640 internal fibers and 1440 external fibers are required.
In addition, observe the following rules when configuring fiber management frames:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
14
For new network deployment or network expansion, or during network maintenance, fiber management frames can be configured if the free space on the two sides of a cabinet is large enough for users to flexibly and freely install and route fibers. For underfloor cabling, fiber management frames must be used to manage external fibers because there is not much space left inside the cabinet after the external power cables are arranged in the cabinet.
NOTE
l Left-side and right-side fiber management frames must be configured at the same time. l During cabinet expansion, spool internal cascading fibers and external fibers in the fiber management frames.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of a fiber management frame are as follows: l l Outline dimensions: 150 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H). Weight: 23 kg
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
15
4 DC PDU
4
About This Chapter
l l l
DC PDU
There are three types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51 and TN11. The availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. The TN51PDU and TN16PDU use the same front panel and provide the same functions, but they are different in height. The two boards apply to the same scenarios. This manual uses the TN16PDU board as an example for illustration. The TN16PDU is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. The TN11PDU is used only for a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
4.1 TN16PDU The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. 4.2 TN11PDU The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16
4 DC PDU
4.1 TN16PDU
The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.
NOTE
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU. TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.
The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: l l When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required. When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies. For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper Bar. Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU. Figure 4-1 Front panel of the TN16PDU
Power supply Power supply output area switch area Power supply input area Power supply Power supply switch area output area
+
1
+
2
+
3
+
4
+
1
+
2
+
3
+
4
A
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Input cable terminal block
B
3. Power switch
l l l
Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks. Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total. Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each other.
4 DC PDU
OUTPUT A
-
OUTPUT B
1
+ ON ON ON ON
2
+
3
+
4
+
1
+
2
+
3
+
4
+ ON ON ON ON
INPUT A
INPUT B
OUTPUT A
+ + + + OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OUTPUT B
+ + + +
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
INPUT A
INPUT B
Copper Plate
4.2 TN11PDU
The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.
DC PDU
The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18
4 DC PDU
l l
If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required. If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current into four 32 A currents. For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU. Figure 4-4 Front panel of the TN11PDU
1 2 3 3 2 1
2. Ground screw
4. Power switch
l l l l
Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks. Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables. Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total. Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
19
4 DC PDU
+- +
OUTPUT
+- +
ON OFF
+- +- +
ON OFF
+- +- +
+
INPUT
+
INPUT
Junction Box
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 4-6 shows the junction box structure and Figure 4-7 shows the installation position of the junction box. Figure 4-6 Structure
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
20
4 DC PDU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
21
5 UPM
5
Application
Figure 5-1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800. Figure 5-1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800
OptiX OSN equipment 110V/220V -48V PIU Board A Backplane
UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/ 220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires batteries.
UPM
Appearance
The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM. The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF power system is 3U high. Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
22
5 UPM
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately. If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 5-1 provides the functions and features of the UPM. Table 5-1 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system Function and Feature Hot-swappable function EPS75-4815AF The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved. The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah. The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.
Loading capacity
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
23
5 UPM
EPS75-4815AF The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector. The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from damaging the rectifier module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
24
5 UPM
1. Control miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of the AC input (30 A) 4. Control MCB of load 2 (30 A) 7. AC phase line terminal
2. Control MCB of the battery 3. Control MCB of load 1 (10 A) branch (80 A) 5. Control MCB of load 3 (40 6. Control MCB of load 4 (40 A) A) 8. AC zero line terminal 9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery branch 12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load branch 15. Communication interface (COM)
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of branch the battery branch 13. Connecting terminal of the protection grounding cable 16. Communication test interface (TEST) 14. DB44 signal interface
Interfaces The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 5-2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF. Table 5-2 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system Interface Power input interface Type of Interface Power interface Usage "7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which access 110 V/ 220 V AC power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
25
5 UPM
Usage The power output interfaces are in the lower left corner on the front panel of the UPM. The terminals indicated by "9" and "11" constitute a battery interface, through which the power system is connected to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box through a battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output interfaces of four loads. The output interfaces can supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power cables. The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.
Power interface
DB44
The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the sensor transfer box (an optional device) through the DB44 signal interface and to the monitoring module through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the sensor transfer box can be connected to multiple sensors. As a result, the monitoring function is extended. It is used for communication with the PC. The COM interface can adopt the RS-485 communication mode or RS-232 communication mode. Three baud rates are available, namely, 4800 kbit/s, 9600 kbit/s, and 19200 kbit/s. The baud rate can be adjusted and the default baud rate is 9600 kbit/s. It is used for internal test.
RJ-45
RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
26
5 UPM
Usage The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown in Figure 5-3. "1" indicates the control MCB of the AC input (30 A), which enables and disables the input of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate the load control switches, which enable and disable the load output.
Indicators The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators: l l l Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green) Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow) Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators: l l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red) Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W. Table 5-3 lists the power parameters of the UPM. Table 5-3 Power parameters of the UPM Parameter Voltage range of the AC input AC input Rated input current Output nominal voltage Value 90-290 V AC One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz 28 A 53.50.5 V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
27
5 UPM
Value DC output branches Load MCB 1: 10 A Load MCB 2: 30 A Load MCB 3: 40 A Load MCB 4: 40 A Battery MCB: 80 A Total output DC current 37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated voltage precision Non-balance of load sharing Rated efficiency of the integrated equipment Power factor Peak-to-peak noise voltage Electrical network adjustment rate Lightning protection performance
1%
0.99 (nominal input or output) 200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz) 0.1%
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5 kA for five times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally. The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
Cooling method
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows: l l Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0 in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H)) Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
28
6
About This Chapter
6.4 PIU PIU: power interface unit
6.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack 6.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack 6.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
29
5 3 4
l l l
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
30
l l l
Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 6-1 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh). Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Table 6-1 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum subrack power consumptionb Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN) Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS) Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 498 mm (W) 580 mm (D) 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) 22.8 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H)) 65 kg (143 lb.) 9600 W less than 4000 W less than 3200 W 200 A (four 50 A switched-mode power supplies) -48V DC/-60V DC -40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed. b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of the subracks. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-2 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800 T64.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
31
Table 6-2 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Unit Name Typical Power Consumptio n at 25C (77 F) (W)a 1804.6 Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55C (131F) (W)a 3135.9 Remarks
Subrack
OTU subrack
It is the power consumed after you install thirty-two LDXes, one SCC, eight PIUs, two AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two XCTs, two SXMs, twenty NQ2s, one SCC, eight PIUs, five TOAs, five TQXes, two AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve LDXes, one SCC, one SC2, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two SXMs, twenty SLD64s, eight SLO16s, four SLQ16s, four SLH41s, four EGSHes, two STGs, one STI, two SCCs, eight PIUs, two AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OCS system.
OTU subrack
1839.1
3084.7
OTM subrack
963.78
2168.28
OCS System
2169.9
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
32
Back
IU93 SCC IU85 STG IU86 ATE IU87 PIU IU88 PIU IU89
PIU IU69
PIU IU70
EFI2 IU71
IU 73
IU 77
PIU IU78
PIU IU79
PIU IU80
PIU IU81
STI IU82
IU 84
IU 19
IU 20
IU 21
IU 22
IU 23
IU 24
IU 25
IU 26
IU 27
IU 28
IU 29
IU 30
IU 31
IU 32
IU 33
IU 34
IU 53
IU 54
IU 55
IU 56
IU 57
IU 58
IU 59
IU 60
IU 61
IU 62
IU 63
IU 64
IU 65
IU 66
IU 67
IU 68
XCT IU 9
SXM IU 10
XCT IU 43
SXM IU 44
IU 1
IU 2
IU 3
IU 4
IU 5
IU 6
IU 7
IU 8
IU 11
IU 12
IU 13
IU 14
IU 15
IU 16
IU 17
IU 18
IU 35
IU 36
IU 37
IU 38
IU 39
IU 40
IU 41
IU 42
IU 45
IU 46
IU 47
IU 48
IU 49
IU 50
IU 51
IU 52
IU90
IU92
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 are reserved for service boards. IU71 is reserved for the EFI2. IU76 is reserved for the EFI1. IU87 is reserved for the ATE. IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89 are reserved for the PIU. IU72 and IU83 are reserved for the AUX. IU73, IU77 and IU84 are reserved for future use. IU75 and IU86 are reserved for the STG. IU82 is reserved for the STI. IU74 and IU85 are reserved for the SCC. IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the XCT. IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the SXM or SXH. IU90-IU93 are reserved for the fans.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.
Table 6-3 Functions Function Basic function Description Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Commissioning control
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism. The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 6-3 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 6-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Air inlet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
34
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-4. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Table 6-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at low speed. l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F), the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has three partitions. See Figure 6-4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
35
Figure 6-4 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU91
Front
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN1
Back
FAN2 FAN3
IU93
IU69
IU70
IU71
IU72
IU73
IU74
IU75
IU76
IU77
IU78
IU79
IU80
IU81
IU82
IU83
IU84
IU85
IU86
IU87
IU88
IU89
IU19 IU20
IU21
IU22 IU23
IU24
IU25 IU26
IU27
IU28 IU29
IU30
IU31
IU32 IU33
IU34
IU53 IU54
IU55
IU56 IU57
IU58
IU59 IU60
IU61
IU62 IU63
IU64
IU65
IU66 IU67
IU68
IU9
IU10
IU43 IU44
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU8
IU11
IU12
IU13 IU14
IU15
IU16 IU17
IU18
IU35 IU36
IU37 IU38
IU39 IU40
IU41 IU42
IU45
IU46
IU47 IU48
IU49
IU50 IU51
IU52
IU90
IU92
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, a cabinet has two sides (front and back). The fan tray assemblies IU90 and IU91 are on the front and the fan tray assemblies IU92 and IU93 are on the back. The fans in the four fan tray assemblies dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU1-IU6, IU19IU24, and IU69-IU71. FAN2 and FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7IU12, IU25-IU28, and IU72-IU75. FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU13-IU18, IU29-IU34, and IU76-IU79. FAN7 and FAN10 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU35-IU40, IU53-IU58, and IU80-IU82. FAN8 and FAN11 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU41-IU46, IU59-IU62, and IU83-IU86. FAN9 and FAN12 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU47-IU52, IU63-IU68, and IU87-IU89.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-5 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
36
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 6-6 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 6-6 Fan tray assembly
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
NOTE
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
37
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90 IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 280.5 mm (D) x 64.0 mm (H) (19.4 in. (W) x 11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H)) 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.) l 70 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed l 150 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed l 347 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 347 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
38
1
5
3 4
l l l
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 50 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 6.2.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).
l l l
Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 6-6 describes the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh). Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Table 6-6 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum subrack power consumptionb Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN) Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS) Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H)) 35 kg (77.1 lb.) 4800 W less than 3000 W less than 2400 W 100 A (two 50 A switched-mode power supplies) -48V DC/-60V DC -40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed. b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-7 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800 T32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
40
Table 6-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Unit Name Typical Power Consumptio n at 25C (77 F) (W)a 1633.4 Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55C (131F) (W)a 2408.6 Remarks
Subrack
OTU subrack
It is the power consumed after you install thirty-two LDXes, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two XCHes, twenty NQ2s, one SCC, four PIUs, five TQXes, five TOAs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OTU electrical crossconnection subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve LDXes, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install four OBU1s, four VA1s, one SC2, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OLA subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two OAU1s, two MR8Vs, sixteen LDXes, one SC2, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OADM subrack.
1641.6
2320.5
OTM subrack
792.5
1441.1
OLA subrack
290.3
860
OADM subrack
974
1651.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
41
Unit Name
Remarks
It is the power consumed after you install two M40Vs, two D40s, two FIUs, one SC2, two RMU9s, two WSM9s, two OAU1s, two OBU1s, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two M40s, two D40s, two WSMD9s, two DAS1s, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two XCMs, ten SLQ64s, eight SLO16s, two SLH41s, two EGSHes, two STGs, one STI, two SCCs, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OCS system.
373.1
460.6
OCS System
1507.4
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
42
STG
OTU
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU20 IU21
IU22
IU23 IU24
IU25
IU26 IU27
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU8
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
IU50
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 are reserved for service boards. IU37 is reserved for the EFI2. IU38 is reserved for the EFI1. IU48 is reserved for the ATE. IU47 is reserved for the STI. IU39, IU40, IU45 and IU46 are reserved for the PIU. IU41 is reserved for the AUX. IU42 and IU44 are reserved for the STG. IU43 is reserved for future use. IU28 is reserved for the active SCC. IU11 is available for the standby SCC or the other boards. IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/XCM. IU50 and IU51 are reserved for the fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.
Commissioning control
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism. The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 6-9 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
44
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-9. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Table 6-9 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at low speed. l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F), the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
45
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 6-10. Figure 6-10 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 IU51
IU37
IU38
IU39
IU40
IU45
IU46
IU47
IU48
IU20 IU21
IU22
IU23 IU24
IU25
IU26 IU27
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
IU9
IU10
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU8
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the fans on the two fan tray assemblies in slots IU50 and IU51 dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU-IU6, IU20-IU25, and IU37-IU40. FAN2 and FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7-IU12, IU26-IU29, and IU41-IU45. FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU13-IU19, IU30-IU36, and IU46-IU49.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
46
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-11 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 6-11 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal Speed adjusting signal FAN
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 6-12 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 6-12 Fan tray assembly
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
NOTE
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
47
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 6-10 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 280.5 mm (D) x 64.0 mm (H) (19.4 in. (W) x 11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H)) 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.) l 70 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed l 150 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed l 347 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 347 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
48
5 2 3 4
l l l
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 24 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information. Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
l l l
Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T16 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
49
Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum subrack power consumptionb Recommended typical configuration power consumption Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 450 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 17.7 in. (H)) 18 kg (39.6 lb.) 1800 W 700 W 37.5 A -48V DC/-60V DC -40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed. b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-12 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800 T16. Table 6-12 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Unit Name Typical Power Consumpt ion at 25C (77F) (W)a 509.2 Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (131F) (W)
a
Remarks
Subrack
OTU subrack
615.6
It is the power consumed after you install eight 10G OTUs (LDXes), one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install five NQ2s, two XCHes, two PIUs, one TQX, two TOAs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OTN electrical cross-connect subrack.
501
808
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
50
Unit Name
Remarks
OTM subrack
569.7
It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU1, one OBU1, six LDXes, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install four OBU1s, four VA1s, one SC2, two FIUs, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OLA subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two OAU1s, two MR8vs, two FIUs, eight LSXes, one SC2, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40, one D40, one WSMD9, one DAS1, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OADM subrack.
OLA subrack
228.1
294.3
OADM subrack
449.5
561.5
221
269.2
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
51
IU19 EFI
IU20 PIU
IU21 AUX
IU22 AUX
IU23 PIU
IU24 ATE
IU9 IU 1 IU 2 IU 3 IU 4 IU 5 IU 6 IU 7 IU 8
IU10 IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU 15
IU
16
IU 17
IU 18
IU25
FAN
l l
IU1-IU8, and IU11-IU18 are reserved for service boards. IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/SCC or for the other service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house other service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as a slave subrack. Each of slots IU9 and IU10 must be filled with a filler panel when they are used to house service boards.
l l l l l
IU19 is reserved for the EFI. IU20 and IU23 are reserved for the PIU. IU21 and IU22 are reserved for the AUX. IU24 is reserved for the ATE. IU25 is reserved for the fans.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN16.
Table 6-13 Functions Function Basic function Description Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Commissioning control
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 6-15 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Figure 6-15 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-14. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53
Table 6-14 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at low speed. l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F), the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
IU19 EFI IU20 PIU IU21 AUX IU22 AUX IU23 PIU IU24 ATE
IU9 IU 1 IU 2 IU 3 IU 4 IU 5 IU 6 IU 7 IU 8
IU10 IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU 15
IU
16
IU 17
IU 18
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
54
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-17 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 6-17 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal Speed adjusting signal FAN
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 6-18 shows a fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
55
SYSTEM
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 6-15 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H)) 3.6 kg (7.9) l 42.7 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 74.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed l 106.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 165.5 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed l 256.3 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 256.3 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
56
6.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
Difference
Table 6-17 Substitution rules of the PIU board Original Board TN51PIU Substitute Board TN16PIU Substitution Rules The TN16PIU can be created as TN51PIU on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN16PIU functions as the TN51PIU.
TN16PIU
None
6.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is configured with eight PIU boards. The eight boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is configured with four PIU boards. The four boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
57
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
58
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Power indicator (PWR) - green
Interface
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access the DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
Table 6-20 Valid slots for the TN16PIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89 IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46 IU20 and IU23
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
59
Performance Specifications
Table 6-21 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range Input DC power current Unit V DC A Value 1 -40 to -72 60
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.) TN16PIU: 0.65 (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 1.8 3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 1.8 3.6
TN51PIU TN16PIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
60
PIU
RTN
53A PWR
STI
-48V
ATE
PIU
RTN
53A PWR
-48V
ALMI2
ALMI1 ALMO1
LAMP1 LAMP2
These OptiX OSN 8800 T32 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure 6-22.
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
ALMO3
SERIAL
ALMO4
ALMO2
NM_ETH1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
61
PIU
RTN
STI
53A PWR -48V
ATE
LAMP1 LAMP2
ALMI2
ALMI1 ALMO1
These OptiX OSN 8800 T16 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and ATE, as shown in Figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
PIU EFI RTN(+) PWR NEG(-) ATE
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
ALMO3
SERIAL
NM_ETH1
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ALMO4
ALMO2
ALMI2
CLK2 TOD2
ALMO3 ALMO4
ALMO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
62
6.5.1 ATE
ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
Version Description
The functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51. Table 6-22 lists the version description of the ATE board. Table 6-22 Version description of the ATE board Item Functional version Description The available functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51. This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. l Appearance: The number of interfaces varies according to the board version. For details, see Front Panel. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see ATE Specification. Replacement The TN16ATE and TN51ATE cannot replace each other.
Difference
Application
The ATE provides alarm output/concatenation interface and alarm input interface. The TN16ATE provides interfaces for inputting and outputting clock signals. Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the ATE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
63
ALMI2
ALMO3 ALMO4
CLK2 TOD2
ALMO3 ALMO4
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the TN51ATE board and there are ten interfaces on the front panel of the TN16ATE board. Table 6-23 lists the types and functions of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
64
Table 6-23 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board Interface ALMO1 ALMO4 Type RJ-45 Function l Alarm signals can be output either to an alarm cabinet or an external device through ALMO1 ALMO4. At the alarm cabinet or external device, all alarms are displayed. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. ALMI1 ALMI2 RJ-45 The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm inputs. The name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms. CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time. TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals.
CLK1/CLK2
RJ-45
TOD1/TOD2
RJ-45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
65
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 6 7 8
Function Alarm signal output 3 negative Alarm signal output 5 positive Alarm signal output 5 negative
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
67
Pin 6 7 8
Function Ground Ground DCLS/1PPS input negative Ground Ground DCLS/1PPS input positive DCLS/1PPS output negative
68
Pin 8
Signal DCLS_OUT0_P
Valid Slots
One slot houses one ATE board. Table 6-30 shows the valid slots for the TN51ATE board. Table 6-30 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU87 IU48
Table 6-31 shows the valid slots for the TN16ATE board. Table 6-31 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU24
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: TN51ATE: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) TN16ATE: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) l Weight: TN51ATE: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.) TN16ATE: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
69
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.3 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3 0.3
TN51ATE TN16ATE
6.5.2 EFI
EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI board is available, that is, TN16.
Application
The EFI provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface, subrack communication interface and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board.
LAMP2
ETH2 ETH3
NM_ETH1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
70
CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.
Interfaces
There are eight interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board. Table 6-32 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 6-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board Interface LAMP1 LAMP2 ETH1ETH3 Type RJ-45 RJ-45 Function Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack. l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board. NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
71
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
ETH1_TXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 3
Signal ETH1_RXP
Function Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH1_CRIT_TXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
ETH1_RXN
ETH1_CRIT_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_RXN
ETH2_TXN
ETH2_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_TXP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
73
Pin 5
Signal ETH2_CRIT_TXN
Function Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH2_RXN
ETH2_CRIT_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_RXN
ETH3_TXN
ETH3_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXN
ETH3_RXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
74
Pin 7
Signal ETH3_CRIT_RXP
Function Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH3_CRIT_RXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
75
Table 6-37 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal NM_ETNTXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM Not connected Not connected Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM Not connected Not connected
NM_ETNTXN
NM_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NM_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC
NMJL_ETNTXN
NMJL_ETNRXP
4 5
NC NC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
76
Pin 6
Signal NMJL_ETNRXN
Function Negative pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM Not connected Not connected
7 8
NC NC
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI board. Table 6-40 shows the valid slots for the EFI board. Table 6-40 Valid slots for the EFI board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU19
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77
The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 6-30 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l l l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1. When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. As shown in Figure 6-30, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
U8 SERIAL T1
SW1
SW1
SW2
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
SW2
(ID6) (ID5) (ID4) (ID3) (ID2) (ID1) ON ON ON ON ON ON
NM_ETH2
(ID8) ON
(ID7) ON
78
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 2.5
EFI
6.5.3 EFI1
EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI1 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI1 provides network management and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board.
NM_ETH2 SERIAL
Interfaces
There are two interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board. Table 6-41 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79
Table 6-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board Interface NM_ETH2 Type RJ-45 Function l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function. SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
80
NMJL_ETNTXN
NMJL_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NMJL_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
81
Pin 5 6 7 8 9
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI1 board. Table 6-44 provides the valid slots for the EFI1 board. Table 6-44 Valid slots for the EFI1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU76 IU38
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 6-34 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l l l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD. When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. As shown in Figure 6-34, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
82
NM_ETH2
CPLD SERIAL
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
SW1
SW2
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 7
EFI1
6.5.4 EFI2
EFI2: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI2 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI2 provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface and subrack communication interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
83
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board.
LAMP1
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.
CAUTION
LAMP2 NM_ETH1
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board. Table 6-45 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 6-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board Interface LAMP1 LAMP2 Type RJ-45 Function Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
84
Interface NM_ETH1
Type RJ-45
Function l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
ETH1ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
85
Table 6-46 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH1_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH1_TXN
ETH1_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
ETH1_RXN
ETH1_CRIT_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_RXN
ETH2_TXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 3
Signal ETH2_RXP
Function Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH2_CRIT_TXP
ETH2_CRIT_TXN
ETH2_RXN
ETH2_CRIT_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_RXN
ETH3_TXN
ETH3_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
87
Pin 5
Signal ETH3_CRIT_TXN
Function Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH3_RXN
ETH3_CRIT_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_RXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
88
NM_ETNTXN
NM_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NM_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI2 board. Table 6-51 shows the valid slots for the EFI2 board. Table 6-51 Valid slots for the EFI2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU71 IU37
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
89
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 13 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 15
EFI2
6.5.5 STI
STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
Version Description
The functional versions of the STI board are TN52 and TNL1. In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
Application
The STI, a clock interface unit, provides interfaces for input and output of clock signals.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the STI board.
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
90
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
CLK1 TOD1 F1
NOTE
Interfaces
The STI board functions as an interface board of the system for STG. The TNL1STI can provide an orderwire phone interface and F1 interface. Table 6-52 provides descriptions of the interfaces on the STI board. Table 6-52 Interface description of the STI Interfa ce CLK1/ CLK2 TOD1/ TOD2 PHONE F1 Silkscreen CLK1/ CLK2 TOD1/ TOD2 PHON E F1 Connector RJ-45 Function CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time. TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals. Orderwire phone interface F1 interface
RJ-45
RJ-45 RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
91
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin 5 6 7 8
Function Ground DCLS/1PPS input positive DCLS/1PPS output negative DCLS/1PPS output positive
Function Transmitting (+) Transmitting (-) Receiving (+) Not connected Not connected Receiving (-)
93
Pin 7 8
Signal NC NC
Valid Slots
One slot houses one STI board. Table 6-57 shows the valid slots for the STI board. Table 6-57 Valid slots for the STI board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU82 IU47
Mechanical Specifications
l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight of TN52STI: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Weight of TNL1STI: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 1.5 3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 1.5 3
TN52STI TNL1STI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
94
7
Board Categor y Optical transpon der unit
The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 7-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800. Table 7-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 Board Name Board Description Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed
TN12L DM TN11L DMD TN11L DMS TN12L DX TN11LE M24 TN11LE X4 TN11L OA TN11L OG
2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 Ethernet switch board 410GE and 2OTU2 Ethernet switch board 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
95
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN12L OG TN11L OM TN12L OM TN13L QM TN12L QMD TN12L QMS TN11LS Q TN12LS X TN13LS X TN12LS XL TN12LS XLR TN11LS XR TN12L WXS 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
96
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN11T MX TN12T MX Tributar y unit TN52T DX TN53T DX TN52T OG TN52T OM TN52T QX TN53T QX TN55T QX TN53TS XL TN54T HA TN54T OA Line unit TN52N D2 TN53N D2 TN52N Q2 TN53N Q2
8 x GE service processing board 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 2 x 10G line service processing board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
97
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed
TN54N Q2 TN52N S2 TN53N S2 TN52N S3 TN54N S3 PID unit TN54E NQ2 TN54N PO2 TN55N PO2 TN55N PO2E Crossconnect unit and system and commun ication unit TN16X CH TNK2S XM TNK4S XM TN52X CH TN52X CM OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross) 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended High Cross-connection, System Control and Clock Processing Board OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 12 x OTU2 PID Board 40G line service processing board 10G Line Service Processing Board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted Not suppor ted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
98
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
TNK2X CT TNK4X CT TN16SC C TN51SC C TN52SC C TNK2S CC TN16A UX TN51A UX TNK2S XH TNK4S XH Optical multiple xer and demultip lexer unit TN11M 40 TN12M 40 TN11D4 0
Not suppor ted Not suppor ted Not suppor ted Suppo rted
Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
99
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN12D4 0 TN11M 40V TN12M 40V TN11D4 0V TN12FI U TN13FI U TN11IT L TN12IT L TN11SF IU Optical add and drop multiple xing unit TN11C MR2 TN11C MR4 TN11D MR1 TN11M R2 TN11M R4 TN11M R8 TN11M R8V fiber interface unit for sync timing CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA interleaver board 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA fiber interface unit 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
100
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
101
TN11SB M2 Reconfig urable optical add and drop multiple xing unit TN11R DU9 TN11R MU9a TN11R OAM TN12W SD9 TN13W SD9 TN12W SM9 TN13W SM9 TN11W SMD2 TN11W SMD4 TN12W SMD4 TN11W SMD9 Optical amplifier unit TN11C RPC TN11D AS1 TN11H BA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board 9-port ROADM multiplexing board reconfigurable optical adding board
2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band optical amplifier unit high-power booster amplifier board
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN11O AU1 TN12O AU1 TN13O AU1 TN11O BU1 TN12O BU1 TN11O BU2 TN12O BU2 Optical supervis ory channel unit TN11H SC1 TN12SC 1 TN12SC 2 TN11ST 2 Optical protectio n unit TN11D CP TN12D CP TN11O LP TN12O LP
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit 2-channel optical path protection unit
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
102
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
TN11SC S Spectru m analyzer unit TN11M CA4 TN11M CA8 TN11O PM8 TN11W MU Variable optical attenuato r unit Optical power and dispersio n equalizin g unit Clock unit TN12V A1 TN12V A4 TN11D CU TN11T DC
sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel optical power monitoring board wavelength monitoring unit 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit dispersion compensation board single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
TN52ST G TNK2S TG
Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed
optical booster and pre-amplifier board 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board 16 x GE Ethernet switching and processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
103
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
SSN4SF 64 SSN1SF 64A SSN4SF D64 SSN4SL 64 SSN4SL D64 SSN3SL H41 SSN4SL O16 SSN4SL Q16 SSN4SL Q64 ROPA subsyste m unitb TN11G FU TN11R GU TN11R OP Interface area unitc TN16A TE
1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 1 x STM-64 optical interface board
gain flatness unit ROPA gain unit ROPA pumping unit interface board of alarm & timing & expanding
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
104
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN51A TE TN16EF I TN51EF I1 TN51EF I2 TNL1S TI TN52ST I TN51PI U TN16PI U power interface unit EMI filter interface board
Not suppor ted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902. b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
105
8
About This Chapter
8.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. 8.2 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. 8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan) In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced. 8.4 PIU PIU: power interface unit 8.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
106
8.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. Figure 8-1 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 8-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
1
3 6
4 5
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.
l l l
Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack. Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area. Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet. Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 8-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 8-1 Technical specifications of the subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum Power Consumption Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H) 13 kg (28.6 lb.) 1200 W 25 A (-48 V) -48 V DC/-60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed.
Table 8-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 8-2 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 6800 Unit Name Typical Power Consumpti on at 25C (77F)a 566 Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55C (131F)a 722.2 Remarks
Su bra ck
OTU subrack
It is the power consumed after you install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU101, one OBU103, one FIU, one SC1, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTM subrack.
108
OT M subr ack
Subrack 1
566
722.2
Subrack 2
168.7
281.6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit Name
Remarks
OLA subrack
It is the power consumed after you install two OAU101s, two FIUs, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OLA subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two OAU101s, two VA4s, two OBU103s, two MR4s, four 10G OTUs (LSXes), two FIUs, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an FOADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40, one D40, two WSMD2s, two DAS1s, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack.
FOADM subrack
292.3
418.3
Subrack 1
87.4
96.4
Subrack 2
566
722.2
Subrack 1
160
268.8
Subrack 2
160
268.8
Subrack 3
160
268.8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
109
Unit Name
Remarks
It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OBU103, one OAU101, one SC1, one FIU, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTN subrack. It is the power consumed after you install ten ND2s, two TQXes, two TOAs, two XCSes, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTN subrack. It is the power consumption when the cabinet is installed with two OTU subracks, oneand one OTM subrack 2 in an OTM cabinet.
Optical subrack
168.7
281.6
Electrica l subrack
557
723.8
Ca bin et
1422.2
1951.1
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
110
Board area
X C I I I I I I I I S U U U U U U U U / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 9
X C S / I U 1 0
5
I U 1 1
I U 1 2
I U 1 3
I U 1 4
I U 1 5
I U 1 6
S C C / I U 1 7
P I S U C C P / I I U U 1 A 8 U X
IU19
IU20
IU21
VOA area
l l l l l l l
IU1-IU17 are reserved for service boards. IU21 is reserved for the AUX. IU19 and IU20 are reserved for the PIU. IU18 is reserved for the active SCC. IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards. IU9 and IU10 are available for the XCS or for the other service boards. IU15 and IU16 are available for the STG.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN11.
Table 8-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function Basic function Commissioning control Description Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 8-3 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
112
Air outlet
Board area
Air inlet
NOTE
If multiple subracks are used, an air duct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 8-4. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 8-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the temperature of a partition is lower than 45C (113F), the fans run at low speed. l If the temperature of a partition is higher than 65C (149F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 45C to 65C (113F to 149F), the fans in this partition run with linear stepless speed. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
113
Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
I U 1 9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VOA
There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
l l
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if: Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 8-6 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal Speed adjusting signal FAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
114
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at full speed. Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 8-7 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 8-7 Fan tray assembly
1. Air filter
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
115
Table 8-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H)) 3.6 kg l 40 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 60 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 120 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 120 W.
8.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
Type
Table 8-6 lists the types of the TN11PIU. Table 8-6 Type description of the PIU Unit TN11PIU Type 02 Description Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through the backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power.
8.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
116
Figure 8-8 Reference diagram for the application of the PIU board
Backplane -48V PIU A
-48V
PIU B
Board A
The system accesses two power supplies through PIU A and PIU B. The power distribution parts of the backplane are connected to different external power supplies. The power supplies provided by PIU A and PIU B are converged and converted into the -48 V power supply at the service board. In this manner, the PIU boards provide the -48 V power to each service board. The two PIU boards are of mutual hot backup. There is no active/standby relation between the two PIU boards. Thus, the subrack can work normally as long as any PIU board works normally. The total power provided by the two PIU boards is equal to the power consumption of the subrack. When the input voltage of the two PIU boards is different from each other, the two PIU boards provide uneven current. The PIU board with higher voltage provides most of the current. When the power output of one PIU board is abnormal or one PIU board is offline, the system reports alarms on the related boards. During the removal of the faulty board and the insertion of a new board, the system works normally. In this way, the maintenance is easier.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
117
Description The SCC board detects the overvoltage or undervoltage of the input voltage on each PIU board. The SCC board reports alarms to the NMS after it detects overvoltage or undervoltage. In this case, the system does not shut down the PIU board. The maintenance personnel should check for the cause according to the alarms.
NEG(-) RTN(+)
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel. The interface is used to access DC power from in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
Table 8-8 Valid slots for the TN11PIU board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU19 and IU20
Performance Specifications
Table 8-9 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range Input DC power current Unit V DC A Value 1 -40 to -72 30
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H)) Weight: 1.10 lb. (0.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board TN11PIU Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 24 W Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 38 W
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
119
xcs
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
PIU
RUN
NEG(-) RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
Fan
AUX
ALM CUT
xcs
SCC
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
120
CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.
Table 8-10 Description of interfaces in the interface area Interface Commissioning interface Inter-subrack communication interface Silk-screen COM ETH3 Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 Function It is for the commissioning. l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
121
Connector RJ-45
Function l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
OAM interface
SERIAL
DB9
The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol. External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms. This interface drives the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.
ALMI1 ALMI2
RJ-45
LAMP1 LAMP2
RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
122
STAT PROG
AUX
Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 8-11. Table 8-11 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board Interface NE management interface Silk-screen NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 Connector RJ-45 Function l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server to achieve the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
123
Silk-screen ETH1/ETH2
Connector RJ-45
Function l Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
124
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 2
Signal ETH3_TXN
Function Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications
ETH3_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXN
ETH3_RXN
ETH3_CRIT_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_RXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
126
Pin 6 7 8
Function Outputs the major alarm signal negative Alarm signal output 1 positive Alarm signal output 1 negative
Signal N.C
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Function Receive end of data Transmit end of data Data terminal equipment ready Ground Reserved Reserved GND Power supply for OADM
Pin 3 4 5 6 7 8
Function Alarm input 6 Alarm input 7 Ground Ground Alarm input 8 Ground
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 3 4 5 6 7 8
Function NM communications, receives the data positive Not connected. Not connected. NM communications, receives the data negative Not connected. Not connected.
NMJL_ETNTXN
NMJL_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NMJL_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
130
Table 8-22 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH1_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications
ETH1_TXN
ETH1_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
ETH1_RXN
ETH1_CRIT_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_RXN
ETH2_TXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
131
Pin 3
Signal ETH2_RXP
Function Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications
ETH2_CRIT_TXP
ETH2_CRIT_TXN
ETH2_RXN
ETH2_CRIT_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_RXN
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 8-15 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l l l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD. When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. As shown in Figure 8-15, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
132
NM_ETH2
CPLD SERIAL
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
SW1
SW2
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
133
9
Board Category Optical transponder unit
The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 9-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 9-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name TN11ECOM TN11L4G TN11LDGS TN11LDGD TN12LDM TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN12LDX TN11LEM24 TN11LEX4 TN11LOA TN11LOG TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board Description Enhanced communication interface unit Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board 410GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
134
Board Category
Board Name TN11LQG TN13LQM TN11LQMD TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN11LSQ TN11LSX TN12LSX TN13LSX TN11LSXL TN12LSXL TN11LSXLR TN12LSXLR TN11LSXR TN11LWX2 TN11LWXD TN11LWXS TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX
Board Description 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board 2 x GE tributary service processing board 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
Tributary unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board Category
Board Name TN11TOM TN52TOM TN11TQM TN12TQM TN11TQS TN11TQX TN52TQX TN55TQX TN11TSXL
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 2 x 10G line service processing board
Line unit
TN11ND2 TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2 TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2 TN11NS2 TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 TN11NS3 TN52NS3 TN54NS3
PID unit
PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz 4Electrical OTU2 with 410G Tributary Board 12 OTU2 PID board with 410G Tributary centralized cross connect board
TN11XCS TN12XCS
136
TN11M40 TN12M40 TN11D40 TN12D40 TN11M40V TN12M40V TN11D40V TN11FIU TN12FIU TN13FIU TN11ITL TN12ITL TN11SFIU
interleaver board
fiber interface unit for sync timing CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board 9-port ROADM multiplexing board reconfigurable optical adding board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
137
Board Category
Board Name TN11WSD9 TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9 TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN11WSMD2 TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4 TN11WSMD9
2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band optical amplifier unit high-power booster amplifier board optical amplifier unit
TN11CRPC TN11DAS1 TN11HBA TN11OAU1 TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1 TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2 TN12OBU2
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
138
sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel optical power monitoring board wavelength monitoring unit 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit Clock unit ROPA subsystem unita Interface area unitb
dispersion compensation board single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board centralized clock board gain flatness unit ROPA gain unit ROPA pumping unit EMI filter interface board power interface unit
a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 8 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
139
10
About This Chapter
10.1 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). 10.2 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. 10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan) Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly. 10.4 PIU PIU: Power Interface Unit 10.5 APIU APIU: AC Power Interface Unit 10.6 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
140
5 1 4 2
1. Grounding connector
2. Fiber frame
3. Board area
4. Antistatic jack
5. Fan indicator
l l l l l
Ground connector: Access the ground cables. Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame. Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available. Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area. Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.
Table 10-1 list the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the chassis Item Dimensions Specification 436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134 mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in. (D) x 5.28 in. (H) 6 kg (13.23 lb) 350 W -48 V DC/-60 V DC 220 V AC
141
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane) Maximum Power Consumption Nominal working voltage Direct current Alternative current
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 10-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 10-2 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name Typical Power Consum ption at 25C (77 F) Chassis 1 99.4 Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (131F) 135.3 Remarks
Chassi s
It is the power consumed after you install two TN21MR2s, four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OAU101s, one SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install two TN21MR2s, four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one SCC, two APIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OAU101s, one SCC, two APIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OBU103s, one SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OLA chassis.
Chassis 2
77.7
111.5
Chassis 1
162.2
207.5
Chassis 2
117.7
154.5
79.7
113.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
142
Unit Name
Remarks
It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OBU103s, one SCC, two APIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OLA chassis.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module.
l l l
IU1 and IU11 can hold two OADM boards each, or hold one service board such as IU11. IU2 to IU5 are reserved for the service boards. IU10 is reserved for the AUX.
The OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with AC and DC power supplies. The arrangement of boards in IU6, IU7, IU8, and IU9 is different for the two power supply modes. In DC mode l l IU6 and IU7 are reserved for the PIU. IU8 and IU9 are reserved for the SCC. IU9 is reserved for the active SCC. IU8 is available for either the standby SCC or the OADM board.
In AC mode: IU6, IU7, IU8 are reserved for two APIU boards. The IU9 is reserved for the SCC. The IU8 is occupied and is not available for the standby SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
Paired slots
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN21.
Commissioning control
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
144
Description Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information. Checks the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly is located on the left hand of the chassis. The fan blows air up, which creates an air duct from left to right. Other boards in the chassis are installed horizontally and are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 10-4 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800. Figure 10-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 10-4. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
NOTE
Auto Speed Mode is only available when the chassis operates with DC power.
Table 10-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description The fan speed depends on the temperature. l If the temperature is lower than 45C (113F), the fans run at low speed. l If the temperature is higher than 65C (149F), the fans run at high speed. l If the temperature ranges from 45C (113F) to 65C (149F), the fans run at medium speed. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
145
Description Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
NOTE
l l
If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if: Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 10-5 shows the functional block of the fan tray assembly. Figure 10-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal Speed adjusting signal FAN
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 10-6 shows a fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
1. Fans (6 in total)
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 10-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 41.0 mm (W) x 262.6 mm (D) x 126.5 mm (H) (1.61 in. (W) x 10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H)) 0.81 kg (1.79 lb) l 9 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 17 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 32.7 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
147
10.4 PIU
PIU: Power Interface Unit
10.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two PIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
148
RUN
S6 AUX
S5 SCC
S4 SCC
S2 PIU
S11 PIU
NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU
Indicator
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access the DC power in the range of -40 V to -72 V.
Performance Specifications
Table 10-7 Performance specifications of the PIU Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit V DC
Unit A
Value 7
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 in. (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W) Weight: 1.0 lb. (0.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 10 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 12
TN21PIU
10.5 APIU
APIU: AC Power Interface Unit
10.5.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two APIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1 +1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
150
Table 10-8 Functions and features of the APIU Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V, and provides -48 V DC power. l Provides lightning protection, filtering and power factor adjustment functions for the accessed power. l Supplies power to the fan tray assembly.
APIU
RUN
OFF ~100-240V
ON
Indicator
There is one indicator on the front panel of the APIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
Interfaces
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the APIU board. The interface is used to access the AC power in the range of 90 V to 285 V.
Performance Specifications
Table 10-9 Performance specifications of the APIU Item Input power voltage range Input frequency Input power current Output rated voltage Output rated current Output power Unit V AC Hz A AC V DC A DC W Value 90 to 285 50 4 -48 6.3 300
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) Weight: 1.8lb. (0.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 50 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 55
TN21APIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
152
STAT PROG
Table 10-10 describes the functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board.
AUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
153
Table 10-10 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board Interface NM interface Silk-Screen NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 Connector RJ-45 Function l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server so that the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. Extended auxiliary interfaces EXT DB9, RJ-45 Accesses and outputs each kind of external signals.
NOTE
EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
155
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SWCRIT_OUT1+ SWCRIT_OUT1SWCRIT_OUT2+ SWCRIT_OUT1+ SWCRIT_OUT1SWCRIT_OUT2SWCRIT_OUT2+ SWCRIT_OUT2Function Alarm output signal 1 positive Alarm output signal 1 negative Alarm output signal 2 positive Cascaded alarm output signal 1 positive Cascaded alarm output signal 1 negative Alarm output signal 2 negative Cascaded alarm output signal 2 positive Cascaded alarm output signal 2 negative
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
156
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
157
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal RED+ REDYELLOW+ GREEN+ GND YELLOWORG+ ORGFunction Positive pole for critical alarm signals Negative pole for critical alarm signals Positive pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for minor alarm signals Negative pole for minor alarm signals
ETNTX12N
ETNRX12P
4 5 6
NC NC ETNRX12N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 7 8
Signal NC NC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
159
11
Board Category Optical transponder unit
The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 11-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 11-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name TN11ECOM TN11L4G TN11LDGS TN11LDGD TN12LDM TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN12LDX TN11LOA TN11LOG TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM TN11LQG 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board Board Description Enhanced communication interface unit Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
160
Board Category
Board Name TN13LQM TN11LQMD TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN11LSX TN12LSX TN13LSX TN11LSXR TN11LWX2 TN11LWXD TN11LWXS TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX
Board Description 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board 2 x GE tributary service processing board 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 8 x GE service processing board 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
Tributary unit
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 10G Line Service Processing Board
Line unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
161
Board Category
Board Description
Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit Optical add and drop multiplexing unit
TN21DFIU TN13FIUa TN21FIU TN21CMR1 TN11CMR2 TN21CMR2 TN11CMR4 TN21CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN21DMR1 TN11MR2 TN21MR2 TN11MR4 TN21MR4 TN11SBM2
CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board optical amplifier unit optical amplifier unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
162
Board Description High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit 2-channel optical path protection unit
sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel optical power monitoring board 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
TN11DCU
TN21PIU TN21APIU
a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
163
12 Frame
12
About This Chapter
Frame
12.1 DCM Frame The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. 12.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution box. The frame is installed into the open rack. 12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI services. 12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
164
12 Frame
The DCM modules are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.). Each DCM frame holds two DCM modules. The DCM frame is installed on the columns of a cabinet with mounting airs and screws, as shown in Figure 12-1. Figure 12-1 DCM frame
1. DCM frame
2. DCMs
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
165
12 Frame
Table 12-1 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G. 652 fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Inserti on Loss (dB) 2.3 2.8 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 4 4 4 8 8 8 DSC R PMD (ps) PD L (dB ) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.4 Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 23 23 23 23 23 23 Operatio n Wavelen gth (nm) 1528 to 1568
DCM(S) DCM(T) DCM(A) DCM(B) DCM(C) DCM(D) DCM(E) DCM(F) FBG-DCM (80) FBG-DCM (100) FBG-DCM (120) FBG-DCM (160) FBG-DCM (200) FBG-DCM (240)
3.1/5 6.2/10 12.4/20 24.8/40 37.3/60 49.7/80 62.1/100 74.5/120 49.7/80 62.1/100 74.5/120 99.4/160 124.2/200 149.1/240
90% to 110%
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.6 1.6 1.6
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage the optical module.
Table 12-2 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G. 655 LEAF fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Inserti on Loss (dB) 4 5 DSC R PMD (ps) PD L (dB ) 0.3 0.3 Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 Operatio n Wavelen gth (nm) 1528 to 1568
DCM(A) DCM(B)
12.4/20 24.8/40
90% to 110%
0.4 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
166
12 Frame
Item Type
Distance (mi./km)
Max. Inserti on Loss (dB) 5.9 6.9 7.8 8.8 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
DSC R
PMD (ps)
DCM(C) DCM(D) DCM(E) DCM(F) FBG-DCM (120) FBG-DCM (160) FBG-DCM (200) FBG-DCM (240)
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage the optical module.
Table 12-3 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G. 653 fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Insert ion Loss (dB) 2 3 5 DSC R PMD (ps) PDL (dB) Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 Opera tion Wavel ength (nm) 1528 to 1568
90% to 110%
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage the optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
167
12 Frame
Table 12-4 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (TWRS fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Insert ion Loss (dB) 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.2 4.7 DSC R PMD (ps) PDL (dB) Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 Opera tion Wavel ength (nm) 1528 to 1568
90% to 110%
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage the optical module.
Table 12-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame Item Dimensions Weight Specification 48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) (1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D) ) 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
168
12 Frame
2 1
2: CRPC board
Table 12-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame Item Mechanical specifications Weight Value 535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in. (W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H) 3 kg (6.6 lb)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
169
12 Frame
Table 12-7 Mechanical specifications Item Weight Maximum Power Value 1.58 kg (3.5 lb.) 40 W (fully-loaded frame with all accessories) Note - power consumption dependent on the SFP type 482.6 mm (W) x 105.66 mm (D) x 45.72 mm (H) (19 in.(W) x 4.16 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H))
Dimensions
Table 12-8 Electrical specifications Item Impedance Connector Reclocked Standard Value 75 BNC per IEC 61169-8 Annex A SMPTE 424M (3Gb/s), SMPTE 292M, (1.5Gb/s), SMPTE 259M (270Mb/s), DVB-ASI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
170
12 Frame
Item Equalization
Table 12-9 Optical specifications Item Optical Output: Number of Outputs Connector Optical Power Operating Wavelength Optical Input: Number of Inputs Connector Operating Wavelength Maximum Input Power Up to 2 per SFP LC 1310nm -1dBm Up to 2 per SFP LC -1dBm 1dBm 1310nm Value
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
171
12 Frame
Table 12-10 Technical specifications of the power box Item Number of Inputs Input Voltage Frequency Power Number of Outputs Output Voltage Output Current Dimensions Environmental Temperature Value 2 Auto ranging, 100-240V AC 50/60Hz 250W max per input 6 Primary + 6 Secondary 12V DC 3.5 A 482.6 mm (W) x 119.38 mm (D) x 45.72 mm (H) (19 in.(W) x 4.7 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H)) -20C to +70C (-4 F to 158 F)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
172
12 Frame
1 2
1: Captive screw
4
2: Fiber holder 3: Fiber spool 4: Attenuator holder
1 2 3
1: Box
4
3: Cable hole 4: Tray
2: Mounting ear
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
173
13 Overview of Boards
13
About This Chapter
Overview of Boards
13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label. 13.2 Bar Code for Boards There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
174
13 Overview of Boards
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is properly grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board. Table 13-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions. Table 13-1 Board appearance and dimensions Board Appearance Board Name Number of Slots for Each Board 1 Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm)
TN11L4G
264.6
25.4
220.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
175
13 Overview of Boards
Board Appearance
Board Name
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
TN11OA U1
264.6
50.8
220.0
TN11M40
264.6
76.2
220.0
TN11AU X
107.6
25.4
220.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
176
13 Overview of Boards
Board Appearance
Board Name
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
TN12LSX L
264.6
101.6
220.0
TN21MR4
118.9
25.4
220.0
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes. Table 13-2 shows the laser hazard levels of the unit. Table 13-2 Hazard levels Hazard Level HAZARD LEVEL 1 Label Reference Power Range <10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
177
13 Overview of Boards
Label
Reference Power Range 10.00 dBm - 21.3 dBm (10.00 mW - 136 mW)
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
13.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.
Figure 13-1 and Figure 13-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure 13-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery information Board version (TN12) Board model number
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
178
13 Overview of Boards
Delivery information
The complete BOM should be 0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table 13-3 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
13 Overview of Boards
Table 13-3 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0303 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406 or 0303 (client side)
The board is installed with a wavelength tunable optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected as required for the board. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed with a fixed optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. Optical modules are installed on the client and WDM sides of the board.
0303
0307
0302
0231
NA
Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l l For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed. For the SSN3SLH41 board,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
180
13 Overview of Boards
The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305. Table 13-4 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table 13-4 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0302 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406
The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed optical modules.
0305
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
181
14
About This Chapter
14.1 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit 14.2 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity 14.3 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 14.4 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 14.5 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 14.6 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 14.7 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 14.8 LDX LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 14.9 LEM24 LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board 14.10 LEX4 LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board 14.11 LOA LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board. 14.12 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
14.13 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 14.14 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 14.15 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board 14.16 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 14.17 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 14.18 LSQ LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 14.19 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 14.20 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 14.21 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 14.22 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 14.23 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board 14.24 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) 14.25 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 14.26 TMX TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
183
14.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
14.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane. For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX OSN 900A, see Figure 14-1 and Figure 14-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
184
Figure 14-1 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN 900A Service signal F I Management signal U OTU
ECOM
ETH
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Figure 14-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN 900A Service signal F I Management signal U OTU
ECOM
ETH
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
185
MUX ECOM
DMUX ECOM
FE 8
FE
8
DMUX
GE
MUX
GE
Client side
Client side
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used in the CWDM system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
186
Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON eSFP
Description l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
187
Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board
FE Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 Backplane(management signal transmission)
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals) from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface. l Receive direction The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
188
O/E E/O
Client-side optical module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal electrical signals to FE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
ECOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN
ECOM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
l l l l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board. Table 14-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8
LC LC
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, AP1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 14-5 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board
Client side
PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 PORT10
WDM side
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
L2 switching module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
193
Table 14-5 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM board Port Name PORT3-PORT10 VCTRUNK1 AP1 IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1RX8/TX8. Internal virtual port. Internal convergence port. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not be set on the U2000.
If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module. Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client in Figure side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown 14-8. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown 14-8. l in Figure
l l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing the cross-connect grooming of GE services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
194
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
Client side
1 101(AP1/AP1)-1 2
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of other boards
1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to configure the working mode of the board.
C, CWDM Default: C
Board Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
196
Bo ard TN 11E CO M
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-40 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range dBm dBm dB nm -3 -11.5 9 1270 to 1355 0 -4.5 9 1270 to 1355 5 -2 9 1500 to 1580
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
197
Unit
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (EOL) Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm
-19
-20
-22
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Table 14-8 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB nm nm nm 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 6.5 1.0 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
198
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 30
dB -
30 IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation nm dBm dBm dB nm 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
199
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 1 30
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm dB -
1 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 19.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 21.6
TN11ECOM
14.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
200
14.2.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-9. Figure 14-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system
1 GE 6 Client side WDM side L4G G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 L4G 6 Client side 1 GE
NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU5G interface on WDM-side. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G. l Supports TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Supported
NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported
Test frame
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
202
Description Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports VLAN SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Inloop Client side MAC PHY Supported Supported Supported Supported IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, and IGRP Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IGMP STP RSTP
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
Figure 14-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board
GE
Client side RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6 E/O O/E
6GE 4GE
Backplane(service cross-connection)
WDM side E/O
L2 switching module
4GE
OUT
Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the L4G board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module. The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals. The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/ FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
206
L4G
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 OUT IN
L4G
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board. Table 14-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
Table 14-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX6 RX1-RX6
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
208
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 14-14 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-12 Port diagram of the L4G board
Client side PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8
VCTRUNK1 101(AP1/AP1)-1 VCTRUNK2 102(AP2/AP2)-1 VCTRUNK3 103(AP3/AP3)-1 VCTRUNK4 104(AP4/AP4)-1 L2 swithing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
209
Table 14-14 Meaning of NM port of the L4G board Port Name PORT3-PORT8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6 respectively. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
l l
There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created: Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-13. Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
210
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other board, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through of the broadcast services.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other boards, as shown by 6 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.)
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 2 1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
L4G
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDMside of other boards The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the c lient side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5 6
Other board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
211
Table 14-15 L4G parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off
Laser Status
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
212
Field Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780 Default: /
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
213
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L 4G
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
214
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 9 1000 BASELX-40 km 9 1000 BASEZX-80 km 9
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Table 14-17 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
215
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power dBm dBm 2 -2 2 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
216
Unit
Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
0.3 35 3400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 APD
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25 C ( 77F ) (W) 50.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C ( 131F ) (W) 55.0
TN11L4 G
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
217
Board
WDM-Side Module
14.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
14.3.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-14. Figure 14-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system
MUX
1 GE 2 LDGD G.694.1/ G.694.2
DMUX
1
GE
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
218
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported. Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
Function and Feature FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Inloop Client side Inloop Inloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
220
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
221
Figure 14-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
GE WDM side
O/E
GE CrossOTN encapsulation and mapping Processing connect module module module
E/O
Splitter
E/O
Client side Optical module
O/E
WDM side Optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LDGD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDGD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
224
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board. Table 14-20 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
225
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210. l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
226
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 14-24 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
Cross-connect mo dule
Table 14-24 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
3
in Figure 14-18.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
NOTE
4
in Figure 14-18.
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown
5
in Figure 14-18.
The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
LDGD
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Other board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
228
Laser Status
Service Mode
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
229
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196. 050 to 80/1560.61/192 .100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208 .170 to 18/1611.00/188 .780 Default: /
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
230
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
TN 11L DG D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
231
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
232
Table 14-27 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
233
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
234
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable) -9 -27
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
-9 -27
-9 -27
Table 14-29 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 2 0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
235
Unit
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
Power Consumption
Bo ard WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 34.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 37.4
TN 11L DG D
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
38.0
41.8
14.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
236
14.4.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-19. Figure 14-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system
1 GE 2
Client side WDM side
1 GE 2
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
237
Table 14-30 Functions and features of the LDGS board Function and Feature Basic function Description
Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. Not supported Supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
238
Description
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
239
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
240
Figure 14-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board
Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
GE WDM side
O/E
GE CrossOTN encapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LDGS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDGS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
243
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on front panel of the LDGS board. Table 14-31 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-31 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
244
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 14-34 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 Service processing module 1(IN/OUT)-1 WDM side
Cross-connect module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
245
Table 14-34 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
in Figure 14-23.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
NOTE
4
in Figure 14-23.
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown
5
in Figure 14-23.
The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/ OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
246
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 4(RX2/TX2)-1 3 5
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
LDGS
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Other board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
247
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off
Laser Status
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
LPT Enabled
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
248
Value -
Description Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780 Default: /
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
249
Bo ard
TN 11L DG S
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZ1000 BASE-LX-10 PIN km 12800 ps/nm-C Band1000 BASE-LX-40 Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZkm PIN 1.25 Gbit/s 3200 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP Fixed Wavelength-NRZCWDM)-40 km APD 2.67 Gbit/s 12800 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP Tunable WavelengthCWDM)-80 km NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
250
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
251
Table 14-37 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
252
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
253
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) -28 -9
dBm dBm
-18 0
-28 -9
-18 0
-28 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Table 14-39 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
254
Unit
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Bo ard TN 11L DG S WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 32.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 35.2
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)
36.0
39.6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
255
14.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
Type
The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 14-40 lists the types of the LDM board. Table 14-40 Type description of the LDM board Board LDM Type One type is the single transmitting and single receiving board. Other type is the dual-fed selectively receiving board. Description The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1. The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
14.5.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-24 and Figure 14-25.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
Figure 14-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDM G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX 2 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LDM G.694.2
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
2 Client side
Figure 14-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDM DMUX MUX 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 2 LDM DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
257
Table 14-41 Functions and features of the LDM board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s OTN function l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1. WDM specification ESC function PRBS function Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
258
Function and Feature LPT function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
259
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
260
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
261
Figure 14-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.5.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LDM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
264
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board. Table 14-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
265
Table 14-43 Valid slots for the LDM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Table 14-45 LDM parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
267
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
LPT Enabled
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
268
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
SD Trigger Condition
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
269
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 12L DM
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-46 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
270
Unit
km
15
40
80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
271
Unit
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module, or 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 14-47 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
272
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 9 1000 BASELX-40 km 9 1000 BASEZX-80 km 9
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-48 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
273
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
274
Table 14-49 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
275
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Table 14-51 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
276
Unit
km
120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz nm nm dB ps/nm 3 0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
277
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 22.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 24.8
TN12LDM
14.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
14.6.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-28. Figure 14-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system
G.694.1 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDMD DMUX MUX 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 2 LDMD DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
278
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
279
Function and Feature WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function
Description Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
280
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
281
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
282
Figure 14-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
Splitter
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Communication
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.6.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LDMD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDMD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
285
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board. Table 14-53 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
286
Table 14-54 Valid slots for the LDMD board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210. l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
287
Table 14-56 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
288
Value None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
Description The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. Click D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Laser Status
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
289
Field Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Click D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
C, CWDM Default: C
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
290
Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
TN 11L DM D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
291
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-58 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
292
Unit
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 14-59 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580
nm
830 to 860
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
294
Table 14-60 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
295
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-61 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm APD NA -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
296
Unit
dB
-27
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -4 -8 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
G.959.1 - compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
297
Unit
Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27
Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.7 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 26.9 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 29.6
TN11LDMD
14.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving
14.7.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-31. Figure 14-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system
1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDMS G.694.1 DMUX 2 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LDMS
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
2 Client side
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
OTN function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
300
Description l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
301
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
302
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
303
Figure 14-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.7.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LDMS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDMS
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
l l l l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board. Table 14-64 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
308
Table 14-67 LDMS Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. Click D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. Click D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
309
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
310
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Click D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
311
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 11L DM DS
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-68 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
312
Unit
km
15
40
80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
313
Unit
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 14-69 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
314
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 9 1000 BASELX-40 km 9 1000 BASEZX-80 km 9
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-70 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
315
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
316
Table 14-71 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
317
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -1 -5 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
318
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.4 lb. (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 26.9 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 29.6
TN11LDMS
14.8 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
14.8.2 Application
The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that comply with the ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-34. Figure 14-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e Client side MUX LDX G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 LDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
319
Maps two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
NOTE The 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service are processed identically. For the 10GE WAN service, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing to comply with the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 into OTU2 signals, and the transparent mapping of 10GE LAN/OTU2e into OTU2e signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
320
Description
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
XFP
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
321
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
322
Figure 14-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board
Client side
RX 1 SDH/ SONET encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
E/O
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
IN1
O/E
Client - side OTN processing module 10
OUT 2
TX2
E/O
Clientside optical module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
WDMside optical module
IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX to the client side of the LDX. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2 or OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 or OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 or OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/ AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324
Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
325
LDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board. Table 14-74 describes the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326
Table 14-74 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board Interface IN1-IN2 OUT1-OUT2 TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Table 14-78 Loopbacks supported by LDX boards Board TN12LDX Loopback Type Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop WDM-side inloop Client-side outloop When 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services are received, see Figure 14-38. When OTU2/OTU2e services are received, see Figure 14-39. Description See Figure 14-37.
The implementation of client-side inloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side outloops. The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDMside inloops. l Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-37, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-37 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN12LDX board
RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE ODU2/ WAN/STM-64/OCODU2e 192/OTU2/OTU2e 10GE LAN/10GE ODU2/ WAN/STM-64/OCODU2e 192/OTU2/OTU2e OTU2/ OTU2e IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2 Client-side
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2 WDM-side
WDM-side inloop and client-side outloop Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 service is received on the client side. As shown in Figure 14-38, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the client-side port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
329
Figure 14-38 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LDX board (1)
RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2 Client-side
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2 WDM-side
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when one OTU2/OTU2e service is received on the client side. As shown in Figure 14-39, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the client side is demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. The OTU2/OTU2e service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2/ ODU2e loopback point. Figure 14-39 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LDX board (2)
RX1/TX1 OTU2/ OTU2e ODU2/ ODU2e OTU2/ OTU2e IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2 Client-side
OTU2/ OTU2e
ODU2/ ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2 WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2v, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
331
Field Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
332
Value Enabled, Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Default: Disabled
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
333
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
TN 12L DX
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2 signals. The following specifications completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, or 10GE WAN signals. The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals. The specifications listed following completely apply to 10GE LAN signals.
Table 14-80 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10 Gbit/s rate services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km NRZ MLM 0.3
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 1530 to 1565 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 1530 to 1565 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 840 to 860
nm
1290 to 1330
dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
335
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km -7 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1
dBm
0.5
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Table 14-81 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
336
Unit
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
337
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-83 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
338
Unit
Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
Power Consumption
Bo ard LD X WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25 C (77F) (W) 44.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C (131F) (W) 51.2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
45.5
52.2
14.9 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
14.9.2 Application
The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit. As an OTU, the LEM24 board converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Further, the board supports transparent transmission of 16 channels of GE or two channels of 10GE services. Figure 14-40 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system. Figure 14-40 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system
G.694.1
5 GE FE LEM24 10GE LAN 10GE WAN 28
Client side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports and are capable of processing GE and FE services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
340
Table 14-84 Functions and features of the LEM24 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
NOTE l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal. l It is recommended to change RX21/TX21, RX22/TX22 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Cross-connect capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board. l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side. l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals. l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the OTU2 and ODU2 layers. l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer.
OTN function
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
341
Description The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported in the WDM side. Supported in the Client side and WDM side. Supports stacking VLAN. Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah. l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
Supports VLAN-based multicast. Supports a group of CVLANs being used as one VLAN. Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports IGMP snooping. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Flow control Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Provides point-to-point EPLs. Provides point-to-multipoint EVPLs and supports VLAN-based switching.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
342
Description 10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical port: 1000MFUL, auto-negotiation GE electrical port: auto-negotiation FE optical port: 100MFULL FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side Supported Not supported Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side. Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
MAC
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
PHY
Inloop Outloop
GE optical interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
GE electric interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
FE optical interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
343
Description FE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop WDM side optical interface Inloop Outloop Supported Supported IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc. Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS Supported Not supported Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
344
Figure 14-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side
E/O
OUT3 OUT4
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN3 IN4
1588
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
345
Figure 14-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
Client side RX5 RX6 RX28 TX5 TX6 TX28
Backplane(service cross-connection)
WDM side
E/O
OUT3 OUT4
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN3 IN4
1588
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board. The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the LEM24. l Transmit direction The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service cross-connection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.
The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Performs convergence/deconvergence of service signals. l OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347
from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
348
LEM24
STAT ACT PROG SRV
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 5 ~ 6: 10 GE 7 ~ 28: GE TX RX TX
RX TX RX OUT OUT
IN
IN
13 5
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 3
LEM24
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are fifty-two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board. Table 14-85 describes the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349
Table 14-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board Interface RX5-RX28a TX5-TX28a IN3-IN4 Type LC LC LC Function Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT3-OUT4
LC
a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.
The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350
351
Physical Port TX21/RX21 TX22/RX22 TX23/RX23 TX24/RX24 TX25/RX25 TX26/RX26 TX27/RX27 TX28/RX28
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-44 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 14-88 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-44 Port diagram of the LEM24 board
Client side PORT5 PORT6
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3
WDM side 101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 Cross-connect module Backplane Service processing module WDM side optical module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
3(IN3/OUT3)-1 4(IN4/OUT4)-1
PORT28
VCTRUNK4
L2 sw itching module
Table 14-88 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board Port Name PORT5 - PORT28 VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4 AP1 - AP4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Definition Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352
Definition Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 Internal logical ports. Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the U2000. Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 14-45.
NOTE
The ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration of these connections on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
353
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Client side
103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4
354
Boa rd
Service Type
Description See Figure 14-47. See Figure 14-48. See Figure 14-49.
See Figure 14-50. See Figure 14-51. See Figure 14-52. See Figure 14-53.
WDM-side
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MAC outloop
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355
As shown in Figure 14-47, two 10GE services are received on the client side. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point. Figure 14-47 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2 ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-48, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services, or two 10GE services from the backplane are received by the L2 switching module. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-48 MAC/PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
356
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of GE/FE (Optical Port) Services on the LEM24 Board
l MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-49, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services. The two 10GE services are then deconverged by the L2 switching module into two 10GE services and twentytwo GE/FE services. Any N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point. Figure 14-49 MAC/PHY inloop of one GE/FE (optical port) service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2 ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of GE/FE (Electrical Port) Services on the LEM24 Board
l PHY outloop As shown in Figure 14-50, twenty-two GE/FE services are received on the client side. Any N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
357
Figure 14-50 PHY outloop of one GE/FE (electrical port) service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-51, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services. The two 10GE services are then deconverged by the L2 switching module into two 10GE services and twentytwo GE/FE services. Any N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-51 MAC/PHY inloop of one GE/FE (electrical port) service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
358
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
The LEM24 board supports both GE/FE electrical signals and GE/FE optical signals. The figure only demonstrates how GE/FE optical signals are received.
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
WDM-side outloop As shown inFigure 14-53, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. The ODU2 service is then mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
359
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
360
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
361
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE only support FEC.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
362
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
363
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 1000BASE-SX, I-850LC 1000BASE-LX, I-1310LC 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/EW (SFP+)
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
TN 11L EM 24
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm dBm dBm 830 to 860 -2.5 -9.5 1270 to 1355 -3 -9.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
364
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
dB -
IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 770 to 860 -17 0 PIN 1260 to 1620 -20 -3
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Table 14-92 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services Item Optical Module Type Optical interface service rate Optical source type Line code format Target distance Gbit/s Unit Value 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10.3125 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10.3125 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) 10.3125
km
SLM NRZ 10
SLM NRZ 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
1530 to 1565
dBm dBm
-1 -7.3
0.5 -8.2
4 -4.7
365
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Output optical power in case of laser shutdown Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 3.5 -30 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) 3 -30
dB dBm
3 -30
IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 840 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1355 PIN 1530 to 1565
dBm dBm
-11.1 -1
-14.4 0.5
-14.1 -1
dB
-12
-12
-26
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dBm dBm dB
2 -3 9
366
Unit
Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-94 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range dBm dBm dB THz 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
367
Unit
Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
GHz nm dB ps/nm
5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-95 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
368
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
dBm
-6
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
369
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25 C (77F) 81 Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C (131F) 83
TN11 LEM2 4
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
82
84
14.10 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
14.10.2 Application
The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit. The LEX4 board converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 board also performs the reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. The board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of 10GE services. Figure 14-54 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370
LEX4
Client side
WDM side
Client side
The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 14-96 Functions and features of the LEX4 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services crossconnected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board. l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side. l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals. l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the OTU2 and ODU2 layers. l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer. WDM specification Supports DWDM specifications.
OTN function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
371
Description Supported
NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported in the WDM side. Supported in the Client side and WDM side. Supports stacking VLAN. Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah. l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
Supports VLAN-based multicast. Supports a CVLAN group that is being used as one VLAN. Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports IGMP snooping. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
372
Function and Feature Flow control Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Port working mode PRBS function Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme
Description Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports VLAN SNCP. l Supports DBPS protection. l Supports ERPS protection
SFP+/XFP
Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side. Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
373
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc. Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
374
Figure 14-55 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side
E/O
OUT1 OUT2
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN1 IN2
1588
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
375
Figure 14-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
Client side RX1 RX2 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX4
Backplane(service cross-connection)
WDM side
E/O
OUT1 OUT2
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN1 IN2
1588
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board. In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The RX1 to RX4 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service crossconnection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LEX4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LEX4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
378
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board. Table 14-97 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-97 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board Interface RX1-RX4 TX1-TX4 IN1-IN2 Type LC LC LC Function Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
379
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-58 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 14-100 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
380
WDM side 101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 Cross-connect module Backplane Service processing module WDM side optical module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1
L2 sw itching module
Table 14-100 Meaning of NM port of the LEX4 board Port Name PORT5 - PORT8 VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4 AP1 - AP4 ClientLP1 - ClientLP2 ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2 IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces: RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 Internal logical ports. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
l l
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000. Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 14-59.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
381
The ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Client side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
382
Table 14-101 Loopbacks supported by LEX4 boards Board TN11L EX4 Loopback Type 10GE PHY outloop 10GE MAC outloop 10GE MAC/ PHY inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Description See Figure 14-60. See Figure 14-61. See Figure 14-62. See Figure 14-63. See Figure 14-64.
10GE services PHY outloop As shown in Figure 14-60, four 10GE services are received on the client side. Any N of the 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 14-60 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 PHY PHY PHY PHY L2 switching module Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services MAC MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
Backplane WDM-side
10GE services MAC outloop As shown in Figure 14-61, four 10GE services are received on the client side. Any N of the 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
383
Figure 14-61 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 PHY PHY PHY PHY L2 switching module Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side MAC MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
10GE services MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-62, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services, or two 10GE services from the backplane are received by the L2 switching module. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-62 MAC/PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 PHY PHY PHY PHY L2 switching module Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side MAC MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-63, four services received on the client side are mapped into two ODU2 service. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
384
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side outloop As shown inFigure 14-64, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. The ODU2 service is then mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
385
Table 14-102 LEX4 Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
386
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE only support FEC.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
387
Description Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
TN 11L EX 4
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
388
km
SLM NRZ 10
SLM NRZ 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Output optical power in case of laser shutdown Eye pattern mask nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565
-1 -7.3 3 -30
4 -4.7 3 -30
IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 840 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1355 PIN 1530 to 1565
dBm dBm
-11.1 -1
-14.4 0.5
-14.1 -1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
389
Unit
dB
-12
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm
390
Unit
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 14-105 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
391
Table 14-106 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
392
Unit
dB
-27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.5 lb. (0.7 kg)
Power Consumption
Boar d WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 64 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 67
TN11 LEX4
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
65
68
14.11 LOA
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
393
14.11.2 Application
The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s or 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Ports on the LOA board can work in any of the following modes: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2). Ports on the LOA board support the service package configuration, that is, 8xGE ODU0 configuration. After this configuration is applied, all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 non-convergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE (GFP-T) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly.
NOTE
In this scenario, the client-side services are FE, GE, STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, DVB-ASI services. Application of the LOA board in 8 * GE ODU0 configuration is the same as that of the ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
394
NOTE
In this scenario, the client-side services are HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48 services. In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
NOTE
In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
395
NOTE
In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI or FC400 services, and the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800 services.
NOTE
In this scenario, client-side port RX1/TX1 receives and transmits FC800 services.
Table 14-107 Functions and features of the LOA board Function and Feature Basic function Description l The LOA board converges a maximum of eight channels of Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s or 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse convergence and conversion. l The LOA board's ports can work in any of five modes: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2). l Ports on the LOA board support the batch port configuration, that is, 8 * GE ODU0 configuration. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
NOTE The LOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
397
Description l Maps Any signals into OTU2 signals. It encapsulates and maps signals in compliance with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions specific to the OTU1 and OTU2 layers. l Supports PM functions specific to the ODU0 layers. l Supports PM and TCM functions specific to the ODU1 and ODU2 layers. l Supports the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and PM specific to the ODU1 and ODU2 layers. l Supports the non-intrusive monitoring function at the PM specific to the ODUflex layer.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. This function is supported only when the LOA board receives GE/FE services on its client side. l Supports PRBS tests on client-side signals: STM1-1, STM1-4, STM1-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, AND OTU1. l Supports PRBS tests on WDM-side OTU2 signals.
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
398
Description This function is supported only when the LOA board receives GE/FE services on its client side. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. The client-side ports RX1/TX1 on the LOA board support pluggable SFP+ modules.
Loopback
Channel Loopback
Inloop Outloop
Supported
NOTE For FC800 services, Inloop is not supported only in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
NOTE It is not supported in FC800 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
399
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
400
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
401
Figure 14-70 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOA board
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
O/E
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal flow
The LOA board can receive Any optical signals on the client side (signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gibt/s or FC800 signals).
NOTE
The LOA board supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not support hybrid transmission of FC800 signals and low-rate signals. The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. For details on the signal types, see 14.11.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOA to the WDM side of the LOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
402
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical port. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical port. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical ports.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of service encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module The module encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps them into OTU2 payload. It also performs the reversion operations. The module also monitors performance of Any signals. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
404
LOA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN
LOA
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
405
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board. Table 14-108 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-108 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOA board Interface INa Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUTa
LC
TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8
LC LC
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface.
NOTE
All of the eight pairs of ports on the client side can be used to receive and transmit the supported services except FC800, which must be received and transmitted by the RX1 and TX1 ports. The total bandwidth for the eight pairs of ports on the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
406
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) When the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 14-72 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 14-73 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. For details about ODU timeslot configuration modes, see 14.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407
Figure 14-72 Port diagram 1 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 ODU0:2 WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8) ODU0:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
. . .
10(RX8/TX8)-1
. . .
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
. . .
ODU0:8
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
Figure 14-73 Port diagram 2 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP/ ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2 WDM Side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
ODU2:1 207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-2 ODU0:2
OCH:1
IN/OUT
9(RX7/TX7)-1
ODU0:1 ODU1:4
10(RX8/TX8)-1
NOTE
8*GE ODU0 configuration: all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 nonconvergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE(GFP-T) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly. Figure 14-72 show the port diagram. When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the LOA board.
ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Figure 14-74 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
408
Figure 14-74 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4) ODU1:1 ODU1:2 IN/OUT
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
ODU1:3 ODU1:4
NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) When the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 14-75 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 14-73 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. For details about ODU timeslot configuration modes, see 14.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Figure 14-75 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2 ODU0:2 ODU0:3 ODU2:1 ODU0:4 OCH:1 IN/OUT
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
ODU0:7 ODU0:8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
409
Figure 14-76 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1(1~4)-ODU0(1~2) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 ODU1:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 ODU0:2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2 ODU0:1 ODU1:2 ODU0:2 ODU2:1 OCH:1
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
IN/OUT
NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) Figure 14-77 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
Figure 14-77 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP2/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1 OCH:1 IN/OUT
10(RX8/TX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-1
ODUflex:2
NOTE
Only the RX1/TX1 port can receive FC800 services. Any two of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive 3G-SDI/FC400 services as shown in the figure (the RX1/TX1 ports are used as an example).
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) Figure 14-78 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
410
Figure 14-78 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
Cross-connect module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
Table 14-111 Meanings of the LOA board's ports on the NMS (port modes) Logical Port Name 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) Channel Name IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU0:(1 to 8) Meaning Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2) Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2). Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2). Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU1:(1 to 8)
201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU0:(1 to 8)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
411
Meaning Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2). Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2).
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
l l
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP3 port works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, optical port is RX5/TX5 and logical port is 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 203(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1. For details, see
4
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP4 port works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, logical port is 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:5. For cross-connection 2, logical port is
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP5 port works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, logical port is 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU1:4ODU0:2. For details, see
8
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP6 port works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2). Then, logical port is 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)1 and channel is IN/OUT OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3. For details, see
10
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP7 port works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for IN/OUT port. Then, logical port is 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)1 and channel is IN/ OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:1. For details, see
NOTE
11
in Figure 14-79.
When configuring a cross-connection, set ODUflex Timeslot to 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI, and set it to 4 if the client service type is FC400, and set it to 7 if the client service type is FC800.
NOTE
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 8*GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) and the service type to GE(GFP-T) for the eight ports. The mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. The total rate of client-side services cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
2
1 3 5 6 7 8 9
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
4
10
11
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
413
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
See Figure 14-80. See Figure 14-81. See Figure 14-82. See Figure 14-83 See Figure 14-84. See Figure 14-85. See Figure 14-86 See Figure 14-87. See Figure 14-88. See Figure 14-89 See Figure 14-90. See Figure 14-91. See Figure 14-92 See Figure 14-93. See Figure 14-94. See Figure 14-95. See Figure 14-96. See Figure 14-97.
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 ; When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2.
Client-side outloop
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414
As shown in Figure 14-80, eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 14-80 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-81, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
415
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-82, eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services received on the client side are mapped into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
416
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-83, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
417
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-85, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services. Any N of the four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-86, four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services received on the client side are mapped into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-87, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
418
OTU1
ODU1
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-89, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
419
OTU1
ODU1
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-90, four OTU1 services received on the client side are mapped into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
OTU1
ODU1
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-91, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
420
OTU1
ODU1
RX1/TX1
FC800
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-93, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into two 3G-SDI/FC400 services. Any N of the two 3G-SDI/ FC400 services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
421
Client-side
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-94, two 3G-SDI/FC400 services received on the client side are mapped into two ODUflex services. Any N of the two ODUflex services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODUflex services can be passed through.
NOTE
Client-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-95, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into a maximum of two ODUflex services. Any N of the two ODUflex services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining ODUflex services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
422
RX1/TX1
FC800
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
b:Client-side services type is FC800 Client side Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM side
RX1/TX1 Client-side
FC800
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-97, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into one ODU2 service, the ODU2 service can be looped back to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
423
RX1/TX1 Client-side
FC800
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
424
Value None, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, SDI, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE (GFP-T), HDSDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI Default: None
Description The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The LOA board's ports may work in any of five working modes and the type of the clientside services received by the ports varies with the working modes. l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2): Supports FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2): Supports HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2): Supports OTU1 service. l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2): Supports 3G-SDI, FC400, FC800 services. l ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2): Supports FC800 service.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
425
Value 0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Description Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
LPT Enabled
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
426
Value -
Description Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Packet Length 1518 - 9600 Default: 9600 The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
427
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. When the ODU timeslot configuration mode is Assign consecutive, the internal ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0 >ODU1>ODU2. When the mode is set to Assign random, the internal ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0>ODU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
428
Value ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2), ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2). Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)
Description This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
429
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km Multirate (SFP+) 1600-M5E-SN-I (SFP+) 1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+) 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN 11L OA
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
430
Table 14-114 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
431
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Table 14-115 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
432
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580
nm
830 to 860
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
433
Table 14-116 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km km Gbit/s NRZ 10 3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm 1290 to 1330 0 -7 5 3.0
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1620 -16 0 -27
Table 14-117 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC400 services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance Service rate km Gbit/s Unit Value Multirate (SFP+) NRZ 0.3 4.25
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
434
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width
Unit
dBm dBm dB nm
0 -7 5 3.0
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1620 -15 0 -12
Table 14-118 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC800 services Item Optical Module Type Optical interface service rate Optical source type Line code format Target distance Gbit/s km Unit Value 1600-M5E-SN-I (SFP+) 8.5 MLM NRZ 0.3 1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+) 8.5 SLM NRZ 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 840 to 860 -1 -7 3 1290 to 1330 -1 -6 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
435
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB PIN -7.5 -1 -12 PIN -14.4 0.5 -27
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-119 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm dB
1471 to 1611 5 0 9
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-120 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
437
Item Optical Module Type Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
438
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
439
Table 14-122 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-123 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
440
Unit
km
10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm dB 1290 to 1330 -1 -6 6 NA 30 G.959.1-compliant 1530 to 1565 2 -1 8.2 NA 30
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1565 -11 -1 -27 PIN 1260 to 1605 -14 -1 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
441
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 32.8 37 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 31.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 36
TN11LOA
14.12 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Function:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442
The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal, while the TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LOG does not. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features. l Specification: For the power consumption and specification of each version, see 14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11LOG Substitute Board TN12LOG Substitution Rules The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the TN11LOG.
NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12LOG
None
14.12.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-98. Figure 14-98 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system
1 GE 8 Client side WDM side LOG G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOG 8 Client side 1 GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
443
OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of eight GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2 signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Supported TN11LOG: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12LOG: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Supported by the TN12LOG Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
445
Description Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. TN12LOG: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
446
Figure 14-99 and Figure 14-100 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board. Figure 14-99 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
GE WDM side
O/E
GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
447
Figure 14-100 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals on the TN12LOG. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448
with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 449
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
450
LOG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN
LOG
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board. Table 14-125 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451
Table 14-125 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board Interface INa Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUTa
LC
TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8
LC LC
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.
Table 14-127 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board. Table 14-127 Valid slots for TN12LOG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
452
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
453
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-102 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 14-129 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-102 Port diagram of the LOG board
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
Cross-connect module
WDM-side opticalmodule
Table 14-129 Meaning of NM port of the LOG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LOG board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port. There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
NOTE
and
in Figure 14-103.
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8
WDM side
Client side
5 3 4 2 1
WDM side
LOG
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
455
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-104, eight GE services are received on the client side. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked to the client side and the other seven GE services are passed through. Figure 14-104 Client-side outloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-105, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked to the WDM side and the other seven GE services are passed through. Figure 14-105 Client-side inloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
456
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-106, eight GE services received on the client side are mapped into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-106 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-107, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked at the ODU2 loopback point, mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side. Figure 14-107 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
457
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
458
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
459
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
460
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L OG
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
TN 12L OG
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
461
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Table 14-132 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
462
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km -3 1000 BASEZX-80 km -3
dBm
Table 14-133 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
463
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -28 -9 -27
dBm dBm dB
-19 -3 -27
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
464
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm dBm dB
-16 0 -27
-16 0 -27
Table 14-135 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD ODB 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN DRZ 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
465
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD 35 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD 35 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN 35 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN 35
dB
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-137 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
467
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-138 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
468
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 1530 to 1565 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 1530 to 1565
nm
1290 to 1330
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Mechanical Specifications
l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 469
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LO G WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 40 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 45
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
43
48
TN1 2LO G
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
14.13 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11LOM Substitute Board TN12LOM Substitution Rules The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the TN11LOM.
NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12LOM
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
471
14.13.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G, or two 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-108 and Figure 14-109. Figure 14-108 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system
ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ 1 GE/ FC100/ FC200/ FC400/ FICON/ 8 FICON Express/ FICON4G Client side MUX LOM G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ GE/ 1 FC100/ FC200/ FC400/ FICON/ 8 FICON Express/ FICON4G Client side
1 LOM 8 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 LO M
DMUX
MUX
GE ISC 1G ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express InfiniBand 2.5G InfiniBand 5G 3G-SDI
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
Table 14-139 Functions and features of the LOM board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G services, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G services, or two 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G services into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G. 694.1. It can also perform the reverse process. l Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively. l The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000 km. Client-side service type GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s InfiniBand 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s InfiniBand 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
NOTE The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. Only the TN12LOM supports InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G and 3G-SDI.
OTN function
l Supports the mapping of up to eight channels of client-side signals into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU2. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
473
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is GE. TN11LOM: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12LOM: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Supported by the TN12LOM Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
474
Description TN11LOM/TN12LOM: Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. TN12LOM: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3z NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol IBM Private Protocol
NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports IBM Private Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
475
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
476
Figure 14-110 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
O/E
E/O
OTN processing module
WDM side
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
IN
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
477
Figure 14-111 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
WDM side
OTN processing module
O/E
FICON encapsulation and mapping module ISC encapsulation and mapping module InfiniBand encapsulation and mapping module
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control Memory
CPU
Communication
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOM board can access the following signals: l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
GE optical signals GE electrical signals ISC 1G optical signals ISC 2G optical signals FC100 optical signals FC200 optical signals FC400 optical signals FICON optical signals FICON Express optical signals FICON4G optical signals
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 478
l l l
InfiniBand 2.5G optical signals InfiniBand 5G optical signals 3G-SDI optical signals
NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G, and InfiniBand 5G service.
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels (GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand 2.5GI service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels (GE/ FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/ InfiniBand 2.5G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 479
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels (GE/FC100/ FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (InfiniBand 2.5G/FC200/FICON Express/ ISC 2G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ ISC 1G optical signals or four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand 2.5G optical signals or two channels of 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. ISC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC performance. FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC performance. FICON encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON performance. OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 480
Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
481
LOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK/ACT1 LINK/ACT2 LINK/ACT3 LINK/ACT4 LINK/ACT5 LINK/ACT6 LINK/ACT7 LINK/ACT8
LOM
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
482
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN
LOM
Indicators
There are twelve indicators on the front panel. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green
NOTE
Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
483
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board. Table 14-140 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-140 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board Interface INa Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. RX1-RX8 LC Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used. a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.
OUTa
LC
TX1-TX8
LC
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, Any(622M-4G) and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/ RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. It is recommended to RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
484
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.
Table 14-142 Valid slots for TN12LOM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express Number of Timeslots 1 1 2 4 1 4 2
486
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Number of Timeslots 1 2 4 2 4
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-114, eight services are received on the client side. Any N of the services can be loopbacked to the client side while the remaining services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
487
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-115, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight services. Any N of the services can be loopbacked to the WDM side while the remaining services can be directly passed through.
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-116, eight services received on the client side are mapped into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
488
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-117, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked at the ODU2 loopback point, mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Table 14-145 LOM Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
l TN11LOM: None, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G l TN12LOM: None, Any, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G, 3G-SDI Default: None
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12LOM.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
490
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. In different internal working mode, the board can work with the FC storage equipment of different vendors. l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can work with the mainstream FC switch storage equipment (such as the Brocade switch). Such equipment inserts the 10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link failure. l Special mode: In this mode, the board can work with the switch storage equipment (such as the McData switch) that uses special processing standard. Such equipment inserts the NOS alarm after detecting a link failure.
LPT Enabled
OFC Enabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G. Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
491
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
492
Description A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. See D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board.
NOTE Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
SD Trigger Condition
See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NULL Mapping Status Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning
NOTE Only TN12LOM supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
493
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km FC400/FICON4G Module (Multimode) FC400/FICON4G Module (Single mode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Multimode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Single mode) 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L OM
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN
TN 12L OM
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
494
Table 14-146 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
495
Table 14-147 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC services Item Optical Module Type Unit Value FC400/ FICON4G Module (Multimode ) FC400/ FICON4G Module (Single mode) FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module (Multimode) NRZ 0.5 FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module (Single mode) NRZ 2
km
NRZ 0.3
NRZ 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360
dBm
-1
-2
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9
-8
-9.5
-10
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1600 PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580
dBm dBm
-14 0
-16 0
-17 0
-18 0
dB
-12
-12
-12
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
496
Table 14-148 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
497
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
498
Table 14-150 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD ODB 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN DRZ 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
499
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD -26 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD -26 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN -16 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN -16
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
500
Unit
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-152 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
501
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
TN11LOM: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
TN12LOM: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.42 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LO M WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 92.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 101.7
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
502
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN1 2LO M 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
NOTE When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W.
14.14 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
503
14.14.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-118. Figure 14-118 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system
1 GE 4 Client side WDMside LQG G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LQG 4 Client side 1 GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
504
Description l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service signals into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU5G. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Supported Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
505
Description Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
506
Figure 14-119 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board
Backplane (service corss-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
GE WDM side
O/E
GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side
IN
optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals. The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 507
After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/ FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 508
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LQG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LQG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
509
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board. Table 14-154 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-154 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
Valid Slots
Table 14-155 shows the valid slots for the LQG board. Table 14-155 Valid slots for the LQG board Product OptiX OSN 6800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-121 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 14-157 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 511
Table 14-157 Meaning of NM port of the LQG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
in Figure 14-122.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
4
in Figure 14-122.
512
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown
5
in Figure 14-122.
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQG
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
513
Table 14-158 LQG Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. Click D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. Click D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
514
Description The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Click D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
515
Description The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. Click D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
516
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km
TN 11L QG
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
517
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km -11.5 1000 BASELX-40 km -4.5 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2
dBm
-9.5
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Table 14-160 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm dBm 1471 to 1611 5 1471 to 1611 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
518
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
dBm dB nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
519
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
0.3 35 3400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
520
Unit
Target distance
km
50
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB ps/nm 1471 to 1611 5 2 5 6.5 1.0 30 1000 1471 to 1611 5 2 5 6.5 1.0 30 1400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1450 to 1620 -18 0 -27 APD 1450 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
521
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 28.4 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 32
TN11LQG
31.0
34.4
23.18
26
14.15 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board
Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 14-163 lists the types of the LQM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 522
Table 14-163 LQM type description Board LQM Type Single transmitting and single receiving board Dual-fed selective receiving board Description The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1. The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
14.15.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 14-123 and Figure 14-124. Figure 14-123 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LQM G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX 4 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LQM G.694.2
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
4 Client side
Figure 14-124 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LQM DMUX MUX 4 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 4 LQM DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
523
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
524
Description OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
525
Function and Feature Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
526
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
527
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
528
Figure 14-125 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
E/O
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
529
Figure 14-126 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
Backplane(service cross-connection)
O/E
Service encapsulation and mapping module CrossOTN processing connect module module
E/O
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.15.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 530
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 531
also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
532
LQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LQM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board. Table 14-165 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
533
Table 14-165 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-128 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 14-168 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-128 Port diagram of the LQM
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
535
Table 14-168 Meaning of NM port of the LQM Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l l l l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12
536
Number of Timeslots 11 2 3 2 1
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
l l
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 14.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
537
Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQM
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 14-129.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
538
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to set the service mode of the board.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
539
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
540
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
541
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 13L QM
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-170 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
542
Unit
km
15
40
80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
543
Unit
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 14-171 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
544
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 9 1000 BASELX-40 km 9 1000 BASEZX-80 km 9
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-172 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
545
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
546
Table 14-173 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
547
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Table 14-175 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
548
Unit
km
120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz nm nm dB ps/nm 3 0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
549
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 32.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 35.9
TN13LQM
14.16 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
Specification:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 550
For the specification of each version, see 14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11LQM D Substitute Board TN12LQM D Substitution Rules The TN12LQMD can be created as TN11LQMD on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMD functions as the TN11LQMD.
NOTE A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12LQM D
None
14.16.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-130. Figure 14-130 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system
MUX DMUX
1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s 4
DMUX MUX DMUX MUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Table 14-176 Functions and features of the LQMD board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1, HD-SDI, SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
552
Description OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service signals into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
TN11LQMD: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. TN12LQMD: Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
553
Description The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. TN11LQMD: not supported TN12LQMD: supported
Test frame
Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
554
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
555
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
556
Figure 14-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
E/O
Splitter
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
557
Figure 14-132 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/ OptiX OSN 3800)
Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
O/E
Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN Crossprocessing connect module module
E/O
Splitter
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.16.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 558
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 559
Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
560
LQMD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LQMD
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board. Table 14-177 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 561
Table 14-177 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Table 14-179 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board. Table 14-179 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210. "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.
563
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-134 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 14-182 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-134 Port diagram of the LQMD board
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1
NOTE
TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.
Table 14-182 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
564
Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l l l l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-135. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-135. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMD board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-135. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown by
5
in Figure 14-135.
l l
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 14.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
566
Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQMD
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
and
in Figure 14-135.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
567
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
568
Description The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Working State Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
569
Description The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
570
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L QM D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN 12L QM D
N/A
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
N/A
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
571
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-184 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
572
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 14-185 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ
NRZ
573
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 10 1000 BASELX-40 km 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km 80
km
0.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
574
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-186 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
575
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -27
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-187 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
576
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
577
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable) 0.5 35
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
nm dB
0.2 35
0.2 35
0.5 30
0.5 30
0.2 35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27
Table 14-189 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
578
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
579
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 57.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 65.7
TN11 LQM D
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
61.1
67.2
TN12 LQM D
31.1
34.3
14.17 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
580
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11LQM S Substitute Board TN12LQM S Substitution Rules The TN12LQMS can be created as TN11LQMS on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMS functions as the TN11LQMS.
NOTE A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12LQM S
None
14.17.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
581
Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T RecommendationCompliant WDM Signals
Figure 14-136 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode)
1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s 4 Client side WDM side LQMS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LQMS G.694.2 4 WDM side Client side 1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals
Figure 14-137 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode)
MUX TOM LQMS G.694.1 DMUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 LQMS TOM
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
582
Table 14-190 Functions and features of the LQMS board Function and Feature Basic function Description
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
583
Description
OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11LQMS: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN12LQMS: Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l TN11LQMS: Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12LQMS: Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
TN11LQMS: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. TN12LQMS: Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
584
Description
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. TN11LQMS: not supported TN12LQMS: supported
Test frame
Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode). l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode).
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
585
Description
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
586
Description
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
587
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
588
Figure 14-138 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
589
Figure 14-139 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board (LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
O/E
Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.17.3 Functions and Features. TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 590
and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. Figure 14-140 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
ODU1 Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side E/O Crossconnect module OTN processing module OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
591
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 592
OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
593
LQMS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LQMS
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board. Table 14-191 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 594
Table 14-191 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Table 14-193 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board. Table 14-193 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-142 and Figure 14-143 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table 14-195 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 596
NOTE
TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
Cross-connect module
Table 14-195 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP ODU1LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical port. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 597
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l l
For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1
The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
598
LQM Mode: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-144. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMS board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
l l
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 14.17.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
599
Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQMS
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
and
in Figure 14-144.
NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800): l l Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 14-145. The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
600
Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
WDM side
WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
LQMS
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
Description The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
602
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
603
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE This parameter is only available for TN12LQMS.
Board Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
604
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L QM S
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN 12L QM S
N/A
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
N/A
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
605
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-197 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
606
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 14-198 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ
NRZ
607
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 10 1000 BASELX-40 km 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km 80
km
0.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
608
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-199 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
609
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -27
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-200 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
610
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
611
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) 0.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -18 0 -28 -9 -28 -9 -28 -9
dBm dBm
-18 0
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Table 14-202 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
612
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
613
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LQ MS WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 56.3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 64.5
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
60.4
66.4
TN1 2LQ MS
29
33.3
14.18 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
614
14.18.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-146. Figure 14-146 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system
MUX STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 LSQ G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LSQ STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3
Client side
WDM side
Client side
615
Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Loopback
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
616
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
617
Figure 14-147 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board
Client side
RX SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
TX
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSQ board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals OTU3 optical signals
In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
618
The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TX RX OUT IN
LSQ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
620
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board. Table 14-204 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-204 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is IU2.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
622
Table 14-207 Loopbacks supported by LSQ boards Board Type of Received Service STM-256 or OC-768 Loopback Type Description
TN11LS Q
OTU3
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown inFigure 14-150, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
623
Figure 14-150 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop As shown inFigure 14-151, one STM-256/OC-768 service received on the client side is converted into one ODU3 service, and then is looped back to the client side.
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
When the TN11LSQ board receives OTU3 services, the client-side outloop are similar to the WDM-side inloop and the client-side inloop are similar to the WDM-side outloop. l Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-152, one OTU3 service received on the client side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the client side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
624
Figure 14-152 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-153, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point. Figure 14-153 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
625
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Type
Laser Status
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
626
Description Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
627
Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
628
Bo ard
TN 11L SQ
40G Transponder
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
629
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 -800 to 800 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 -800 to 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27 PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
630
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 5.5 lb. (2.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 75.0 82.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 82.0 89.0
TN11LS Q
14.19 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
Function:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 631
The TN11LSX/TN12LSX supports AFEC, and the TN13LSX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support access FC1200 service, whereas the TN11LSX board does not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. The TN13LSX board supports the OTU2e service, whereas the TN11LSX and TN12LSX board does not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side, whereas the TN11LSX board does not. The TN13LSX board supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LSX board and the TN12LSX board do not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. When client-side services are 10GE LAN services: TN11LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G). TN12LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G). TN13LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G). For more information, see 14.19.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS. l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11LSX Substitute Board TN12LSX Substitution Rules The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the TN11LSX.
NOTE A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN13LSX
The TN13LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN11LSX.
NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
632
Substitution Rules The TN13LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN12LSX.
NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN13LSX
None
14.19.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-154. Figure 14-154 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN / MUX 10GE WAN / STM-64/ LSX G.694.1 OC-192/ OTU2/ DMUX OTU2e/ FC1200 Client side WDM side DMUX 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / STM-64/ G.694.1 LSX OC-192/ OTU2/ MUX OTU2e/ FC1200 WDM side Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
633
Table 14-211 Functions and features of the LSX board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Description
Maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s
NOTE The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64/OC-192 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64/OC-192 service on the U2000. The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX. When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does not support FC1200. The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e into OTU2/OTU2e signals, and the transparence mapping of 10GE LAN into OTU2e signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
634
Description
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. TN11LSX/TN12LSX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN13LSX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
XFP
TN12LSX/TN13LSX: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side. TN13LSX: Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
635
Description
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Figure 14-155 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX. Figure 14-156 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX. Figure 14-155 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board
Client side
RX O/E SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module TX E/O Client-side optical module
WDM side
E/O
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
637
Figure 14-156 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX board
Client side
RX SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
Client-side OTN processing module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
TX
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSX board can access the following optical signals: TN11LSX: l l l l l l l l l l l OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
TN12LSX:
TN13LSX:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 638
l l l l l l l
OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals FC1200 optical signals
In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/ OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/ OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 639
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LSX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX OUT IN
LSX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 14-212 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 641
Table 14-212 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Valid Slots
Table 14-213 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board. Table 14-213 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 14-214 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSX board. Table 14-214 Valid slots for the TN12LSX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
642
Table 14-215 shows the valid slots for the TN13LSX board. Table 14-215 Valid slots for the TN13LSX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Table 14-217 Loopbacks supported by LSX boards Board TN11LSX/ TN12LSX Loopback Type Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Client-side inloop TN13LSX Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop When non-OTN services are received, see Figure 14-161. When OTN services are received, see Figure 14-162. See Figure 14-160. See Figure 14-159. Description See Figure 14-158.
RX/TX
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
NOTE
WDM-side outloop and client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-159, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
644
Figure 14-159 WDM-side outloop and client-side inloop on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX board
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/OTU2/FC1200
RX/TX Client-side
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
NOTE
RX/TX Client-side
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when non-OTN services are received on the client side As shown in Figure 14-161, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC1200 service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the client-side port. Figure 14-161 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN13LSX board (1)
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC1200
RX/TX Client-side
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when OTN services are received on the client side As shown in Figure 14-162, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the client side is demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. The OTU2/OTU2e service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2/ ODU2e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 645
Figure 14-162 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN13LSX board (2)
OTU2/ OTU2e ODU2/ ODU2e OTU2/ OTU2e
RX/TX Client-side
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2v, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
646
Value l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN13LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Description The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
647
Field Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
648
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only TN13LSX supports this parameter.
TN 11L SX
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
649
Bo ard
TN 12L SX
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
N/A
TN 13L SX
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
650
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2 signals. The specifications following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, FC1200, 10GE LAN, or 10GE WAN signals. The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals. The specifications below apply to 10GE LAN signal. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed FC1200 signal.
Table 14-219 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10 Gbit/s rate services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km NRZ MLM 0.3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
651
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 30 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 30 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 30
dB
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
652
Table 14-220 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
653
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
654
Table 14-222 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD ODB 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN DRZ 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
655
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD -26 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD -26 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN -16 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN -16
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
656
Unit
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-224 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
657
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11LSX: 2.9 lb (1.3 kg) TN12LSX: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) TN13LSX: 2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LS X WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 47.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 50.1
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
47.9
50.9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
658
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN1 2LS X 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN1 3LS X 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
30.7
36.8
28
31.4
14.20 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
Substitution Relationship
The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.20.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-163. Figure 14-163 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system
MUX STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 LSXL G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LSXL STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3
Client side
NOTE
WDM side
Client side
l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768. l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
660
OTN function
l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into OTU3 signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3.
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. TN11LSXL: not supported TN12LSXL: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
LPT function
Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
661
Description TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported by the TN12LSXL. Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
NOTE Only the TN12LSXL supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
TN11LSXL: Loopback
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Not supported
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
TN12LSXL: Loopback
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
662
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
663
Figure 14-164 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board
Client side
RX
E/O
OUT
TX
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
664
Figure 14-165 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL board
Client side
RX SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
TX
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSXL board can access the following optical signals: TN11LSXL: l l l l l STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals OTU3 optical signals
TN12LSXL:
In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 665
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 666
Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
667
LSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX
OUT IN
LSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
668
LSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT
TX RX
IN
LSXL
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board. Table 14-226 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 669
Table 14-226 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 14-228 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXL board. Table 14-228 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU3-IU8, IU13-IU18, IU21-IU26, IU29IU34, IU37-IU42, IU47-IU52, IU55-IU60, IU63-IU68
670
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU3. The rear connector of the TN15LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN15LSXL board, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
671
TN11LS XL TN12LS XL
WDM-side inloopterminal loopback WDM-side outloopfacility loopback Client-side inloop Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-168. See Figure 14-169. See Figure 14-170. See Figure 14-171.
OTU3
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
672
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-169, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back to the WDM side directly.
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-171, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client side is looped back to the client side directly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 673
Figure 14-171 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-172, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back to the WDM side directly. Figure 14-172 WDM-side outloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
OTU3 Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-173, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is mapped into one OTU3 service, which is then looped back to the WDM side. Figure 14-173 Client-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
674
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-174, one OTU3 service received on the client side is looped back to the client side directly. Figure 14-174 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-175, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back to the WDM side directly. Figure 14-175 WDM-side outloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Value -
Description Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only the TN12LSXL supports the OTU-3 services.
Service Type
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
676
Description Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
677
Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.
See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NULL Mapping Status Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Queries the PMD threshold of the board.
PMD Threshold(ps)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
678
Bo ard
TN 11L SX L
TN 12L SX L
40G Transponder
N/A
N/A
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
679
Item Optical Module Type Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm dBm dBm dB
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 500 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 500 192.10 to 196.00 0 -5 8.2 5 1 NA 35 400
Unit
Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
Mechanical Specifications
TN11LSXL l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 11.0 lb. (5.0 kg) Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 9.1 lb. (4.1 kg)
TN12LSXL
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 103.0 98.0 74 84 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 110.0 101.0 81 94
TN11LS XL
TN12LS XL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
681
14.21 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
Substitution Relationship
The LSXLR boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.21.2 Application
The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-176.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
682
Implements the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals and compensates for the dispersion in the service signals. This board is used at an electrical REG station in a system. OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s OTU3e: OTN service at a rate of 44.57 Gbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3.
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
683
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function LPT function Test frame FEC encoding
Description
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performan ce events monitorin g ALS function Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard complianc e
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
Not supported
Not supported Not supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
684
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
685
Figure 14-177 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board
Decoding module
Overhead module
Encoding module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 686
Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals. Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
687
LSXLR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
LSXLR
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
688
LSXLR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
LSXLR
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board. Table 14-235 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 689
Table 14-235 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1. The TN11LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU5, IU9 and IU13. Table 14-237 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board. Table 14-237 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU13-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36
690
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2. l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68. OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36. OptiX OSN 6800: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
691
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Laser Status
Enable AutoSensing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
692
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.
FEC Mode
Receive Wavelength
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
693
Description The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. PMD Threshold (ps) Board Mode Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode Queries the PMD threshold of the board. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
694
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 500 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 500 192.10 to 196.00 0 -5 8.2 5 1 NA 35 400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1529 to 1561 PIN 1529 to 1561 PIN 1529 to 1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
695
Unit
Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN -16 0 -27 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN -16 0 -27
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
dBm dBm dB
-16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
TN11LSXLR l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 6.7 lb. (3.1 kg) Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 5.5 lb.(2.5 kg)
TN12LSXLR
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 87.0 82.0 62 67.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 90.0 85.0 68.2 70.0
TN11 LSXL R
400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN12 LSXL R
14.22 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
696
14.22.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-180. Figure 14-180 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system
WDM side DMUX G.694.1 MUX LSXR WDM side MUX G.694.1 DMUX
LSXR
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
697
Table 14-241 Functions and features of the LSXR board Function and Feature Basic function Regenerati ng rate OTN function Description
The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function PRBS function LPT function Test frame FEC encoding
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
698
Function and Feature ALS function Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard complianc e
Description
Not supported
Not supported Not supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
699
Figure 14-181 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board
WDM side
IN
Decoding module
Overhead module
Encoding module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 700
Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
701
LSXR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
LSXR
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR board. Table 14-242 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 702
Table 14-242 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68. OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
703
OptiX OSN 6800: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
704
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Enable AutoSensing
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
FEC Mode
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
705
Field Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
Line Rate
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
See D.24 Line Rate for more information. Board Mode Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
707
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Table 14-247 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD ODB 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
DRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency dBm dBm dB THz 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10
192.10 to 196.05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
708
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD 5 0.3 35 4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD 5 0.3 35 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
GHz nm dB
5 0.3 35
5 0.3 35
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
709
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LS XR WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 34.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 37.8
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
35.0
38.0
36.8 39.8
39.8 42.8
14.23 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
14.23.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 710
For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-183. Figure 14-183 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system
G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s LWX2 D M U X WDM side M U X D M U X M U X WDM side G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 LWX2 16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s
2 Client side
2 Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
711
Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the client side.
ESC function PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme eSFP Loopback
Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
712
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM) Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
713
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN1 IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.23.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 714
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Service processing module Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
LWX2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LWX2
NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
716
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board. Table 14-249 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-249 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
717
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220. l l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz. "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
718
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: Any
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
719
Value Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled l Client side: Enabled
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
720
TN 11L WX 2
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
721
Table 14-254 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ MLM 0.5 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
NA
dB
NA
NA
30
30
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN PIN APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
722
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-18 -3
-18 0
-28 -9
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-255 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm dBm 1471 to 1611 5 1471 to 1611 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
723
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
dBm dB nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Table 14-256 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation THz GHz 192.10 to 196.00 12.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
724
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
725
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
nm dB
0.2 35
0.2 35
0.5 30
0.5 30
0.5 35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 -28 -18 -26 APD PIN APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
726
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) -9 -27
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
-10 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Table 14-258 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
APD
727
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm dBm dBm dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 38.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131 F) (W) 42.4
LWX2
14.24 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
728
14.24.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-186. Figure 14-186 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system
MUX DMUX MUX DMUX Client side WDM side DMUX MUX DMUX MUX WDM side Client side G.694.1/ LWXD G.694.2 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s
16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
729
Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the client side.
730
Description l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
731
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM) Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
732
TX
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.24.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 733
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Service processing module Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 734
LWXD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LWXD
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 735
l l
Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board. Table 14-260 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-260 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Table 14-262 Characteristic code for the LWXD board Code First four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210. l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
737
Table 14-264 LWXD parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: Any
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
738
Value -
Description parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
739
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 11L WX D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
740
Table 14-265 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ MLM 0.5 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
NA
dB
NA
NA
30
30
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN PIN APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
741
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-18 -3
-18 0
-28 -9
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-266 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm dBm 1471 to 1611 5 1471 to 1611 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
742
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
dBm dB nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Table 14-267 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation THz GHz 192.10 to 196.00 12.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
743
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
744
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
745
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) -9 -27
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
-10 -27
-9 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Table 14-269 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 2 0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
746
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 35.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131 F) (W) 39.4
LWXD
14.25 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
747
Substitution Relationship
The LWXS boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.25.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-189. Figure 14-189 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system
MUX 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s LWXS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1/ LWXS G.694.2 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
748
Table 14-270 Functions and features of the LWXS board Function and Feature Basic function Description Receives a channel of signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
749
Description The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the client side.
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme eSFP Loopback
Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
750
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM) IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol
NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
751
TX
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 752
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.25.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Service processing module Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 753
Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
754
LWXS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LWXS
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board. Table 14-271 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 755
Table 14-271 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Table 14-273 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board. Table 14-273 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
756
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
757
The implementation of client-side outloop supported by LWXS boards is similar to the implementation of WDM-side inloop. The implementation of WDM-side outloop supported by LWXS boards is similar to the implementation of client-side inloop. l Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-192, one service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side through the Any service processing module. Figure 14-192 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS board
RX/TX
ANY
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Client-side
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-193, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is regenerated by the Any service processing module and then loopbacked to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
758
Figure 14-193 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS board
RX/TX
ANY
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Client-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
759
Value None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, ETR, CLO Default: Any
Description The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO services.
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
760
Description The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l Only the TN12LWXS supports this parameter. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
761
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
TN 11L WX S TN 12L WX S
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
762
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Table 14-277 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ MLM 0.5 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
763
Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
nm
NA
NA
dB
NA
NA
30
30
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-18 -3
-18 0
-28 -9
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
764
Table 14-278 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
765
Table 14-279 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
766
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
-5 10
-5 10
-2 8.2
-2 8.2
-2 10
-2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
767
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable) 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -18 0 -26 -10 -28 -9 -28 -9
Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm dBm
-18 0
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Table 14-281 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dBm dBm dB nm nm nm
768
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dB ps/nm -
30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 33.9 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131 F) (W) 37.3
LWXS
14.26 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
769
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11TMX Substitute Board TN12TMX Substitution Rules The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the TN11TMX.
NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12TMX
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
770
14.26.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-194. Figure 14-194 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system
1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 4 Client side TMX G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 TMX 4 WDM side 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1
WDM side
Client side
Description Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. Not supported TN11TMX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12TMX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
772
Description TN11TMX/TN12TMX: Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. TN12TMX: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1
Figure 14-195 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board. Figure 14-195 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
OUT
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-16 optical signals OC-48 optical signals OTU1 (without FEC) optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 774
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TMX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TMX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
776
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board. Table 14-283 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-283 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
Table 14-285 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board. Table 14-285 Valid slots for TN12TMX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
778
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-197, four STM-16/OC-48 services are received on the client side. One STM-16/OC-48 service is loopbacked to the client side and the other three services are passed through. Figure 14-197 Client-side outloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN1/OUT1
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-198, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
779
deconverged into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are converted into four STM-16/OC-48 services. One of the four STM-16/OC-48 services is loopbacked to the WDM side and the other three STM-16/OC-48 services are passed through. Figure 14-198 Client-side inloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN1/OUT1
NOTE
When OTU1 services are received on the client side of the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board, OTU1 services must be converted into ODU1 services before being loopbacked.
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-199, four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services received on the client side are mapped into four ODU1 services and then converged into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-199 WDM-side inloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN/OUT
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-200, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
780
Service Type
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
781
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only support C band.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
782
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides.
NOTE Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
783
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 11T MX
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
TN 12T MX
N/A
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
784
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-289 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
785
Unit
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-290 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm dB
Item Optical Module Type Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 14-291 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power THz GHz dBm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
787
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -
0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
788
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
789
Table 14-293 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD ODB 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN DRZ 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
790
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD -26 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD -26 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN -16 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN -16
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
791
Unit
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-295 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
792
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-296 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB
8.2
793
Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
nm
NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11TMX: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg) TN12TMX: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
794
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1TM X WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 40.3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 44.3
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
42.1
46.4
TN1 2TM X
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
32.4 41 39
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
795
15
About This Chapter
15.1 ND2 ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board 15.2 NQ2 NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.3 NS2 NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.4 NS3 NS3: 40G line service processing board 15.5 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board 15.6 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board 15.7 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 15.8 THA THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 15.9 TOA TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 15.10 TOG TOG: 8 x GE service processing board 15.11 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 15.12 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board 15.13 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 796
15.14 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 15.15 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
797
15.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
l l l
The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11ND2 Substitute Board TN12ND2 Substitution Rules The TN12ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2 functions as the TN11ND2.
NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.
TN12ND2
TN53ND2
The TN53ND2 can be created as TN12ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN12ND2.
NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode.
TN52ND2
TN53ND2
The TN53ND2 can be created as TN52ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN52ND2. -
TN53ND2
None
15.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the ND2 board implements conversion between 16 crossconnect ODU0 signals or eight cross-connect ODU1 signals or four cross-connect ODUflex signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and two ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. The ND2 board also converts between two cross-connect ODU2e signals and two ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
799
Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 15-1 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 TOM 8 4 1 G.694.1 MUX ND2 DMUX 1 TOM 8 4 1 WDM side WDM side 4 MUX 1 TOM 8 1 DMUX ND2 G.694.1 4 1 TOM 8 1
Client
side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
Figure 15-2 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2)
G.694.1 MUX TDX ND2 DMUX MUX DMUX ND2 TDX G.694.1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
800
In the application scenario with the TN11TDX board, the ND2 board receives eight channels of ODU1 signals. In the application scenario with the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53ND2 board, the ND2 board receives two channels of ODU2 signals. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: Implements the regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
Figure 15-3 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3)
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. The input and output wavelengths can be different. Only the TN12ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm DRZ tunable optical module supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
801
Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU0 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
Figure 15-4 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)
1 TOM 8 8 1 G.694.1 MUX ND2 DMUX 1 TOM 8 8 1 WDM side WDM side 8 MUX 1 TOM 8 1 DMUX ND2 G.694.1 8 1 TOM 8 1
Client side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Application scenario 5 of the TN53ND2: conversion between four channels of ODUflex signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
Figure 15-5 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5)
G.694.1 1 TQX 4 4 1 ND2
DMUX MUX MUX DMUX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. In this application scenario, only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 802
ODU1 and ODU2 is only supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in OptiX OSN 6800. The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Line Mode) Function and feature Basic function Description Maps 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODUflex signals or double channels of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into two channels of OTU2 signals, or maps double channels of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into two channels of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signal, ODU1 signal , ODUflex signals and the ODU2/ODU2e signal. l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board. l TN52ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board. l TN53ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODUflex signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board.
Crossconnect capabilities
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
803
Description l Supports 16 x ODU0 multiplexing into two OTU2. l Supports 4 x ODUflex multiplexing into two OTU2. l Supports 4 x ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l TN52ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l TN53ND2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l TN53ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
NOTE If the TN53ND2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53ND2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is met: ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53ND2 board, or the TN53ND2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
Not supported TN11ND2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
804
Function and feature Alarm and performance event monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock
Description l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. The TN12ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU1 signals are crossconnected from the backplane. The TN52ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN53ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex signals are cross-connected from the backplane.
Supported Supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 TN12ND2/TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Protection scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
805
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
806
Description Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-2 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature Basic function Regeneratin g rate Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s
NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
807
Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarm and performance event monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme XFP
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported TN12ND2/TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
808
Description Not supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
809
Figure 15-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
810
Figure 15-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
811
Figure 15-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)
WDM side
IN1
OUT2
E/O
WDM-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
812
Figure 15-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/ 8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e Backplane ( service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
1588
IN1 IN2
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
813
Figure 15-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Relay Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800/6800)
WDM side
IN1
OUT2
E/O
WDM-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
814
Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/ 8 X ODU1/4XODUFlex/ 2 X ODU2(e) Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side of the ND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals or four ODUflex electrical signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. After processing, the module outputs two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 815
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC. In the final step, the module sends out 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals or four ODUflex electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection. The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l OTN processing module The OTN processing module frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/ OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1588 module
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 816
The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
NOTE
The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/ TN53ND2 board is Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
817
ND2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ND2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
818
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board. Table 15-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
Table 15-5 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board. Table 15-5 Valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
819
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The ND2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. l l Figure 15-13 and Figure 15-14 show the port diagrams for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/ TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board in compatible mode. Table 15-7 lists the port descriptions. Figure 15-15 shows the port diagram for the TN53ND2 board in standard mode. Table 15-8 lists the port descriptions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
820
For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode. For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800 only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the ND2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Figure 15-13 Port diagram for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (compatible mode)
Other tributary/ line/PID board Other tributary/ line/PID board Other tributary/ line/PID board
Backplane
16 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 8 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
52 ODU1 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
821
Figure 15-14 Port diagram for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board (compatible mode)
Other tributary/line/PID board Other tributary/line/PID board
Backplane
8 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2 52 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
Cross-connect module
Multiplexing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
822
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-7 Descriptions of the ports on the ND2 board (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1-ODU0LP8 Description Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channels 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channel 1. WDM-side optical ports. Automatic CrossConnection Automatic crossconnections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP ports. Automatic crossconnections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP ports. Automatic crossconnections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT ports. -
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP2
1(IN1/OUT1) 2(IN2/OUT2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
823
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1 ODU2:1 ODUflex:2 4XODUflex ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2 ODU2:1 OCH:1
OCH:1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1
ODU2:1 2 xODU2/ 2xODU 2e ODU2:1 OCH :1 OCH :1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
OCH :1
8xODU1
OCH :1 1(N1/OUT1)
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 16 xODU0 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1 ODU 1:4 OCH :1
2(N2/OUT2)
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0:1 ODU2:1 16 xODU0 ODU0: 8 ODU0:1 ODU0: 8 OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU1 >ODU2) ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU2)
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
824
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.
Table 15-8 Descriptions of the ports on the TN53ND2 board (standard Mode) Port Name 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0: (1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0: (1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1) 2(IN2/OUT2) WDM-side optical ports Mapping path for ODU2 signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2) Description Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
825
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The ND2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-16, Figure 15-17, and Figure 15-18 show the created ODU0 cross-connections. Figure 15-16 TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Other board a
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
826
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
827
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2
compatible mode
ND2
standard mode
Cross-connect module
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
828
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
829
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
830
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-19 and Figure 15-20 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
831
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS TN52ND2:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
832
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/ TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN52ND2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN11ND2/TN12ND2: TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN52ND2: TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
833
Other board a
ND2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
compatible mode
standard mode
Cross-connect module WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Other board a
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/TN54THA/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
834
Other board c
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-21 and Figure 15-22 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 15-21 TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
WDM side
2
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Other board b
(compatible mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
835
1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
ND2
72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
2 Cross-connect module
compatible mode
standard mode
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Other board c
ODUflex Cross-Connections
Figure 15-23 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
836
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
ND2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 board The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Cross-Connection Example
Figure 15-24 shows an example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board. l l l The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals. The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODUflex signals. Different IN/OUT ports can work in different service modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
837
IN2/OUT2
TN52ND2
Channel inloop
For channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-25. For channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-29.
Channel outloop
For channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-27. For channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-30.
See Figure 15-31. See Figure 15-32. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 >OTU2, See Figure 15-25. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2>OTU2, See Figure 15-26.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 >OTU2, See Figure 15-29. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2>OTU2, See Figure 15-28.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
838
Board
Loopback Type
Description
See Figure 15-33. See Figure 15-34. See Figure 15-35. See Figure 15-36. See Figure 15-33. See Figure 15-34. See Figure 15-37. See Figure 15-38. See Figure 15-39. See Figure 15-40.
TN53ND2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
839
Figure 15-25 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN2/OUT2
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Figure 15-26 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53ND2 board (ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 OTU2 IN2/OUT2
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-27, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
840
are deconverged into four ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services are looped back to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Figure 15-27 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
As shown in Figure 15-28, two OTU2 service received from the WDM side is demapped into two ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
841
Figure 15-28 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53ND2 board (ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 OTU2 IN2/OUT2
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-29, 16 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Figure 15-29 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52ND2board
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
842
Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-30, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services are deconverged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Figure 15-30 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52ND2 board
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-31, 16 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into eight ODU1 services. Then, the eight ODU1 services are converged into two ODU2 services. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
843
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-32, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through. Figure 15-32 WDM-side outloops on the TN52ND2 board
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN2/OUT2
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
844
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-34, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services are deconverged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
845
OTU2
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-35, eight ODU1 services from the backplane are converged into two ODU2 services. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through. Figure 15-35 WDM-side inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services WDM-side Pass-through services ODU2 OTU2 IN2/OUT2 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-36, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
846
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
847
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-38, two OTU2/OTU2e services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2/ ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e service is passed through. Figure 15-38 WDM-side outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
Backplane
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked-services WDM-side OTU2 IN2/OUT2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
848
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-40, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services are deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODUflex services can be looped back to the WDM side at ODUflex loopback points and the remaining ODUflex services can be passed through. Figure 15-40 Channel outloops at ODUflex loopback points on the TN53ND2 board
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked-services WDM-side OTU2 IN2/OUT2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service Mode
l TN11ND2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN12ND2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN52ND2/ TN53ND2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2 /TN52ND2/TN53ND2. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
Enable Auto-Sensing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
850
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
851
Description The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1 >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53ND2 in the standard mode.
Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
852
Value Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Line Mode
Description The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
853
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
854
Table 15-12 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN NRZ 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN DRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800 5 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
855
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
856
Table 15-14 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 15-15 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
857
Unit
km
SLM 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
858
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. ) TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 61.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 68.4
TN1 1ND 2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
70.2 76.6 64 69 52
TN1 2ND 2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
48 70.5 67.8 25
54 77.5 74.6 28
TN5 2ND 2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN5 3ND 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
859
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
15.2 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
For details, see 15.2.3 Functions and Features. Only the TN54NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function. For details, see 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. Only the TN54NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can realize the regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e signals. For details, see 15.2.2 Application. l Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN51NQ2 Substitute Board TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2 Substitution Rules The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.
NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.
TN52NQ2
TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 functions as the TN52NQ2.
NOTE Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.
TN54NQ2
TN53NQ2
The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded. -
TN53NQ2
None
15.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NQ2 board implements conversion between 32 crossconnect ODU0 signals or 16 cross-connect ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or four cross-connect ODU2 signals and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. The NQ2 board also converts between four cross-connect ODU2e signals and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODUflex, ODU1 service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
861
Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 15-41 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 4 4 4 NQ2 DMUX MUX
4
1 G.694.1
4
1 TOM
4 NQ2 4
WDM side
WDM side 4
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/ OTU2e signals
Figure 15-42 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2)
G.694.1 1 TQX 4 4 NQ2
4 4
1 NQ2 TQX 4
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
862
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
Figure 15-43 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3)
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 8 4 8 NQ2 DMUX MUX 1 G.694.1
4
1 TOM
8 NQ2 4
WDM side
WDM side 8
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN53NQ2 board: conversion between eight channels of ODUflex signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
Figure 15-44 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)
1 TQX 4 Client side 1 TQX 4 4 1 4 NQ2 DMUX MUX
4
1 G.694.1
4
1 TQX
4 NQ2
4 Client side
1 TQX 4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
863
In this application scenario, Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
Figure 15-45 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)
WDM side
IN1 DMUX
WDM side
OUT1 MUX
G.694.1
MUX OUT2
G.694.1
IN2 DMUX
NQ2
IN3 DMUX OUT3 MUX
G.694.1
MUX OUT4
G.694.1
IN4 DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
ODU0 is supported only by the TN52NQ2 , TN53NQ2 and TN54NQ2 in the OptiX OSN 8800. Only the TN53NQ2 board used in the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex. The relay mode is supported only by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. For an optical-layer ASON system, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
864
Table 15-16 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode) Function and feature Basic function Description Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals 8 channels of ODUflex signals or four channels of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into four channels of OTU2 signals, or maps four channels of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into four channels of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth must be equal to or less than 40 Gbit/s. Crossconnect capabilities OTN function Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NQ2 board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l The TN53NQ2 board supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex. l The TN53NQ2 board supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. WDM specification ESC function PRBS function Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
NOTE If the TN53NQ2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53NQ2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is met: ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53NQ2 board, or the TN53NQ2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
LPT function
Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
865
Description TN51NQ2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
NOTE The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Supported only when the TN53NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane Supported only when the TN54NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1 signals cross-connected from the backplane
Supported Supported by the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Protection scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
NOTE The ODUk SPRing protection is supported by the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
866
Description WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Channel Loopback Supported Supported Not supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
867
Description Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-17 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature Basic function Regeneratin g rate WDM specification OTN function Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s Supports DWDM specifications. l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. Tunable wavelength function Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
868
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame PTP clock (1588 V2) Physical clock XFP
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard compliance
Supported Not supported Not supported Not Supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
869
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
870
Figure 15-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
871
Figure 15-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
872
Figure 15-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
16XODU1//4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 Crossconnect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
873
Figure 15-49 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NQ2 (OptiX OSN 8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/ 4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
874
Figure 15-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 8XODUflex/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 Crossconnect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
875
Figure 15-51 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/ 4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 Crossconnect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
876
Figure 15-52 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 (Relay Mode)
WDM side
IN1 IN3 OUT2 OUT4
E/O
WDM-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module can receive 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, 8 channels of ODUflex electrical signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 877
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, 8 channels of ODUflex electrical signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection. The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module. Cross-connect module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 878
Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1//ODUflexODU2/ODU2e signals. OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
879
NQ2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
NQ2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
880
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board. Table 15-18 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board Interface IN1-IN4 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT4
LC
Table 15-20 shows the valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board. Table 15-20 Valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 15-21 shows the valid slots for the TN53NQ2 board. Table 15-21 Valid slots for the TN53NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, U11-IU16
Table 15-22 shows the valid slots for the TN54NQ2 board. Table 15-22 Valid slots for the TN54NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
Table 15-23 Mapping between the physical ports on the NQ2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board can work in compatible mode. The TN53NQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. l l l l Figure 15-55 shows the port diagrams of the TN51NQ2 board in compatible mode. Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN52NQ2 board in compatible mode. Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN53NQ2 board in compatible mode and Figure 15-56 shows the port diagrams of the board in standard mode. Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN54NQ2 board in compatible mode.
NOTE
For the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode. For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the NQ2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
883
Backplane
32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 16x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
884
Backplane
16 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
54 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
ODU2 54 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
4 (IN4/OUT4)-1
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
885
Table 15-24 Meaning of NM port of the TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN51NQ2 (compatible mode)board Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP16 ODU1LP1ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1ODU2LP4 IN1/OUT1-IN4/ OUT4 Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces. Automatic CrossConnection Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU1LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU2LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/ OUT port -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
886
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
ODUflex:1 ODU2:1 ODUflex:2 8xODUflex ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2 OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1
ODU2:1 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e OCH :1 OCH :1
ODU2:1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1 ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1 ODU1:4 OCH :1 1(N1/OUT1) 4(IN4/OUT4) OCH :1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU1:1 ODU 2:1 ODU 1:4 OCH :1
32xODU0
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0:1 ODU2:1 ODU0: 8 32xODU0 ODU0:1 ODU0: 8 OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
887
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU1 >ODU2) ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU2)
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.
Table 15-25 Meaning of ports on the TN53NQ2 (standard mode) Port Name 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) Indicates the mapping path for the ODUflex signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2) Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
888
cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The NQ2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-57, Figure 15-58, and Figure 15-59 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
889
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
NQ2 board
Compatible mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
890
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Other board a
Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2
Compatible mode
NQ2 board
Standard mode
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
891
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
892
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Other board a
NQ2 board
2 Cross-connect module
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
standard mode
WDM side
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
893
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-60 and Figure 15-61 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
894
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
NQ2
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
895
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN52NQ2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN54NQ2: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
896
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Compatible mode
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
NQ2 board
Standard mode
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board a
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
897
Other board c
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-62 and Figure 15-63 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 15-62 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2(compatible mode)/TN52NQ2 (compatible mode)/TN54NQ2(compatible mode) (ODU2 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
NQ2 board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
898
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52NQ2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN54NQ2: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
899
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1 Cross-connect module
compatible mode
NQ2 board
standard mode
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 2 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1 Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
900
ODUflex Cross-Connections
Figure 15-64 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections. Figure 15-64 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2(standard mode ) (ODUflex level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Other boarda
Cross-connect module
WDM side
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
NQ2 board
Cross-connect module
WDM side
2
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Other boardb
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
One IN/OUT can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 901
The Service Mode parameters of different IN/OUT ports are independent of each other.
ODU0 TOM TOM NS2 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 NQ2 ODUflex TDX ODUflex ODU2 ND2 ODU2 IN4/OUT4 IN2/OUT2 IN1/OUT1
IN3/OUT3
See Figure 15-72. See Figure 15-73. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-66. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-67.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-68. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-69.
ODU1
Channel inloop WDM-side outloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
See Figure 15-74. See Figure 15-75. See Figure 15-76. See Figure 15-77. See Figure 15-74. See Figure 15-76. See Figure 15-78. See Figure 15-79. See Figure 15-80. See Figure 15-81.
ODU2/ODU2e
ODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
903
Figure 15-66 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/ TN54NQ2 board(ODU0ODU1-ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
904
Figure 15-67 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NQ2 board(ODU0 ODU2)
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
OTU2
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-68, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services are loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services are passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
905
Figure 15-68 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/ TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
906
Figure 15-69 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NQ2 board(ODU0 ODU2)
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
OTU2
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-70, 32 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
907
Figure 15-70 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-71, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
908
Figure 15-71 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-72, 32 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Then, the ODU1 services are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 service can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
909
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-73, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
910
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
911
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-75, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
912
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-76, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
913
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-77, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
914
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
915
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-79, four OTU2/OTU2e services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
916
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
917
ODUflex ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-81, four OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into four ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Each ODU2 service is deconverged into two ODUflex services. Any N of the eight ODUflex services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex services can directly be passed through.
ODUflex ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
918
Channel Loopback
Service Mode
l TN51NQ2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN53NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
919
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Relay Mode. This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. For ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports AFEC.
FEC Mode
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
920
Description The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: Standard Mode OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Used to configure the line rate of OTN. See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
921
Description Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1 >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53NQ2 in the standard mode.
Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2.
Board Mode
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Line Mode
The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
922
Board TN51NQ 2
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
TN52NQ 2
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN53NQ 2
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN54NQ 2
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
923
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
924
Table 15-29 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 15-30 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
925
Unit
km
SLM 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
926
Mechanical Specifications
l l l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.) TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN51 NQ2 WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 88 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 95
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
92 88
99 97
TN52 NQ2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
92 45
101 50
TN53 NQ2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
49 53
54 58.3
TN54 NQ2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
927
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
15.3 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN53NS2 board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, the TN53NS2 board supports tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side. The TN11NS2 or TN52NS2 board does not support that function.
For details, see15.3.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2.
Substitution Relationship
Table 15-31 Substitution rules of the NS2 board Origin al Board TN11N S2 TN12N S2 Substi tute Board None TN53 NS2 Substitution Rules
The TN53NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN12NS2.
NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.
TN52N S2 TN53N S2
The TN53NS2 can be created as TN52NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN52NS2. -
15.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NS2 board implements conversion between eight crossconnect ODU0 signals or two cross-connect ODUflex signals or four cross-connect ODU1 signals or one cross-connect ODU2 signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. The NS2 board also converts between one cross-connect ODU2e signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 929
Figure 15-82 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 Client side 8 TOM 4 WDM side 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 1 TOM 8 1 Client side
Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between one channel of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals
Figure 15-83 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2)
G.694.1 G.694.1
NS2
MUX
DMUX
NS2 TDX
Client side
TDX NS2
Client side
NS2
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between eight channels of ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
Figure 15-84 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3)
1 Client side 8 TOM 8 WDM side 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 8 1 TOM 8 1 Client side
NOTE
The TN52NS2/TN53NS2 boards support this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
930
Application scenario 4 of the TN53NS2: conversion between two channels of ODUflex and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
Figure 15-85 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)
MUX Client side TDX NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 NS2 TDX Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, only the TN53NS2/TN53TDX boards support ODUflex signals. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
The ODUflex is only supported by the TN52NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800. The ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS2 and TN53NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800. Only the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support ODU2/ODU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
931
Table 15-32 Functions and features of the NS2 board Function and feature Basic function Description OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps eight channels of ODU0 signals or four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2 signals, or maps one channel of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals and ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU2 signals. The board converts the OTU2 signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G. 694.1. The reverse process is similar. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2 signals, or maps one channel of ODU2e signals into one channel of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the other three boards in the four-slot mesh group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the OTU2 signals into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
932
Description OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
933
Description TN11NS2: l Supports the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. TN12NS2: l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. TN52NS2/TN53NS2: l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU0. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l TN53NS2 supports TCM functions and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l TN53NS2 supports PM functions for ODUflex.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
934
Not supported TN11NS2/TN12NS2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN52NS2/TN53NS2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Supported by the TN53NS2
NOTE The TN53NS2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Supported only when the TN53NS2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane Supported Supported by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
935
Description TN12NS2/TN53NS2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53NS2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
936
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
937
Description Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
938
Figure 15-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800)
ODU1 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
939
Figure 15-87 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
940
Figure 15-88 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0/4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
941
Figure 15-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
942
Figure 15-90 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (OptiX OSN 3800)
4XODU1 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
943
Figure 15-91 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board(OptiX OSN 6800)
4 X ODU1/ 1 X ODU2/1 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection)
OUT
O/E
IN
Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
944
Figure 15-92 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board(OptiX OSN 8800)
8 X ODU0/4 X ODU1/ 2 X ODUflex/ 1 X ODU2/1 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection)
IN
SCC
Signal Flow
The signal processing module of the NS2 board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l ODU0 electrical signals ODU1 electrical signals ODUflex electrical signals ODU2 electrical signals ODU2e electrical signals
NOTE
ODU0 is supported by TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800. ODUflex is supported by TN53NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800. ODU2/ODU2e is supported in OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
945
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels of ODU1 signals, or two channels of ODUflex signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of ODU2e signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels of ODU1 signals, or two channels of ODUflex signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane. The groomed service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex/ODU2/ODU2e signals.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12NS2 does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board, however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.
OTN processing module Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 946
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
NS2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
947
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board. Table 15-33 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Table 15-35 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 948
Table 15-35 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 15-36 shows the valid slots for the TN53NS2 board. Table 15-36 Valid slots for the TN53NS2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
949
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. l Figure 15-94, Figure 15-95 and Figure 15-96 show the port diagrams for the TN52NS2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN11NS2 board in the compatible mode. Table 15-38 lists the port descriptions. Figure 15-97 shows the port diagram for the TN53NS2 board in standard mode. Table 15-39 lists the port descriptions.
NOTE
When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only crossconnect ODU1 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN12NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52ND2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from the backplane. The cross-connect granularity supported by the board is determined by that supported by the cross-connect board in the same subrack. For information about cross-connect boards, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the NS2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
950
1 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
951
4 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
1 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
952
4 x ODU1
Backplane
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-38 Meaning of NM port of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP4 ODU1LP1 Meaning Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channels 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channel 1. Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. WDM-side optical ports. Automatic Cross-Connection Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP port. Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP port Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT port -
ODU2LP1
IN/OUTa
IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
953
IN/OUT-OCH:1
1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e
OCH :1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
ODU1:1 4 xODU1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH : 1 IN/OUT
ODU0:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU1:1 ODU2:1 OCH :1
ODU 1:4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
ODU0:1 8 xODU0 ODU2:1 ODU0: 8 OCH :1
Backplane
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU1 >ODU2) ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU2)
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
954
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.
Table 15-39 Meaning of NM port of the TN53NS2 board (standard mode) Port Name IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) Definition Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2) Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2) Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the backplane WDM-side optical ports
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) IN/OUT-OCH:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
IN/OUT
cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The NS2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
955
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-98, Figure 15-99 and Figure 15-100 show the created ODU0 cross-connections. Figure 15-98 TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
NS2
2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
956
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
compatible mode
NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
standard mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
957
Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 Other board d TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
NS2
2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Standard mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
958
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 Other board d TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-101, Figure 15-102 and Figure 15-103 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
959
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
NS2
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Other board c
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN12NS2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS TN52NS2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN12NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN52NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
960
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
NS2
2
compatible mode
standard mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
961
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
NS2
Cross-connect module
2
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-104 and Figure 15-105 show the created ODU2 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
962
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
NS2
2 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
Cross-connect module
WDM side
Other board b
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN12NS2: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL TN52NS2: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX Other board b TN12NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
963
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
WDM side
NS2
2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
standard mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
Other board b (compatible mode) Other board c (standard mode)
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
ODUflex Cross-Connections
Figure 15-106 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections..
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
964
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Cross-connect module
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
965
IN/OUT
(1)
(2)
TN52NS2
Channel inloop
For channel inloop at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-108. For channel inloop at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-112.
Channel outloop
For channel outloop at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-110. For channel outloop at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-113.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
966
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN53NS2
Channel inloop
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-108. Mapping path: ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-109.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-110. Mapping path: ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-111.
ODU 1
TN11NS2/TN12NS2/ TN52NS2
See Figure 15-116. See Figure 15-117. See Figure 15-118. See Figure 15-119. See Figure 15-116. See Figure 15-117. See Figure 15-120. See Figure 15-121. See Figure 15-122. See Figure 15-123.
TN53NS2
TN12NS2/TN52NS2/ TN53NS2
TN53NS2
NOTE
Only the TN52NS2 and TN53NS2 boards used in the OptiX OSN 8800 support ODU0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
967
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
968
Figure 15-109 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NS2 board(ODU0>ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-110, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
969
Figure 15-110 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
As shown in Figure 15-111, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed through. Figure 15-111 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NS2 board(ODU0>ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 970
WDM-side
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-112, eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-112 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-113, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
971
Figure 15-113 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NS2 board
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services
WDM-side
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-114, eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU1 services. Then, the four ODU1 services are converged into one ODU2 services. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point.
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
WDM-side outloops
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
972
As shown in Figure 15-115, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 15-115 WDM-side outloops on the TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
973
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-117, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM-side inloops
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 974
As shown in Figure 15-118, four ODU1 services from the backplane are converged into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 15-118 WDM-side inloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-119, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
975
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-121, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. The ODU2/ODU2e service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point.
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
976
ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side IN/OUT
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-123, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into two ODUflex services. Any of the two ODUflex services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex service can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
977
ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
978
Service Mode
l TN11NS2: NA l TN12NS2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN52NS2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN53NS2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
979
Description The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2 /TN52NS2/TN53NS2.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN11NS2 board.
Line Rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
980
Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN53NS2. The parameter is supported by the TN53NS2 only in the standard mode.
Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN53NS2.
The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter sets and queries the timeslot configuration mode of a board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1 >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53NS2 in the standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
981
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
982
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
983
Table 15-43 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD ODB 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN DRZ 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
984
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD -26 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD -26 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN -16 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN -16
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
985
Unit
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 15-45 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
986
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 15-46 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm 1290 to 1330 -1 -6 6 NA 1530 to 1565 2 -1 8.2 NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
987
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
dB -
30 G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1565 -11 -1 -27 PIN 1260 to 1605 -14 -1 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb) TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.) TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 38.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 41.8
TN11NS 2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
39.0
42.9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
988
Board
WDM-Side Module
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN12NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN52NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN TN53NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
40.5
44.55
30.32 46.5 47 20
34 51.1 51.7 24
21
25
15.4 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
989
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
990
Substitution Relationship
Table 15-47 Substitution rules of the NS3 board Original Board TN11NS3 Substitute Board TN52NS3 Substitution Rules The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS3 functions as the TN11NS3. -
TN52NS3 TN54NS3
None None
15.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NS3 board implements conversion between 32 crossconnect ODU0 signals or 16 cross-connect ODU1 signals or four cross-connect ODU2 signals or one cross-connect ODU3 signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU3 signals. The NS3 board also converts between four cross-connect ODU2e signals or one crossconnect ODU3e signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU3e signals. In addition, the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
Figure 15-124 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 TQX 4 Client side 4 MUX NS3 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 NS3 4 1 TQX 4 Client side 1
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
991
Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between sixteen channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
Figure 15-125 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 2)
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 4 4 4 NS3 G.694.1 DMUX 1 WDM side WDM side 4 DMUX 1 TOM 8 MUX MUX G.694.1 NS3 4 4 1 1 TOM 8 Client side 1 1
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between thirty-two channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
Figure 15-126 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 3)
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 8 4 8 NS3 G.694.1 DMUX 1 WDM side WDM side 8 MUX 1 TOM 8 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS3 8 4 1 1 TOM 8 Client side 1 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
992
The TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3 board: conversion between one channel of ODU3/ODU3e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
Figure 15-127 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 4)
G.694.1 MUX TSXL NS3 DMUX MUX DMUX NS3 TSXL G.694.1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode and the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal
Figure 15-128 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 5)
WDM side DMUX IN
NS3
G.694.1 IN DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports this application scenario.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-48 and Table 15-49.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS3 /TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800. ODU3/ODU3e is only supported by the TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800. The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.
Table 15-48 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode) Function and feature Basic function Description Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, or four channels of ODU2 signals or one channel of ODU3 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU3 signals, or maps four channels of ODU2e signals or one channel of ODU3e signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU3e signals. The board converts the OTU3/OTU3e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar, and in this process, dispersion compensation can be performed for signals received on the WDM side. Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals and the ODU2/ODU2e signals. Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board.
Crossconnect capabilities
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
994
Description TN11NS3: l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU3 and ODU2. l Supports SM functions for OTU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. TN52NS3: l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, and ODU0. l Supports SM functions for OTU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3, ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. TN54NS3: l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU0, ODU1, ODU3, and ODU3. l Supports SM functions for OTU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU1, ODU2 and ODU3. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3.
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
995
Description Not supported TN11NS3/TN52NS3: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN54NS3: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Supported by TN54NS3. The TN54NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e signals are cross-connected from the backplane. Supported Supported by the TN52NS3 and TN54NS3 l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
996
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
997
Description Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-49 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature Basic function Regeneratin g rate OTN function Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s OTU3e: OTN service at a rate of 44.57 Gbit/s l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3. WDM specification Tunable wavelength function Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
998
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard compliance
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not Supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
999
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports the ODU0 and ODU3/ODU3e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1000
Figure 15-129 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 6800
4 X ODU2/4 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1001
Figure 15-130 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 6800
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1002
Figure 15-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/4XODU2e
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1003
Figure 15-132 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800 (Line Mode)
32 X ODU0/16 X ODU1/4 X ODU2/ 4 X ODU2e/1XODU3/1XODU3e
1588
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1004
Figure 15-133 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 (Relay Mode)
WDM side O/E
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
NOTE
Only the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 support ODU0 signals. Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e signals.
The TN54NS3 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l OTN processing module Frames OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes overheads in OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1006
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
NS3
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1007
NS3
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
NS3
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS3 board. Table 15-50 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1008
Table 15-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 15-52 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS3 board. Table 15-52 Valid slots for the TN52NS3 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28-IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU13-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30-IU36 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1009
The online signal bus on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 15-53 shows the valid slots for the TN54NS3 board. Table 15-53 Valid slots for the TN54NS3 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
When the TN54NS3 board needs to be used as a regeneration board, observe the following principles for selecting a valid slot: l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68. OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36. OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. OptiX OSN 6800: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS3 board can work in compatible mode. Figure 15-136, Figure 15-137 and Figure 15-138 show the logical Ports of the NS3 board. Table 15-55 describes the meaning of each port.
NOTE
For TN54NS3: l l ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode. When used with a TN53TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.
For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1011
Backplane
4xODU2/ ODU2e 32 x ODU0 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ ODU0LP4)-2 173(ODU0LP13/ ODU0LP13)-1 173(ODU0LP13/ ODU0LP13)-2 176(ODU0LP16/ ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ ODU0LP16)-2 16 x ODU1 ODU3/ODU3e
81(ODU3LP1/ ODU3LP1)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU3LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1012
The ODU1 and ODU2 ports in each of the following combinations cannot be used to configure cross-connections at the same time because they share the same ODU2 timeslot: l l l l 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2 port 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1005 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1008 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2 ODU2 port 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1009 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1012 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3 ODU2 port 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1013 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1016 ODU ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 ODU2 port
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2
71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-1
Cross-connect module
Multiplexing module
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1013
Cross-connect module
Multiplexing module
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-55 Meaning of NM port of the NS3 board Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP16 ODU1LP1ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1 Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-2. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-4. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1001-1016.
NOTE This port is used for crossconnections at the ODU1 level.
Automatic Cross-Connection Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU1LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU2LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU2LP port
TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port TN54NS3: Automatic crossconnections between the ports and the ODU3LP port
ODU3LP1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1014
Automatic Cross-Connection -
cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1015
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-139 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU0 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 2
176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2
Cross-connect module
Other board c
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
(standard mode)
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1016
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-140 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3 board (ODU1 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
Cross-connect module
WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
board a borad b
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/TN54THA/ TN54TOA TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1017
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1002 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1003 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004
Cross-connect module
WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1018
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-142 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU2 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Cross-connect module
WDM side
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
board a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1019
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52NS3: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 TN54NS3: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
ODU3 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-143 Cross-connection diagram of the TN54NS3 board (ODU3 level)
Client side
1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
WDM side
Other board b
2 81(ODU3LP1/ODU3LP1)-1
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
board a board b
TN53TSXL TN54NS3
As shown in (1) of Figure 15-144, signals at the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 levels are transmitted together. As shown in (2) of Figure 15-144, signals at the ODU3 level are processed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1020
TOM
NS3
TSXL
NS3
(1)
(2)
TN52 NS3
See Figure 15-145. See Figure 15-146. See Figure 15-147. See Figure 15-148. See Figure 15-149. See Figure 15-150. See Figure 15-151. See Figure 15-152. See Figure 15-153. See Figure 15-154. See Figure 15-155. See Figure 15-156.
TN54 NS3
ODU 1
TN52 NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1021
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN54 NS3
See Figure 15-157. See Figure 15-158. See Figure 15-159. See Figure 15-160. See Figure 15-161. See Figure 15-162.
ODU 2/ ODU 2e
TN11 NS3/ TN52 NS3/ TN54 NS3 TN11 NS3/ TN52 NS3 TN11 NS3 TN52 NS3 TN54 NS3
WDM-side outloop
WDM-side inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-164. See Figure 15-165. See Figure 15-166. See Figure 15-167. See Figure 15-168. See Figure 15-169.
TN54 NS3
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU2 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels. Similarly, if channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU1 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU0 channels.
Channel inloop Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown inFigure 15-145 , 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-145 , 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane and are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. , 32 ODU0 Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-145 services are cross-connected from the backplane. The ODU0 services are converged into 16 ODU1 services and then into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
OTU3
IN/OUT
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146 , one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. After that, each ODU1 service is further deconverged into two OD0 services. Any N of the ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1024
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop
NOTE
WDM-side inloops and Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points are similar except for the number of services looped back.
As shown in Figure 15-147, 32 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into four ODU2 services. The four ODU2 services are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1025
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-148, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is directly looped back to the WDM side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1026
WDM-side
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU1 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU0 channels.
Channel inloop Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-149 , 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. , 32 ODU0 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-149 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1027
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-150 , one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 services after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into 16 ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-150 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1028
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-151, 32 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into one ODU3 service. The ODU3 service is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1029
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-152, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1030
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU2 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU1 channels.
Channel inloop , 16 ODU1 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-153 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. , 16 ODU1 Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 15-153 services are cross-connected from the backplane and are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1031
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-154 , one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 service can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-154 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 services is then deconverged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1032
WDM-side inloops
NOTE
WDM-side inloops and Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points are similar except for the number of services looped back.
As shown in Figure 15-155, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU2 services, which are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1033
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-156, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is direclty looped back to the WDM side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1034
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1035
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-158, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1036
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane OTU3 IN/OUT
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-159, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into one ODU3 service, which is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1037
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked service WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-160, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1038
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked service WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1039
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-162, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is then deconverged into four ODU2 or ODU2e services. Any N of the ODU2 or ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 or ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1040
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1041
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1042
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1043
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1044
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-167, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1045
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1046
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-169, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 15-57. Table 15-57 NS3 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
l TN11NS3: not supported l TN52NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN54NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, Mix Default: Automatic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1048
Description Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN54NS3. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1049
Description Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. CBAND is the only band now supported.
C, CWDM Default: C
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1050
Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: l ODU2LP channel: Standard Mode l ODU2LP channel: Speedup Mode OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3 supports this parameter.
Used to configure the line rate of OTN. See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only TN52NS3/54NS3 supports this parameter.
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode
Queries the PMD threshold of the board. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1051
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
192.10 to 196.05 0 -5
192.10 to 196.05 0 -5
1052
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Unit
Value 500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 -500 to 500
dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27 PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
Table 15-59 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN ODB 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN DQPSK
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
THz dBm
192.10 to 196.05 0
192.10 to 196.05 0
1053
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 -800 to 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27 PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
TN11NS3: l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.4 kg (5.2 lb.)
TN52NS3:
TN54NS3:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1054
l l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.8 kg (3.96 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boa rd TN1 1NS 3 WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 76.8 67 118 110 71 60 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131C) (W) 86 75 130 118 78 66
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN5 2NS 3
TN5 4NS 3
15.5 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1055
15.5.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.
Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service
For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-170. Figure 15-170 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
8GE Local
client side Local client side
8GE
G.694.1 MUX
10GE
DMUX
MUX
L4G 4
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Table 15-60 Functions and features of the TBE board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service. l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services. The reverse process is similar. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
NOTE The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal.
Cross-connect capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. supported Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service). Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM protocol. l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP port to Trunk port. l Supports manual and static link aggregation. l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization
QinQ QoS (Quality of Service) ETH OAM LAG (Link Aggregation Group)
Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast. Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1057
Function and Feature Layer 2 switching Flow control EPL (Ethernet Private Line) EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) Port working mode
Description Supports the MAC address learning and aging. Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line. Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching. 10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electric interface: auto-negotiation FE optical interface: 100MFULL FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation
Not supported 10GE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop GE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop GE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1058
Description PHY Inloop Outloop FE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop FE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc.
IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1059
Figure 15-172 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board
Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 RX TX
GE
16
O/E 8 E/O
Client-side GE optical module
16
L2 switching module 16
Cross-connect module
O/E E/O
Client-side 10GE optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TBE board accesses the following signals: l l l l l l GE optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals FE optical signals FE electrical signals GE electrical signals
NOTE
l The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. l It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. l The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
Positive process: The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals. The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Negative process: The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels of GE electrical signals. A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the crossconnect module through the backplane.
Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services l Positive process: The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals. The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the backplane. l Negative process: The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards through the backplane. GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals. The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1061
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE/10GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l Cross-connect module Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1062
TBE
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 TX RX
TBE
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eighteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board. Table 15-61 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1063
Table 15-61 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board Interface TX1-TX8 Type LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. TX RX1-RX8 LC LC Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used. RX LC Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side equipment.
NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Table 15-63 Mapping between the physical ports on the TBE board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX/RX TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-174 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 15-64 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-174 Port diagram of the TBE board
Backplane
16 x GE
PORT3 PORT4
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1065
Table 15-64 Meaning of NM port of the TBE board Port Name PORT3 PORT4-PORT11 VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16 AP1-AP16 Meaning The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/ TX. These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports.
l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1066
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
Client side
1 2
TBE
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1067
PHY PHY
PHY inloop As shown in Figure 15-177, a maximum of 16 GE services from the backplane and eight GE services (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) received on the L2 switch module are converged into one 10GE service and is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-177 PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
RX1/TX1
PHY PHY
MAC outloop As shown in Figure 15-178, one 10GE service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1068
Figure 15-178 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
MAC inloop As shown in Figure 15-179, a maximum of 16 GE services from the backplane and eight GE services (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) received on the L2 switch module are converged into one 10GE service and is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point. Figure 15-179 MAC inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of FE/GE (Electrical Port) Services on the TN11TBE Board
l PHY outloop As shown in Figure 15-180, eight FE/GE services are received on the client side. One of the eight FE/GE services is loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1069
Figure 15-180 PHY outloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
PHY inloop As shown in Figure 15-181, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services or eight GE services are cross-connected from the backplane of a cross-connect module. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-181 PHY inloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
L2 switching module Client-side TBE board Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane
MAC inloop As shown in Figure 15-182, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services or eight GE services are cross-connected from the backplane of a cross-connect module. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1070
Figure 15-182 MAC inloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of FE/GE (Optical Port) Services on the TN11TBE Board
l PHY inloop As shown in Figure 15-183, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-183 PHY inloop of one FE/GE (optical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
MAC inloop As shown in Figure 15-184, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1071
Figure 15-184 MAC inloop of one FE/GE (optical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
PHY PHY
LPT Enabled
Board TN11TB E
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency dBm dBm dB nm -3 -11.5 9 1310 5 -2 9 1550
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1073
Unit
IEEE802.3zcompliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity (EOL) Minimum receiver overload dBm dBm PIN -19 -3 PIN -22 -3
Table 15-68 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1074
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Table 15-69 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation nm dBm dBm dB nm 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1075
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm dB -
1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Table 15-70 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10 Gbit/s rate services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km NRZ MLM 0.3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1076
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 4 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1.3
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1077
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km -7 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1
dBm
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 40.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 44.8
TN11TBE
15.6 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1078
15.6.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-185. Figure 15-185 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system
G.694.1 MUX GE TDG NS2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side DMUX NS2 TDG GE G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1079
Function and Feature PRBS function LPT function Test frame Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description Not supported Supported Supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1080
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1081
Figure 15-186 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board
Backplane (service corss-connection)
Client side
RX1 RX2
2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1
O/E
TX1 TX2
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1082
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TDG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TDG
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1084
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board. Table 15-72 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board Interface TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
1085
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-188 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 15-75 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-188 Port diagram of the TDG board
Other line/ OTU board Other tributary/ PID board
Backplane 2 x GE ODU1
3 (RX1/TX1)-1 4 (RX2/TX2)-1
201 (LP/LP)-1
Client Side
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-75 Meaning of NM port of the TDG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1086
Port Name LP
Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and 2.
in Figure 15-189.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
NOTE
4
in Figure 15-189.
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1087
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 3 4(RX2/TX2)-1
4 201(LP/LP)-1 2 1 201(LP/LP)-2
TDG
The straight-through of the TDGboard The internal cross-connection of the TDG board The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TDG board 1 2 3 4
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-190.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1088
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
TDG
Client side
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1090
Board TN11TD G
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1091
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 9 1000 BASELX-40 km 9 1000 BASEZX-80 km 9
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Table 15-78 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1092
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm nm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 30 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 33
TN11TDG
15.7 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1093
l l l l
For details, see 15.7.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1094
Substitution Relationship
Table 15-79 Substitution rules of the TDX board Original Board TN11TDX TN12TDX Substitute Board None TN53TDX Substitution Rules The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN12TDX. The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN52TDX. -
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
TN53TDX
None
15.7.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals using cross-connections. For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-191, Figure 15-192 and Figure 15-193. Figure 15-191 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system
G.694.1 4 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 TDX 4 NS2 DMUX MUX NS2 4 NS2 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 TDX 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1095
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
The TN11TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. The TN12TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN52TDX board supports conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN53TDX board supports conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals, and supports conversion between two channels of FC800 optical signals and two channels of ODUflex electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1096
Description STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s
NOTE The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000. Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Cross-connect capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TDX board and the crossconnect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1 signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot using the backplane. l TN12TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1097
Description l Maps each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at the ODU2 interface of the backplane. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM functions for ODU2.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192.
Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services. Supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 only when the TN53TDX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, or receives OTU2 services on its client side. Supports two channels of physical clock only when the TN53TDX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side. Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX/ TN53TDX).
Physical clock
XFP Loopback
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1098
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1099
Figure 15-194 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
Backplane(service cross-connection)
8 x ODU1
O/E
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Crossconnet module
Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1100
Figure 15-195 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
Backplane(service cross-connection)
O/E
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
E/O
Client-side optical module
Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1101
Figure 15-196 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex Client side
RX1 RX2
Backplane(service cross-connection)
O/E
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module OTN processing module
TX1 TX2
E/O
1588
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals FC800 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
NOTE
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1102
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals to the backplane for grooming. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 ports.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12TDX, TN52TDX and TN53TDX do not contain a crossconnect unit. This board, however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1103
FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.
NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.
OTN processing module Frames ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals. l 1588v2 module According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and then transmits the clock information to the clock board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1104
TDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TDX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1105
TDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TDX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board. Table 15-81 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1106
Table 15-81 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board Interface TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Table 15-83 shows the valid slots for the TN12TDX board. Table 15-83 Valid slots for the TN12TDX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-84 shows the valid slots for the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board. Table 15-84 Valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1107
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP/ 151(imp1/imp1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-199, Figure 15-200, Figure 15-201 show the port diagrams of the TDX board. Table 15-86 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-199 Port diagram of the TN11TDX
Other line/PID board
Backplane 8 x ODU1
151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1108
Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Cross-connect module
Table 15-86 Meaning of NMS port of the TDX board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 imp1-imp2 ClientLP1-ClientLP2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1109
The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE must be bound with 4 ODU1s. For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound in order. For example, when the TN11TDX board works with the TN12NS2 board, imp1.1 must be bound to ODU1LP1.1, imp1.2 must be bound to ODU1LP1.2, and so on.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or the ODU1LP port of other board), realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-202. l TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Configuration of cross-connection In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 15-203. l TN53TDX: Configuration of cross-connection Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 15-203. Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of other board, as shown in Figure 15-204.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1110
The TN53TDX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, set ODUflex Timeslot to 7.
Cross-connect module
Client side
151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4
TDX
Cross-connect module
The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1111
Cross-connect module
72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
TDX
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Cross-connect module
The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN12TDX: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52TDX: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53TDX:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1112
Other board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
TDX
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
Cross-connect mode
The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1113
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-206, eight ODU1 services from the backplane are converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service can be passed through. Figure 15-206 Client-side inloop on the TN11TDX board
ODU1 RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 RX2/TX2 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1114
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-208, two ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane are converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 service can be passed through. Figure 15-208 Client-side inloop on the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1115
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-210, two ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex services from the backplane are converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 service can be passed through. Figure 15-210 Client-side inloop on the TN53TDX board
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
Backplane
When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports client-side inloops and outloops.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1116
Service Type
l TN11TDX: 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN l TN12TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: None l TN52TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TDX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, FC800, FC1200 Default: None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1117
Value l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter l TN12TDX/ TN52TDX/ TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
NOTE For the TN12TDX: only the ClientLP1 port supports MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).
Description The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports this parameter.
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1118
Value 0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Description Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports this parameter.
LPT Enabled
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.
Service Mode
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. PAUSE Frame Flow Control Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Determines whether to enable the switch of the flow control.
NOTE Only TN11TDX supports this parameter.
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.
NOTE For the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1119
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Mode FEC Default: FEC The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1120
Description Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.
ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1121
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1122
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 30 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 30 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 30
dB
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1123
Table 15-90 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 78.0 37.4 57.3 25.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 80.0 40.7 63.0 35.0
15.8 THA
THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
15.8.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the THA at the client side is 40 Gbit/s. The THA board has four scenarios. l l l l Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0). Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1). Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1). Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
16*GE for ODU0 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the sixteen client-side ports on the board to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the port service type GE at the same time.
16*STM-16/OC-48 for ODU1 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side ports on the board to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and the port service type to STM-16/OC-48 at the same time.
THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-211. Figure 15-211 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 16 THA 16
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA 16
1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 16
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI and ESCON services can be accessed. If all the sixteen client-side ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can apply the 16*GE for ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS.
THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 15-212. Figure 15-212 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 2)
G.694.1 1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 16 THA 16
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA 16
1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 16
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1126
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1 services can be accessed. If all the sixteen client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can apply the 16*STM-16/OC-8 for ODU1 service package to the board on the NMS.
THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1) The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and two to sixteen channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 15-213. The THA board converges multiple client-side services into two ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of electrical ODU1 electrical signals.
NOTE
The client signals received by the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports cannot be encapsulated together with the client signals received by the RX9/TX9RX16/TX16 ports.
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA 16
1 125Mbit/s 2.2Gbit/s 16
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the Any, FE, FDDI, GE, FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , FICON and FICON Express services can be accessed.
THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). The THA board performs conversion between 16 OTU1 optical signals and 32 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-214. Figure 15-214 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 4)
G.694.1 1 OTU1 16 THA 32
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA
1 OTU1
DMUX
MUX
32
4
16
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1127
Cross-connects a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board. l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers, and the PM function at the ODU0 layer. l Supports the PM function at ODU1 layer, and the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and ODU0 layers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1128
Function and Feature ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. This function is supported only when the THA board receives FE or GE services on its client side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1
Test frame
Supported
NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).
IEEE 1588v2
When receiving GE(GFP-T) and OTU1 services on the client side, the board can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
NOTE When receiving OTU1 services, the TX8/RX8 and TX16/RX16 optical ports cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
When receiving GE(TTT-AGMP) services, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. Physical clock Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Supported only when the THA board receives GE(GFP-T) services on its client side. Supported. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. eSFP Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1129
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1130
Description Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Signal flow
Figure 15-215 shows the block diagram of the functions of the THA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1131
Figure 15-215 Functional modules and signal flow of the THA board
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
O/E
E/O
Crossconnect module
O/E E/O
Client-side optical module
1588
OTN processing module Service encapsulation and mapping module Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 15.8.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the THA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the THA to the backplane of the THA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX16 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 16 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1132
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 16 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 16 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX16 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the THA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
RX 1
2 TX
THA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RX 1 TX 15 2 TX 16 RX
TX 15
16 RX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1134
Label
Label Description Supports single-mode optical module,and uses G.657A2 optical fibers.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
Table 15-92 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 15-92 Types and functions of the interfaces on the THA board Interface RX1-RX16 TX1-TX16 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Two THA boards cannot be housed in adjacent slots. To easy maintenance of fibers, do not house the THA board in the most left or right slot.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1135
Table 15-93 Valid slots for the THA board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid slots IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU21-IU27, IU29IU35 IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17
1136
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-217 to Figure 15-220 show the port diagrams for the THA. Table 15-95 to Table 15-98 describe the meaning of each port. The THA board's NM ports may work in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). Select a proper working mode on the NMS as required. Figure 15-217 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Other line/PID board
18(RX16/TX16)-1
216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1137
Figure 15-218 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Other line/PID board
Figure 15-219 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1))
Other line/PID board
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1
216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-8
216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1138
Figure 15-220 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Other line/PID board
Backplane 32xODU0
17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1
215(ClientLP15/ClientLP15)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
Table 15-95 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2..
Table 15-96 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1139
Table 15-97 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
Table 15-98 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 ODU0LP1ODU0LP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
If all the 16 clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 16 * GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the service type to GE for the 16 ports.
l l
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 15-221.
2
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see in Figure 15-221.
1140
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Figure 15-221 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Other board
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
THA
16(TX14/RX14)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the TOA board.
Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the 16 client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can configure the 16 * STM-16/OC-48>ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and service type to STM-16/OC-48 for the 16 ports.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 15-222.
Figure 15-222 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 1
THA
16(TX14/RX14)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1
Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1142
in Figure 15-223.
Figure 15-223 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Other board a 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
THA
216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1
Cross-connect module
The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1143
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP. The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the last eight LP ports.
in Figure 15-224.
Figure 15-224 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
215(ClientLP15/ClientLP15)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1
Cross-connect module
Multiplexing module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1144
ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0) ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1) ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1) ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel outloop Channel inloop
See Figure 15-225. See Figure 15-226. See Figure 15-227. See Figure 15-228. See Figure 15-229. See Figure 15-230. See Figure 15-231. See Figure 15-232. See Figure 15-233. See Figure 15-234.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1145
16
ODU0
RX8/TX8
ODU0
RX9/TX9
ODU0
RX16/TX16
ODU0
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-226, sixteen ODU0 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1146
16
ODU0
RX8/TX8
ODU0
RX9/TX9
ODU0
RX16/TX16
ODU0
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1147
16
ODU1
RX8/TX8
ODU1
RX9/TX9
ODU1
RX16/TX16 Client-side
ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-228, sixteen ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services. When receiving STMsixteen/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-228 . .
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1148
16
ODU1
RX8/TX8
ODU1
RX9/TX9
ODU1
RX16/TX16 Client-side
ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1149
RX9/TX9
RX16/TX16
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-230, two to sixteen ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1150
RX9/TX9
RX16/TX16
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1151
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-232, 32 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1152
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-233, sixteen OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into sixteen ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the sixteen ODU1 services are deconverged into 32 ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1153
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 15-234, 32 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1154
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1155
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
Channel Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE(TTTAGMP), GE(GFP-T), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
The THA board's ports may work in any of four working modes and the type of the client-side services received by the ports varies with the working modes.
NOTE l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-AGMP), OC-3, OC-12, STM-1, and STM-4 services. l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, and GE(GFPT) services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1156
Value l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 2200 l Channels 28 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 1250 Default: /
Description sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to Any.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1157
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1158
Value ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), NONE Mode (Not for port) Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)
Description This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
S-16.1 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 15-101 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value S-16.1
km
NRZ 15
1159
Unit
Value S-16.1
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm dB 1260 to 1360 0 -5 8.2 1 30 G.959.1compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1580 -18 0 -27
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 15-102 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 1000BASE-LX-10km (I-1310-LC) NRZ SLM 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1160
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
nm dBm dBm dB -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 1260 to 1620 -20 -3
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.5 kg (3.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 35 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 40
TN54THA
15.9 TOA
TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1161
15.9.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the TOA at the client side is 20 Gbit/s. The TOA board has four scenarios. l l l l l l Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) 8*GE for ODU0 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side ports on the board to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the port service type GE at the same time. l 8*STM-16/OC-48 for ODU1 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side ports on the board to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and the port service type to STM-16/OC-48 at the same time. TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-235. Figure 15-235 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 8 TOA 8
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 8
1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1162
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, FDDI, GE , STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON and SDI services can be accessed. If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can apply the 8*GE for ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS.
TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 15-236. Figure 15-236 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2)
G.694.1 1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 8 TOA 8
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 8
1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express and OTU1 services can be accessed. If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can apply the 8*STM-16/OC-8 for ODU1 service package to the board on the NMS.
TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1) The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure 15-237. In this scenario, the TOA board converges multiple client-side services into one ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of electrical ODU1 electrical signals. Figure 15-237 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3)
G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 2.2Gbit/s 8 TOA 8
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 8
1 125Mbit/s 2.2Gbit/s 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1163
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the Any, FE, FDDI, GE , FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HD-SDI, FICON and FICON Express services can be accessed.
TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). The TOA board performs conversion between eight OTU1 optical signals and 16 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-238. Figure 15-238 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4)
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 16
1 OTU1 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) The TOA board performs conversion between five 3G-SDI optical signals and five ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 15-239. Figure 15-239 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (3G-SDI<->ODUflex)
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 5 TOA
1 3G-SDI 5
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
The TOA board performs conversion between four 3G-SDI optical signals and four ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 15-240.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1164
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 4 TOA
1 FC400 4
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1165
Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE The TOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect capabilities
Cross-connects a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or 8 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board. Cross-connects a maximum of five channels of ODUflex signals by using buses on the backplane and the cross-connect board.
NOTE Only the 3G-SDI and FC400 services support the ODUflex signals.
OTN function
l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers, and the PM function at the ODU0 layer. l Supports the PM function at ODU1 layer, and the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and ODU0 layers. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring function at the ODUflex layer.
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1166
Description l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. This function is supported only when the TOA board receives FE or GE services on its client side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1.
IEEE 1588v2
When receiving GE(GFP-T) and OTU1 services on the client side, the board can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
NOTE When receiving OTU1 services, the TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
When receiving GE(TTT-AGMP) services, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. Physical clock Electricallayer ASON Test frame Supported only when the TOA board receives GE(GFP-T) services on its client side. Supported Supported
NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).
Protection scheme
l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Channel Loopback Inloop Outloop Supported
NOTE The Channel Loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1167
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1168
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Signal flow
Figure 15-241 shows the block diagram of the functions of the TOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1169
Figure 15-241 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOA board
Backplane (service crossconnection)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
16xODU0/8xODU1/5xODUflex
O/E
E/O
Client-side optical module
Crossconnect module
1588
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Backplane SCC
NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 15.9.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the TOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOA to the backplane of the TOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 8 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 or 5 channels of ODUflex signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0, or ODU1, or ODUflex framing, demapping
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1170
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1, or ODU0, or ODUflex signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8
TOA
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board. Table 15-104 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1172
Table 15-104 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOA board Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal. Receives the service signal.
1173
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-243 to Figure 15-247 show the port diagrams for the TOA. Table 15-107 to Table 15-111 describe the meaning of each port. The TOA board's NM ports may work in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), or ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex). Select a proper working mode on the NMS as required. Figure 15-243 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Other line/PID board
10(RX8/TX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1174
Figure 15-244 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Figure 15-245 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
Other line/PID board
Backplane
1-8xODU1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1175
Figure 15-246 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Other line/PID board
Backplane
16xODU0
9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
Figure 15-247 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex))
Other line board
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1176
Table 15-107 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2..
Table 15-108 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Table 15-109 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
Table 15-110 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1177
Table 15-111 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 8 * GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the service type to GE for the eight ports.
l l
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 15-248.
2
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see in Figure 15-248.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1178
Figure 15-248 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the TOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can configure the 8 * STM-16/OC-48->ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and service type to STM-16/OC-48 for the eight ports.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 15-249.
Figure 15-249 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 1
TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1180
Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports.
2
Figure 15-250 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1181
NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.
in Figure 15-251.
Figure 15-251 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1182
in Figure 15-251.
When configuring a cross-connection, set ODUflex Timeslot to 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI, and set it to 4 if the client service type is FC400.
Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Table 15-112 Loopbacks supported by TOA boards Boar d TN5 4TO A Port Working Mode ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0) ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1) ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1) ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel outloop Channel inloop ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex) Client-side outloop Channel inloop Description See Figure 15-253. See Figure 15-254. See Figure 15-255. See Figure 15-256. See Figure 15-257. See Figure 15-258. See Figure 15-259. See Figure 15-260. See Figure 15-261. See Figure 15-262. See Figure 15-263. See Figure 15-264.
ODU0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1184
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-254, eight ODU0 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-254 Client-side inloop
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU0
ODU0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1185
RX2/TX2
ODU1
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-256, eight ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services. When receiving HD-SDI/STM16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-256 . .
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-256 Figure 15-256 Client-side inloop
RX1/TX1 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU1
ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1186
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-258, one to eight ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1187
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1188
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8 Client-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-260, 16 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1189
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8 Client-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-261, eight OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into eight ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the eight ODU1 services are deconverged into 16 ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1190
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8 Client-side
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 15-262, 16 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1191
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8
Client-side
ODUflex
3G-SDI 3G-SDI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1192
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-264, five ODUflex services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into five 3G-SDI services. Any N of the five 3GSDI services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through, or four ODUflex services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into four FC400 services. Any N of the four FC400 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-264 Client-side inloop
3G-SDI ODUflex
ODUflex
3G-SDI 3G-SDI
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1193
Channel Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1194
Value None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE (TTT-AGMP), GE (GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI Default: None
Description The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The TOA board's ports may work in any of five working modes and the type of the client-side services received by the ports varies with the working modes. l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-AGMP), OC-3, OC-12, SDI, STM-1, and STM-4 services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HDSDI, and GE(GFP-T) services. l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, HDSDI, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services. l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex):Supports FC400, 3G-SDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1195
Value l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 2200 l Channels 28 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 1250 Default: /
Description sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to Any.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1196
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1197
Value ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)
Description This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1198
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 15-114 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1199
Unit
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 15-115 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
km
NRZ 0.5
1200
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1201
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 15-116 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1202
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -27
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 15-117 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1203
Unit
G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Table 15-118 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km km Gbit/s NRZ 10 3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 1290 to 1330 0 -7 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1204
Unit
nm
3.0
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1620 -16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 23 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 25
TN54TOA
15.10 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE service processing board
15.10.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-265 and Figure 15-266. Figure 15-265 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800)
1 GE 8 client side TOG 8 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 8 WDM side 1 TOG 8 client side 1 GE
Figure 15-266 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
1 GE 8 client side TOG 4 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX
MUX
1 GE 8 client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1206
Table 15-119 Functions and features of the TOG board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities Description
Converts between eight channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of client-side service signals into four channels of ODU1 signals. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.
Alarms and performance events monitoring PRBS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock ALS function
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Not supported. Not supported. Supported. Supported. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1207
Description
Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1208
Signal Flow
Figure 15-267 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
8XODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
1588
Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1209
Figure 15-268 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
4XODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
1588
Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
The client side of the TOG board can access the following optical signals: l l GE optical signals. GE electrical signals.
In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out 4 channels of ODU1 signals or 8 channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane for grooming. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 or ODU0 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 or ODU0 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1210
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN processing module. GE service encapsulation and mapping module It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODU1 or ODU0 payload area and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function of GE performance monitoring. OTN processing module Frames ODU1 or ODU0 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 or ODU0 signals. l Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals. l 1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
NOTE
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TOG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8
TOG
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1212
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board. Table 15-120 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-120 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1213
Table 15-122 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-270 shows the application model of the TOG board.Table 15-123 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-270 Port diagram of the TOG board
Other tributary/ PID board Backplane
8xODU0/4xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
Crossconnect module
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1214
Table 15-123 Meaning of NM port of the TOG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 ClientLP1-ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
TOG
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1215
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
TOG
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1216
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
NOTE This parameter must be set to Auto-Negotiation when the PTP clock function is used.
See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1217
Description Specifies a clock source, or determines whether to transparently transmit the upstream clock information or to trace the local clock. Set the parameter based on the network design. The default value is Asynchronous for the board to trace the local clock. The default value is recommended because the local clock has higher quality. When the parameter is set to Asynchronous, the board will terminate the clock information in the client-side services. Instead, it will trace the local clock and transmit the clock information to the downstream station. When the parameter is set to Synchronous, the board will extract the clock information from its client-side services and transparently transmit the clock information to the downstream station.
NOTE Value change of this parameter will cause service interruption.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1218
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1219
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Table 15-126 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1220
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 41.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 46.0
TN52TOG
15.11 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
Specification: l The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1221
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Substitution Relationship
The TOM boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
15.11.2 Application
The TOM can be used in different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode. There are totally 5 scenarios of the TN11TOM. There are totally 12 scenarios of the TN52TOM. The scenarios of the TN11TOM: l In cascading mode, there are two scenarios. Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) l In non-cascading mode, there are three scenarios. Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1) The scenarios of the TN52TOM: l In cascading mode, there are four scenarios. Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l In non-cascading mode, there are eight scenarios. Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1) Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1222
In scenario 1 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows: l l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0. For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
In scenario 5 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows: l l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0. For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 11 of the TN52TOM, Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 12 of the TN52TOM,
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, see Table 15-134.
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1223
MUX TOM
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
7 Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1224
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups: ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. Any group of these internal logical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TOM
4 Client side
4 Client side
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system plan.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1225
W DM side TOM
4
MUX
G.694.1 MUX
4
G.694.1 TOM
4 DMUX
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
MUX
1 TOM 8
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1226
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1227
MUX TOM
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
7 Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed. On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
WDM side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
MUX TOM
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
7 Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario 2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1229
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
MUX
1 TOM 4
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1230
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, each optical interface can access services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-287 or Figure 15-288. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-323. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-340.
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.
The conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
1 OTU1
The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1232
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
G.694.1/ G.694.2
OTU1
TOM
MUX DMUX DMUX MUX WDM side
TOM
OTU1
Client side
NOTE
WDM side
Client side
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
Figure 15-291 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 10) A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
W DM side DMUX
4
W DM side TOM
4
MUX
G.694.1 MUX
4
G.694.1 TOM
4 DMUX
B: Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s MUX TOM DMUX DMUX MUX TOM G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
G.694.1 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s DMUX TOM MUX 4 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX DMUX DMUX MUX
G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1234
1 NS2 G.694.1 8
MUX
1 TOM 8
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 12.
1 NS2 G.694.1 8
MUX
1 TOM 8
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1235
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1236
Table 15-127 Functions and features of the TOM board Function and Feature Basic function Description
TN11TOM: l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals. l Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four OTU1 signals, and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. TN52TOM: l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal. l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal. l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals. l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. l Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals. l Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation. l Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1237
Description
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, see Table 15-134. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE The TOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only, for detailed description of the configuration. see Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board in Configuration Guide. The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the TOM board accesses these electrical signals, the digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion. For details, see 12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter. The access optical module on the client side requires the SDI access module. See Table 15-140.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1238
Description
OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TOM Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight ODU0 signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane and the crossconnect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TOM Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the transmission of maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN52TOM Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TOM Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN52TOM Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1239
Description
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the GE crossconnection between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the fourslot mesh group, that is, supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. OTN function l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers on the WDM side. l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at the ODU1 layer. l Supports the SM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers. l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer. WDM specification ESC function FEC encoding Alarm and performance event monitoring Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. ALS function The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
PRBS function
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1240
Function and Feature Test frame Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description
Supported Not supported Supported by the TN52TOM OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. OptiX OSN 8800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
NOTE When being used as tributary & line board, the TOM board only supports the loopback between ClientLP1ClientLP4.
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1241
Description
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1242
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1243
Signal flow
Figure 15-294 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) 4 x 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s / 1 x ODU1 Client side
RX 1 RX 2 RX 8 TX 1 TX 2 TX 8
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals or eight channels of Any signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1244
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module. For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal flow
Figure 15-295 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6
WDM side O/E Service CrossOTN encapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal.
NOTE
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1245
The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. After processing, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. After processing, the module outputs seven or six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels or seven channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 or TX1-TX7 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1246
Signal Flow
Figure 15-296 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) 4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 4X ODU1 Client side RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1247
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module. For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-297 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossprocessing connect encapsulation module module and mapping module Signal processing module E/O
TX5 TX6 TX7 TX8 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITUT Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1248
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the TX5- TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX5-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups: ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. For client services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI), any group of these internal logical ports can access only one channel.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-298 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (electrical regeneration board) Non-cascading mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1249
E/O
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Cascading mode
WDM side WDM side
Cross-connect
RX7
O/E
Client-side optical module
module
E/O
WDM-side optical module
TX7
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
The TOM board implements the regeneration of one/four channels of unidirectional optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1250
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the RX1RX4 interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs service cross-connection, decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they have been encoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the TX1-TX4 interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-299 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])in cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1251
2X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1252
1X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal or between eight Any signals and two ODU0 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out two channels of ODU0 signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1253
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-300 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one ODU1 signal.
NOTE
On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
The transmit and receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1254
The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX7 or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1255
Signal Flow
Figure 15-301 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
1X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1256
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-302 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1.
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1257
After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX7 or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-303 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])in non-cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1258
8X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1259
4X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Converts between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals, or between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals or four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1260
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-304 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Converts between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, four or six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/ s. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1261
After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs two channels of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels or four channels of the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs six or four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six or four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels or four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1262
Signal Flow
Figure 15-305 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
4X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or converts between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals or four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels or four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service crossIssue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1263
connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals or four OTU1 to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals or ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels or four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-306 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
4X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Converts between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1264
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU1 to the clientside optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-307 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1265
Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU1 optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, re-encapsulation, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs two channels of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of OTU1 signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1266
Signal Flow
Figure 15-308 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossprocessing connect encapsulation module module and mapping module Signal processing module E/O
TX5 TX6 TX7 TX8 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8
E/O
Client-side optical module
O/E
WDM-side optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Converts between OTU1 signal and OTU1 signal, or converts between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals or four channels of OTU1 from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two or four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the TX1- TX8 optical interfaces.
Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two or four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1267
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals, performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four or six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-309 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
8X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
SCC
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800. The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1268
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1269
Signal Flow
Figure 15-310 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
8X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
NOTE
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1270
Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration module. Cross-connect module Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. Service processing module Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions. Service regeneration module Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals. Monitors the performance of WDM-side services. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8
TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1272
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board. Table 15-128 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-128 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal. Receives the service signal.
Table 15-130 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1274
Figure 15-312 to Figure 15-316 show the port diagrams of the TN11TOM board. Figure 15-317 to Figure 15-328 show the port diagrams of the TN52TOM board. Table 15-132 and Table 15-133 describe the meaning of each port. The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode. You can select a proper mode by using the U2000 according to the actual application requirements. The difference between the two modes lies in the ports of the board and the crossconnection routes. For the TN11TOM, in Cascading mode, there are two modes of the board. In non-cascading mode, there are four modes of the board. For the TN52TOM, in cascading mode, there are four modes of the board. In non-cascading mode, there are eight modes of the board. Figure 15-312 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any>ODU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Figure 15-313 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)) Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 10(RX8/TX8) 9(RX7/TX7)
8(RX6/TX6) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 : Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1275
: Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Figure 15-314 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2 1(IN/OUT) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 52NS2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1276
Figure 15-315 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Figure 15-316 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces. In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 15-317 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0 [->ODU1])) OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1277
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Other board
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.
Figure 15-318 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1278
Figure 15-319 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1))
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 52NS2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT)
Figure 15-320 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8) 9(RX7/TX7)
NOTE
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 15-321 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])) OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1279
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
7(RX5/TX5)
10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1280
Figure 15-322 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 4(RX2/TX2) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 6(RX4/TX4) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 9(RX7/TX7) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 8(RX6/TX6) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.
Figure 15-323 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)) OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800:
A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 A 52NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1281
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.
Figure 15-324 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0))
52TOM 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 1(IN/OUT) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. The OTU1 signals are accessed on the client side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1282
Figure 15-325 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0))
52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 1(IN/OUT) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. The OTU1 signals are accessed on the client side.
Figure 15-326 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1))
52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 1(IN/OUT) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. The OTU1 signals are accessed on the client side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1283
Figure 15-327 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 8(RX6/TX6)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
Figure 15-328 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)) OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(RX7/TX7)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1284
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
Table 15-132 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode) Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a ClientLP1/ClientLP2 ODU1LP1 ODU0LP1 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as clientside interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
Table 15-133 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode) Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a TN11TOM: l ClientLP1 l ClientLP3 TN52TOM: l ClientLP1 l ClientLP2 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP6 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1285
Port Name TN11TOM: l ClientLP2 l ClientLP4 TN52TOM: l ClientLP3 l ClientLP4 l ClientLP7 l ClientLP8 AnyLP1-AnyLP12 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
NOTE
Only the display of NM port in cascading mode is different from that in non-cascading mode. The configuration in cascading mode is similar to the configuration in non-cascading mode.
Configuration
If the TOM board is used to transmit services, set Board working Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Cascading and Non-cascading. l Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 1 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-329
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1286
WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
WDM side
2
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 2 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-330
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1287
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 3 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-331.
WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 4 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-332.
WDM side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1288
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 5 (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-333.
WDM side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 1 (Cascading mode:ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown (2) in Figure 15-334. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown (2) in Figure 15-334.
NOTE
When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.
Figure 15-334 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1289
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Standard mode
Other board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1290
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 2 (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-335. Create OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/ TX8 of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-335.
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1 2
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 3 (Cascading mode: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Create the crossconnection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1291
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-336. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (2) in Figure 15-336. Figure 15-336 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 3)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
WDM side
2
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 4 (Cascading mode: ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-337. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-337.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1292
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 5 (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown in Figure 15-338. Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown (3) in Figure 15-338. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown (4) in Figure 15-338.
NOTE
When configuring the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Figure 15-338 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1293
Standard mode
Other board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Compatible mode
Cross-connect module
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1294
Other board
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 162(ODU0LP2 /ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3 /ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4 /ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 6 (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-339. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-339.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output. If four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and selective receiving.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1295
WDM side
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 7 (Non-cascading: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-340. create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and the ODU1LP port on the TN52NS2 boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services, defined as (2) in Figure 15-340.
NOTE
When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected. For example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be used. Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1296
WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 8 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-341. Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-341. create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (4) in Figure 15-341.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1297
WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect module
Compatible mode
Client side
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-4 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-5 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-6 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-7 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-2 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-3 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-4 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-5 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-6 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-7 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-4 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-5 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-6 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-7 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-2 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-3 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-4 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-5 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-6 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-7 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1
WDM side
4
162(ODU0LP2 /ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3 /ODU0LP3)-1
TOM
236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-7 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8
244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 164(ODU0LP4 /ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 9 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-342. Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-342. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown (4) in Figure 15-342.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1298
WDM side
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 4
52(ODU1LP2 /ODU1LP2)-1
2
162(ODU0LP2 /ODU0LP2)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 10 (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-343. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-343.
Figure 15-343 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10) OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 TOM 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
WDM side
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1 3 10(TX8/RX8)-1 TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 11 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-344. Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown (2) in Figure 15-344.
WDM side
Standard mode
Other board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Compatible mode
Client side
TOM
WDM side
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1300
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 12 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-345. Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-345. Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown (4) in Figure 15-345.
WDM side
Standard mode
Other board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Compatible mode
Client side
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-4 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-5 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-6 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-7 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-2 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-3 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-4 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-5 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-6 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-7 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-4 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-5 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-6 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-7 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-2 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-3 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-4 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-5 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-6 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-7 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8
WDM side
4
TOM
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, Service packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multiple configuration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning and reducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuring working modes, service types,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1301
cross-connections, and port types. Table 15-134 lists the service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration contents. Table 15-134 Service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration contents Service Package Name Board Working Mode Port Working Mode Service Type Port Type CrossConnectio n Configurat ion Bidirectional ANY-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 Mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to STM-16/ OC48 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1302
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal GElevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports RX1/ TX1, RX3/ TX3, RX5/ TX5, and RX7/ TX7 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP 1, ClientLP 3, ClientLP 5, and ClientLP 7. l Bidirecti onal GElevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports RX2/ TX2, RX4/ TX4, RX6/ TX6, and RX8/ TX8 and
Tributary 8*GE>8*ODU0
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 Mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1]) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1303
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion channel 2 of ports ClientLP 2, ClientLP 4, ClientLP 6, and ClientLP 8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1304
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal ANYlevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX7/ TX7 and channels 1 to 7 of port ClientLP 1. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between port RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of port ODU1LP 1.
Cascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributaryline (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1) for port ClientLP1.
Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for port RX8/TX8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1305
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal ANYlevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX7/ TX7 and channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP 1 and channels 5 to 7 of port ClientLP 2. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between port RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of port ODU1LP 1.
Cascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 tributaryline (Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for port ClientLP1.
l Service Type is set to FE for channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP 1 and channels 5 to 7 for port ClientLP 2.
Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for port RX8/TX8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1306
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX4/ TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP 1, ClientLP 3, ClientLP 5, and ClientLP 7. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX5/ TX5 to RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of ports from ODU1LP
4*OTU1 REG
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributaryline (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to OTU1 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for ports from RX5/TX5 to RX8/TX8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1307
Service Type
Port Type
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_O DU1 reencapsulati on tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to OTU1 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Bidirectional OTU1-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1308
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.
Channel Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, 0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1309
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1310
Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1311
Description Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE Only the TN11TOM supports this parameter.
Board Mode
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Board Working mode Cascading, NonCascading Default: NonCascading The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter. Cascading: Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. Non-Cascading: RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
In Non-Cascading mode, nine working modes are supported.a In Cascading mode, five working modes are supported.b
This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail. For the configuration methods of different application scenarios of the TOM board, see the Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1312
Field
Value
Description
a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) l Application 3 of ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port) b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port)
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
TN 11T OM TN 52T OM
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 15-136 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
1314
Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1315
Table 15-137 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1316
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 15-138 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1317
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -28 -9 -27
dBm dBm dB
-19 -3 -27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Table 15-139 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1318
Unit
G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Table 15-140 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance Service rate km Gbit/s Unit Value 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km NRZ 20 1.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm 1290 to 1330 0 -7 5 3
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm
Unit
dB
-27
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1320
Table 15-142 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz nm nm dB ps/nm 3 0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1321
Table 15-143 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1322
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 55 81 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 60 89.1
TN11TOM TN52TOM
15.12 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1323
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11TQM Substitute Board TN12TQM Substitution Rules The TN12TQM can be created as TN11TQM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the TN11TQM. -
TN12TQM
None
15.12.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-346.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1324
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.
Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1325
Description
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 and FDDI services. The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots. l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into ODU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1326
Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Description
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. TN11TQM: not supported. TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
PRBS function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. TN11TQM: not supported TN12TQM: supported
Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1327
Description
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON)
NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and protocols.
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1328
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1329
O/E
Service OTN encapsulation and Processing Cross-connect module mapping module module
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 15.12.3 Functions and Features.
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1330
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1331
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1332
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board. Table 15-145 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-145 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board Interface TX1-TX4 Type LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. RX1-RX4 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-349 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 15-148 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1334
201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect module Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from other boards
NOTE
TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.
Table 15-148 Meaning of NM port of the TQM board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Configuration Principle l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1335
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l l
For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 15-350. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 15-350. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 15-350. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Other board
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
WDM side
Client side
4 2 1
TQM
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board 1 2 3 4
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-351.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1337
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM side
Other board a (compatible mode)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
TQM
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a
Other board b
According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1338
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI,SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OTU-1 Default: None
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: Off The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1339
Description The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only available for TN12TQM.
SD Trigger Condition
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE Only available for the TN12TQM.
Board TN11TQ M
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN12TQ M
N/A
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1341
Table 15-150 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1342
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Table 15-151 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
1343
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km 0 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5
dBm
-2.5
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1344
Table 15-152 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1345
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 15-153 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm APD NA -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1346
Unit
dB
-27
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 50.3 25 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 57.6 27.5
TN11TQM TN12TQM
15.13 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1347
15.13.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals. For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-352. Figure 15-352 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system
G.694.1 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 TQS 4 4 1 NS2 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX NS2 4 G.694.1 1 TQS 4 Client side 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1
Client side
OTN function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1348
Function and Feature FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Description Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
PRBS function LPT function Test frame Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1349
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1350
O/E
E/O
Client-side Optical module
Cross-connect module
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-16 optical signals OC-48 optical signals OTU1 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals, and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1351
Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals, encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1352
Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TQS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TQS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1353
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board. Table 15-155 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-155 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board Interface TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1354
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-355 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 15-158 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1355
Client Side
Crossconnect module Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-158 Meaning of NM port of the TQS board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 LP1-LP4 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ODU1LP port of other boards (or the IN/OUT port on the NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 15-356. Figure 15-356 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Client side
201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2 201(LP1/LP1)-3 201(LP1/LP1)-4 The client side of the TQS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
TQS
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-357, four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are received on the client side. One of the four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services is loopbacked to the client side and the other three STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1357
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4 Client-side
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1 Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-358, four ODU1 services from the backplane are converted into four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. One of the four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services is loopbacked to the backplane and the other three STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are passed through. Figure 15-358 Client-side inloop on the TN11TQS board
RX1/TX1 STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4 Client-side
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1358
Description Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
Service Type
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1359
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1 signals.
Table 15-161 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
1360
Unit
km
MLM 2
SLM 15
SLM 40
SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1361
Unit
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The specifications listed below apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are STM-16, OC-48.
Table 15-162 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
Item Optical Module Type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
dBm dBm dB
-28 -9 -27
Table 15-163 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1363
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
nm dBm dBm dB
NA -28 -9 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 43 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 47.3
TN11TQS
15.14 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1364
l l l l
For details, see 15.14.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX.
Substitution Relationship
Table 15-164 Substitution rules of the TQX board Original Board TN11TQX Substitute Board TN52TQX, TN55TQX Substitution Rules The TN52TQX and TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX/ TN52TQX functions as the TN11TQX. The TN53TQX and TN55TQX can be created as TN52TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TQX functions as the TN52TQX. The TN55TQX can be created as TN53TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN53TQX.
1365
TN52TQX
TN53TQX, TN55TQX
TN53TQX
TN55TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Substitution Rules -
15.14.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-361. Figure 15-359 Position of the TN11TQX board in the WDM system
G.694.1 4 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 1 TQX 4
4 1
1 TQX
NQ2
4
Client side
Client side
1 TQX
NQ2
4
Client side
4
1
1 TQX
TQX
4
NQ2
4
10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 FC1200
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1366
NOTE
The TN11TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN52TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN53TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN55TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals, and supports conversion between four channels of FC800 optical signals and two channels of ODUflex electrical signals.
Crossconnect capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
NOTE The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TQX board. Only the FC800 services support the ODUflex signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1367
Description l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane. l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and TCM function when the TN52TQX , TN53TQX, TN55TQX receives OTN services.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
PRBS function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services. Supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 only when the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, or receives OTU2 services on its client side. Supports four channels of physical clock only when the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side. Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
XFP Loopback
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1368
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1369
O/E
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1370
O/E
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1371
O/E
1588
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals FC800 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
NOTE
Only TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQXsupports the OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals. Only TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports the FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1372
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1373
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.
OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex signals. l 1588 module According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and then transmits the clock information to the clock board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1374
TQX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board. Table 15-166 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1375
Table 15-166 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board Interface TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Table 15-168 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board. Table 15-168 Valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-169 shows the valid slots for the TN53TQX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1376
Table 15-169 Valid slots for the TN53TQX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-366 shows the port diagrams of the TQX board. Table 15-171 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1377
Backplane 4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
Cross-connect module
NOTE
Table 15-171 Meaning of NMS port of the TQX board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) Step 2: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. Step 3: Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-367. Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex) Step 2: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. Step 3: Create the cross-connections of ODUflex level between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-368.
NOTE
The TN55TQX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, see ODUflex Timeslot to 7.
The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a
TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1379
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52TQX: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53TQX: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN55TQX:
The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Board TN11TQ X/
1380
NOTE
The TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN52TQX board supports client-side outloop. When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports client-side outloop and client-side inloop. Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-369, any N of four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ FC800/FC1200 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be passed through.
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX3/TX3
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX4/TX4 Client-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-370, four ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane are converted into four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1381
OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192//FC800/FC1200 services can be passed through. Figure 15-370 Client-side inloop on the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board
RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC800/FC1200 ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX3/TX3
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX4/TX4 Client-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1382
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
l TN11TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: None l TN52TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TQX/ TN55TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, FC800, FC1200 Default: None
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
NOTE For the TN11TQX: only the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports support MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1383
Description sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports this parameter.
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports this parameter.
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.
NOTE For the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1384
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Mode FEC Default: FEC The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1385
Description Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TQX/TN55TQX.
ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2)
This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN55TQX
Board TN55TQ X
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
dBm
-1
-1.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1387
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 0 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -7.3
dBm
-6
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1388
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -27 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km -27 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -12
dB
-27
Table 15-175 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1389
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 65.0 91.5 45 45 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 71.2 100 50 50
15.15 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1390
Substitution Relationship
The TSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
15.15.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-371, and Figure 15-372. Figure 15-371 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 STM-256 OC-768 TSXL 4 NS2 Client side 4 DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 TSXL STM-256 OC-768
WDM side
Client side
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1391
In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1392
Description l TN11TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/ s signals into four channels of ODU2 services. l TN53TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/ s signals into one channel of ODU3 services. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l TN11TSXL: Supports PM functions for ODU2. l TN53TSXL: Supports PM, TCM, SM functions for ODU3 when the client-side service type is OTU3. l Supports PM function for ODU3 when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. TN11TSXL: Not supported TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
PRBS function
Not supported Not supported Supported by the TN53TSXL l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
Supported Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1393
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1394
Backplane(service cross-connection)
E/O
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1395
E/O
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TSXL board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals OTU3 optical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1396
The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation, demapping processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 optical signal. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 optical signal. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
TSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX
TSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1398
TSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX
TSXL
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board. Table 15-177 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1399
Table 15-177 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board Interface RX TX Type LC LC Function Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.
NOTE
The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 15-179 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL board. Table 15-179 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-377 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 15-378 shows the application model of the TN53TSXL board. Table 15-181 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-377 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board
3 (RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1401
Backplane ODU3
3 (RX1/TX1)-1
201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Client Side
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-181 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL board Port Name RX/TX imp (inverse multiplexing port) ClientLP1 Meaning Corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:2
Client side
151(imp/imp)-1 151(imp/imp)-2 151(imp/imp)-3 151(imp/imp)-4
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
TN53TSXL: During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU3 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU3LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown in Figure 15-380.
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board
TN54NS3
Table 15-182 Loopbacks supported by TSXL boards Board TN11TSXL Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop TN53TSXL Client-side outloop Description See Figure 15-381. See Figure 15-382. One STM-256/OC-768 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-383. One OTU3 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-384. Client-side inloop One STM-256/OC-768 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-385. One OTU3 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-386.
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-382, four ODU2 services from the backplane are converted into one STM-256/OC-768 service after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. One STM-256/OC-768 service can be looped back to the backplane. Figure 15-382 Client-side inloop on the TN11TSXL
ODU2 RX/TX STM-256/OC-768 ODU2 ODU2 ODU2 Client-side Loopbacked services Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1404
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
Backplane
As shown in Figure 15-384, one OTU3 service received on the Client side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated, The one ODU3 service from the client side can be looped back to the client side. Figure 15-384 Client-side outloop on the TN53TSXL (2)
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-385, one ODU3 service from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane. Figure 15-385 Client-side inloop on the TN53TSXL (1)
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
Backplane
As shown in Figure 15-386, one ODU3 service from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1405
RX/TX
Backplane
Service Type
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1406
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Mode FEC Default: FEC The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1407
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Unit
NRZ
nm dBm
Unit
dBm dB
3 -27
Mechanical Specifications
TN11TSXL: l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53TSXL:
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 90.2 75 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 96 83
TN11TSXL TN53TSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1409
16 PID Unit
16
About This Chapter
16.1 BMD4 BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz 16.2 BMD8 BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz 16.3 ELQX ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board 16.4 PTQX PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary 16.5 NPO2E NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended 16.6 NPO2 NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board 16.7 ENQ2 ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
PID Unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1410
16 PID Unit
16.1 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
16.1.2 Application
The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 16-1 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1411
16 PID Unit
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
4 BMD4
OA
OA
4 BMD4
ELQX
4 4
OA
OA
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1412
16 PID Unit
Description Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services. Not supported
Optical-layer ASON
Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04 R01 R02 R03 R04 Interleaver IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1413
16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1414
16 PID Unit
BMD4
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN T01 R01 T02 R02 T03 R03 T04 R04
BMD4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD4. Table 16-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1415
16 PID Unit
Table 16-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4 Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB. T01/R01 LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to 196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.70 THz to 195.90 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to 193.60 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.10 THz to 193.50 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
T02/R02
LC
T03/R03
LC
T04/R04
LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1416
16 PID Unit
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1417
16 PID Unit
Interface T02/R02
Number of Wavelengths 12
Frequency (THz) 193.7 193.9 194.1 194.3 194.5 194.7 194.9 195.1 195.3 195.5 195.7 195.9
Wavelength (nm) 1547.715 1546.119 1544.526 1542.936 1541.349 1539.766 1538.186 1536.609 1535.036 1533.465 1531.898 1530.334 1559.794 1558.173 1556.555 1554.940 1553.329 1551.721 1550.116 1548.515 1560.606 1558.983 1557.363 1555.747 1554.134 1552.524 1550.918 1549.315
T03/R03
T04/R04
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1418
16 PID Unit
Table 16-6 BMD4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Used to select the desired parity of the working band.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Optical Specifications
Table 16-7 Optical specifications of the BMD4 Item Operating wavelength range T0x/R0x channel spacinga IN/OUT channel spacing Insertion loss IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT dB 6 Unit nm GHz GHz dB Value 1529 - 1561 200 100 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1419
16 PID Unit
Item Isolationb IN->T01/T03@T02/T04 IN->T02/T04@T01/T03 IN->T01@T03 IN->T03@T01 IN->T02@T04 IN->T04@T02 R01->OUT@R03 R03->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R04 R04->OUT@R02 Optical return loss Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range
Unit dB
Value 25
13
dB dB dB dB dBm
40 45 0.5 0.5 23
a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports. b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band signals.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
BMD4
16.2 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1420
16 PID Unit
16.2.2 Application
The BMD8 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 16-4 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system. Figure 16-4 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system
4 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
8 BMD8
OA
OA
4 BMD8
ELQX
8 4
OA
OA
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1421
16 PID Unit
Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1422
16 PID Unit
Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08 R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08
Interleaver
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz. Finally, the four channels of oddwavelength multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. After wavelength filtering, the four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals are output through the T05-T08 optical interfaces. The interleaver multiplexes the four channels of odd-wavelength signals input through the R01R04 optical interfaces and the four channels of even-wavelength signals input through the R05R08 optical interfaces to one channel of optical signals. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical module
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1423
16 PID Unit
Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and uses the interleaver to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1424
16 PID Unit
BMD8
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT
BMD8
MON
IN
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 19 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD8. Table 16-9 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1425
16 PID Unit
Table 16-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8 Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB. T01/R01 T02/R02 T03/R03 T04/R04 T05/R05 LC LC LC LC LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.850 THz to 196.050 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.800 THz to 196.000 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.750 THz to 195.950 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.700 THz to 195.900 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.250 THz to 193.650 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.200 THz to 193.600 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.150 THz to 193.550 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.100 THz to 193.500 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
T06/R06
LC
T07/R07
LC
T08/R08
LC
16 PID Unit
Table 16-10 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board. Table 16-10 Valid slots for the BMD8 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU16
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1427
16 PID Unit
Table 16-12 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths Interface T01/R01 Number of Wavelengths 12 Frequency (THz) 193.85 194.05 194.25 194.45 194.65 194.85 195.05 195.25 195.45 195.65 195.85 196.05 T02/R02 12 193.8 194.0 194.2 194.4 194.6 194.8 195.0 195.2 195.4 195.6 195.8 196.0 Wavelength (nm) 1546.52 1544.92 1543.33 1541.75 1540.16 1538.58 1537.00 1535.43 1533.86 1532.29 1530.72 1529.16 1546.917 1545.322 1543.730 1542.142 1540.557 1538.976 1537.397 1535.822 1534.250 1532.681 1531.116 1529.553
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1428
16 PID Unit
Interface T03/R03
Number of Wavelengths 12
Frequency (THz) 193.75 193.95 194.15 194.35 194.55 194.75 194.95 195.15 195.35 195.55 195.75 195.95
Wavelength (nm) 1547.32 1545.72 1544.13 1542.54 1540.95 1539.37 1537.79 1536.22 1534.64 1533.07 1531.51 1529.94 1547.715 1546.119 1544.526 1542.936 1541.349 1539.766 1538.186 1536.609 1535.036 1533.465 1531.898 1530.334 1559.39 1557.77 1556.15 1554.54 1552.93 1551.32 1549.72 1548.11
T04/R04
12
193.7 193.9 194.1 194.3 194.5 194.7 194.9 195.1 195.3 195.5 195.7 195.9
T05/R05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1429
16 PID Unit
Interface T06/R06
Number of Wavelengths 8
Frequency (THz) 192.2 192.4 192.6 192.8 193.0 193.2 193.4 193.6
Wavelength (nm) 1559.794 1558.173 1556.555 1554.940 1553.329 1551.721 1550.116 1548.515 1560.20 1558.58 1556.96 1555.34 1553.73 1552.12 1550.52 1548.91 1560.606 1558.983 1557.363 1555.747 1554.134 1552.524 1550.918 1549.315
T07/R07
T08/R08
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1430
16 PID Unit
Value -
Description Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Used to select the desired parity of the working band.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Optical Specifications
Table 16-14 Optical specifications of the BMD8 Item Operating wavelength range T0x/R0x channel spacinga IN/OUT channel spacing Insertion loss IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 IN-T05 IN-T06 IN-T07 IN-T08 Unit nm GHz GHz dB Value 1529 - 1561 200 50 8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1431
16 PID Unit
Item R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT R05-OUT R06-OUT R07-OUT R08-OUT Isolationb IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T04/T08 IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T03/T07 IN->T01@T05 IN->T05@T01 IN->T02@T06 IN->T06@T02 IN->T03@T07 IN->T07@T03 IN->T04@T08 IN->T08@T04 R01->OUT@R05 R05->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R06 R06->OUT@R02 R03->OUT@R07 R07->OUT@R03 R04->OUT@R08 R08->OUT@R04 Optical return loss Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range
Unit dB
Value 9.5
dB
25
13
dB dB dB dB dBm
40 45 0.5 0.5 23
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1432
16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Value
a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports. b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
BMD8
16.3 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board
16.3.2 Application
The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1433
16 PID Unit
ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar. Figure 16-7 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system. Figure 16-7 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system
4 4
OA ELQX 4 PTQX
BMD4
OA
BMD4
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
OA
OA
4
ELQX
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals between the PTQX board and the cross-connect board.
Table 16-15 Functions and features of the ELQX Function or Feature Basic function Description l Converts between four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals from the client side and four OTU2/ OTU2e electrical signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the preceding services. The reverse process is similar. l Multiplexes 16 ODU1 signals or four ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse process is similar. Client-side service type 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1434
16 PID Unit
Description l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side signals into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS. l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received. Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Not Supported Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1435
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1436
16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 16-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Client side 4ODU2(e)/16ODU1
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
4OTU2(e)
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals
In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The clientside optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backplane. The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1437
16 PID Unit
for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board through the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1 signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals. The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1438
16 PID Unit
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
ELQX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1439
16 PID Unit
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX. Table 16-16 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 16-16 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces Interface TX1 - TX4 RX1 - RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment.
16 PID Unit
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-10, Figure 16-11 and Figure 16-12 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board. Table 16-19 lists the indication of each port. Figure 16-10 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Service Processing Module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1441
16 PID Unit
54(ODU1/LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Crossconnect module
Cross-connect module
Table 16-19 Meaning of NM ports of the ELQX Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
16 PID Unit
If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as shown by (1) in Figure 16-13. If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown Figure 16-14. If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) Figure 16-13. The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-15.
Cross-connection module 2
Other board
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
Cross-connection module
ELQX board
The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board
1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1443
16 PID Unit
Client side
1 Other board
Client side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
ELQX board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1444
16 PID Unit
74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
ELQX board
WDM side
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 2 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 PTQX baord
Cross-connect module
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Cross-connect module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
ELQX board
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group
1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1445
16 PID Unit
Table 16-20 ELQX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Service Type
10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU-2, OTU2 2E, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.
1446
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Description The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
FEC Mode
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1447
16 PID Unit
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
Line Rate
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1448
16 PID Unit
Board TN12PT QX
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1449
16 PID Unit
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 8.2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 9 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 3
dB
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1450
16 PID Unit
Table 16-22 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1451
16 PID Unit
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 86.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 99.1
ELQX
16.4 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary
Type
One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 16-23. Table 16-24 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies. Table 16-23 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX) Serial No. 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Left) 33, 37, 41, 45 34, 38, 42, 46 35, 39, 43, 47 36, 40, 44, 48 -
Wavelength No. of the PTQX 1, 5, 9, 13 2, 6, 10, 14 3, 7, 11, 15 4, 8, 12, 16 49, 53, 57, 61
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right) 17, 21, 25, 29 18, 22, 26, 30 19, 23, 27, 31 20, 24, 28, 32 65, 69, 73, 77
PTQX Type
16 PID Unit
Serial No. 6 7 8
Wavelength No. of the PTQX 50, 54, 58, 62 51, 55, 59, 63 52, 56, 60, 64
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right) 66, 70, 74, 78 67, 71, 75, 79 68, 72, 76, 80
PTQX Type
NOTE For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.
Table 16-24 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system Wavelengt h No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 196.00 195.95 195.90 195.85 195.80 195.75 195.70 195.65 195.60 195.55 195.50 195.45 195.40 195.35 195.30 195.25 195.20 195.15 195.10 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.55 1529.94 1530.33 1530.72 1531.12 1531.51 1531.90 1532.29 1532.68 1533.07 1533.47 1533.86 1534.25 1534.64 1535.04 1535.43 1535.82 1536.22 1536.61 Wavelengt h No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Frequency (THz) 194.05 194.00 193.95 193.90 193.85 193.80 193.75 193.70 193.65 193.60 193.55 193.50 193.45 193.40 193.35 193.30 193.25 193.20 193.15 193.10 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.32 1545.72 1546.12 1546.52 1546.92 1547.32 1547.72 1548.11 1548.51 1548.91 1549.32 1549.72 1550.12 1550.52 1550.92 1551.32 1551.72 1552.12 1552.52
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1453
16 PID Unit
Wavelengt h No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 195.05 195.00 194.95 194.90 194.85 194.80 194.75 194.70 194.65 194.60 194.55 194.50 194.45 194.40 194.35 194.30 194.25 194.20 194.15 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1537.00 1537.40 1537.79 1538.19 1538.58 1538.98 1539.37 1539.77 1540.16 1540.56 1540.95 1541.35 1541.75 1542.14 1542.54 1542.94 1543.33 1543.73 1544.13 1544.53
Wavelengt h No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Frequency (THz) 193.05 193.00 192.95 192.90 192.85 192.80 192.75 192.70 192.65 192.60 192.55 192.50 192.45 192.40 192.35 192.30 192.25 192.20 192.15 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.93 1553.33 1553.73 1554.13 1554.54 1554.94 1555.34 1555.75 1556.15 1556.55 1556.96 1557.36 1557.77 1558.17 1558.58 1558.98 1559.39 1559.79 1560.20 1560.61
16.4.2 Application
The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16 ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar. For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 16-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1454
16 PID Unit
OA ELQX 4 PTQX
BMD4
OA
BMD4
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
OA
OA
4
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1455
16 PID Unit
Description l Maps a maximum of four channels of client-side signals to OTU2/ OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G. 7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS. l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance events of the board.
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received. Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1456
16 PID Unit
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1457
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
4xODU2(e)/16xODU1 Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
8OTU2(e)
O/E
4
OTN processing module
OUT
PID Module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals
In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backbone. The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/ ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1458
16 PID Unit
are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation, mapping, OTN framing, and FEC/AFEC encoding. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module. The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals. Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC/AFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs four channels of electrical signals. The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the client-side laser. l PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12 channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1459
16 PID Unit
Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1460
16 PID Unit
PTQX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT IN
PTQX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the PTQX. Table 16-26 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1461
16 PID Unit
Table 16-26 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces Interface IN OUT TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the line signal. Transmits the line signal. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is IU3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1462
16 PID Unit
Table 16-28 Characteristic code for the PTQX Code The first three digits Meaning The frequency of optical signal Description The last three digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385. l "605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.85 THz.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1463
16 PID Unit
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-19, Figure 16-20, and Figure 16-21 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table 16-30 lists the indication of each port. Figure 16-19 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Service processing module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect module
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1
134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1464
16 PID Unit
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect module
Table 16-30 Meaning of ports on the PTQX Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4 OCHLP1-OCHLP12 IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 16-23. If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 16-22. The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-24.
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Cross-connect module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
PTQX board
1 2
The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1466
16 PID Unit
PTQX board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1467
16 PID Unit
ELQX board
WDM side
Cross-connect module
PTQX board
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Cross-connect module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
ELQX board
1
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1468
16 PID Unit
Table 16-31 PTQX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Service Type
The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.
1469
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Description The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
FEC Mode
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1470
16 PID Unit
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
Line Rate
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
SD Trigger Condition
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1471
16 PID Unit
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
TN 12P TQ X
200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1472
16 PID Unit
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 4 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1.3
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1473
16 PID Unit
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km -7 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1
dBm
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Table 16-33 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm
1474
16 PID Unit
Unit
dBm dB
0 -27
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 1 -7 6.5 5 0.8 30 200
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -10.5 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1475
16 PID Unit
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 93.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 107.6
PTQX
16.5 NPO2E
NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended
Type
The TN55NPO2E board has two types: TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04, which process different wavelengths. l l The TN55NPO2EL02 board processes wavelengths 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, and 30. The TN55NPO2EL04 board processes wavelengths 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, and 32.
A PID group that consists of the TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 16-35, Table 16-36 and Table 16-37. Table 16-38 lists the mappings between wavelength numbers, wavelengths, and frequencies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1476
16 PID Unit
Table 16-35 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2)(200G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78 TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
Table 16-36 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(120G system) Waveleng th Combinat ion No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
Table 16-37 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E)(80G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
NOTE
The TN55NPO2EL02/TN55NPO2EL04 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2E, see 16.5.5 Front Panel. The TN54ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the TN55NPO2E board. The TN55NPO2E board supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1477
16 PID Unit
Table 16-38 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system Wavelengt h No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.05 196.00 195.95 195.90 195.85 195.80 195.75 195.70 195.65 195.60 195.55 195.50 195.45 195.40 195.35 195.30 195.25 195.20 195.15 195.10 195.05 195.00 194.95 194.90 194.85 194.80 194.75 194.70 194.65
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.55 1529.94 1530.33 1530.72 1531.12 1531.51 1531.90 1532.29 1532.68 1533.07 1533.47 1533.86 1534.25 1534.64 1535.04 1535.43 1535.82 1536.22 1536.61 1537.00 1537.40 1537.79 1538.19 1538.58 1538.98 1539.37 1539.77 1540.16
Wavelengt h No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
Frequency (THz) 194.05 194.00 193.95 193.90 193.85 193.80 193.75 193.70 193.65 193.60 193.55 193.50 193.45 193.40 193.35 193.30 193.25 193.20 193.15 193.10 193.05 193.00 192.95 192.90 192.85 192.80 192.75 192.70 192.65
Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.32 1545.72 1546.12 1546.52 1546.92 1547.32 1547.72 1548.11 1548.51 1548.91 1549.32 1549.72 1550.12 1550.52 1550.92 1551.32 1551.72 1552.12 1552.52 1552.93 1553.33 1553.73 1554.13 1554.54 1554.94 1555.34 1555.75 1556.15
1478
16 PID Unit
Wavelengt h No. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 194.60 194.55 194.50 194.45 194.40 194.35 194.30 194.25 194.20 194.15 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1540.56 1540.95 1541.35 1541.75 1542.14 1542.54 1542.94 1543.33 1543.73 1544.13 1544.53
Wavelengt h No. 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Frequency (THz) 192.60 192.55 192.50 192.45 192.40 192.35 192.30 192.25 192.20 192.15 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1556.55 1556.96 1557.36 1557.77 1558.17 1558.58 1558.98 1559.39 1559.79 1560.20 1560.61
16.5.2 Application
As a PID board, the NPO2E board performs conversion between 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2 signals that are cross-connected through the backplane and 8 x OTU2 optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system, between 8 x ODU2e signals and 8 x OTU2e optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system. The NPO2E board also receives 4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from ENQ2 and converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals for output. Inside the NPO2E board, there is a red/blue band filter, which converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/ OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output. It also performs the reverse conversion. In addition, the NPO2E board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1479
16 PID Unit
Client-side service
Tributary board
Client-side service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E 4xOTU2/ OTU2e TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN55 NPO2
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service
NOTE
The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.
Clientside service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1480
16 PID Unit
Client-side service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Client-side service
NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2E/ TN55NPO2 board can process a maximum of 40G services. When the TN55NPO2E board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.
16 PID Unit
Description Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2E board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
WDM specification ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance events of the board.
The NPO2E board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. Not supported Not supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. Channel Loopback Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1482
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1483
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1484
16 PID Unit
8
OTN Processing module
PID Module
TO RI T02 R02
Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Required voltage Communication
SCC
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2E to the WDM side of the NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. The red/blue band filter converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through the OUT port on the PID optical module and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1485
16 PID Unit
the OUT port on another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals and outputs the signals through the TO port to the WDM side. l Receive direction The red/blue band filter receives one channel of multiplexed signals through the RI port and demultiplexes the signals into two channels of optical signals. It outputs 12 x OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals through the TO1 port to the IN port on the PID optical module and outputs 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through the TO2 port to the IN port on another NPO2 board. The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
NOTE
The NPO2E board can directly output a multiplexed signal through its OUT port to the WDM side and receive a multiplexed signal through its IN port from the WDM side.
Module Function
l Red/blue band filter In the transmit direction, it multiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by another NPO2 board. In the receive direction, it demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (20 wavelengths are multiplexed) from the WDM side and outputs one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) to the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) to another NPO2 board. l PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1486
16 PID Unit
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e signals OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. PQ2 service processing board Processes 40 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2E board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2E board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000. For details on how to create a logical PQ2 subboard, see Adding Boards in the Commissioning Guide.
1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1487
16 PID Unit
NPO2E
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2E
NPO2E
PQ2 installed
NOTE
The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For details, see 16.5.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the TN55NPO2E panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
There is one indicator on the PQ2 panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN55NPO2E. Table 16-40 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1488
16 PID Unit
Table 16-40 Types and functions of the TN55NPO2E interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives 12 channels optical signals that are output by the red/blue band filter or line-side multiplexed optical signals. Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side or the red/blue band filter. Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals from the OUT port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed). Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed). Receives optical signals that are output by the OUT port on the NPO2 board. Sends one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port on the NPO2 board (eight wavelengths are multiplexed). Receives multiplexed optical signals from the line side. Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.
LC LC LC LC LC
RI TO
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1489
16 PID Unit
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2E board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2E occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2E displayed on the NM is IU3.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN55NPO2E is 600380. l "600380" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.00 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.80 THz.
1490
16 PID Unit
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Logical Ports
The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. Figure 16-30 shows the port diagram.
NOTE
For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
NOTE
l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1491
16 PID Unit
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
NOTE
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The NPO2E board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
1492
16 PID Unit
ODU0 mapping path Table 16-44 Meaning of ports on the NPO2E Port Name 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14)-ODU0:(12) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112) Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2E signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the WDM-side port.
1(IN/OUT)
cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-31 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1493
16 PID Unit
Other board a
NPO2E board
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-32 shows the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1494
16 PID Unit
Other board a
Cross-connect module WDM side
NPO2E board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-33 shows the created ODU2 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1495
16 PID Unit
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
NPO2E board 2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1496
16 PID Unit
ENQ2 board
(standard mode)
NPO2E board
(standard mode)
Cross-connect module
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
TN55
IN/OUT
16 PID Unit
Table 16-45 Loopbacks supported by NPO2E board Cross-Connect Level ODU0 Board TN55N PO2E Loopback Type Channel inloop Channel outloop Channel inloop Channel outloop ODU2/ODU2e Channel inloop Channel outloop Description See Figure 16-36. See Figure 16-37. See Figure 16-38. See Figure 16-39. See Figure 16-40. See Figure 16-41.
ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1498
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1
ODU1 WDM-side
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-37 , eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Channel outloop at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-37 , eight OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1499
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1500
16 PID Unit
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
Channel outloop Channel outloop at ODU1 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-39, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 services is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Channel outloop at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-39, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1501
16 PID Unit
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1502
16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 16-41, eight OTU2/OTU2e services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through. Figure 16-41 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2E board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1503
16 PID Unit
Table 16-46 NPO2E parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1504
16 PID Unit
Description The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only C band is supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Line Rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1505
16 PID Unit
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 +2 -4.5 6 5 0.8 30 1500
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -12 3 -27
Table 16-48 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board Item Working wavelength in the C band Unit nm Value 1528 to 1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1506
16 PID Unit
Item Working wavelength in the blue band (T01/R01) Working wavelength in the red band (T02/R02) Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, RI->T02) Multiplexing loss (R01>T0, R02->T0) Isolation between red and blue bands
Mechanical Specifications
TN55NPO2E: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.7 kg (3.75 lb.)
TN54PQ2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69 in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H)) Weight: 0.1 kg (0.22 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 143 1.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 157.3 1.2
TN55NPO2E TN54PQ2
16.6 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1507
16 PID Unit
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN54NPO2 Substitute Board TN55NPO2 Substitution Rules The TN55NPO2 can be created as TN54NPO2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the TN54NPO2.
NOTE When you substitute a TN55NPO2 for a TN54NPO2 , configure a TN54PQ2, otherwise, the latter four wavelengths cannot be processed.
TN55NPO2
None
Type
A PID group that consists of the TN54NPO2, TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 16-49, Table 16-50, Table 16-51. Table 16-52 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1508
16 PID Unit
Table 16-49 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2) (200G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78 TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
Table 16-50 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2+ENQ2) (120G system) Wavelength Combination No. 1 2 3 4 Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2 TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29 TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/ TN55NPO2L02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31 TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/ TN55NPO2L04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 Wavelength No. of TN54ENQ2 33, 37, 41, 45 34, 38, 42, 46 35, 39, 43, 47 36, 40, 44, 48
Table 16-51 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2) (80G system) Wavelength Combination No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2
TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29 TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31 TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 TN54NPO205/TN55NPO2S05: 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77 TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1509
16 PID Unit
TN54NPO207/TN55NPO2S07: 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79 TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
NOTE
The ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the NPO2 board. Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance. The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 16.6.5 Front Panel.
Table 16-52 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system Wavelengt h No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Frequency (THz) 196.05 196.00 195.95 195.90 195.85 195.80 195.75 195.70 195.65 195.60 195.55 195.50 195.45 195.40 195.35 195.30 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.55 1529.94 1530.33 1530.72 1531.12 1531.51 1531.90 1532.29 1532.68 1533.07 1533.47 1533.86 1534.25 1534.64 1535.04 Wavelengt h No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Frequency (THz) 194.05 194.00 193.95 193.90 193.85 193.80 193.75 193.70 193.65 193.60 193.55 193.50 193.45 193.40 193.35 193.30 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.32 1545.72 1546.12 1546.52 1546.92 1547.32 1547.72 1548.11 1548.51 1548.91 1549.32 1549.72 1550.12 1550.52 1550.92
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1510
16 PID Unit
Wavelengt h No. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 195.25 195.20 195.15 195.10 195.05 195.00 194.95 194.90 194.85 194.80 194.75 194.70 194.65 194.60 194.55 194.50 194.45 194.40 194.35 194.30 194.25 194.20 194.15 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1535.43 1535.82 1536.22 1536.61 1537.00 1537.40 1537.79 1538.19 1538.58 1538.98 1539.37 1539.77 1540.16 1540.56 1540.95 1541.35 1541.75 1542.14 1542.54 1542.94 1543.33 1543.73 1544.13 1544.53
Wavelengt h No. 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Frequency (THz) 193.25 193.20 193.15 193.10 193.05 193.00 192.95 192.90 192.85 192.80 192.75 192.70 192.65 192.60 192.55 192.50 192.45 192.40 192.35 192.30 192.25 192.20 192.15 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1551.32 1551.72 1552.12 1552.52 1552.93 1553.33 1553.73 1554.13 1554.54 1554.94 1555.34 1555.75 1556.15 1556.55 1556.96 1557.36 1557.77 1558.17 1558.58 1558.98 1559.39 1559.79 1560.20 1560.61
16.6.2 Application
The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Further, the NPO2 board receives 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2, multiplexes 12 channels of OTU2/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1511
16 PID Unit
OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the optical signals. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side service
Tributary board
Client-side service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E 4xOTU2/ OTU2e TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN55 NPO2
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service
NOTE
When NPO2 boards are used to form a 200G system, the TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.
Clientside service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1512
16 PID Unit
Clientside service
Clientside service
OA TN54 NPO2
32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e Tributary board
OA TN54 NPO2
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
Clientside service
TN54 ENQ2
TN54 ENQ2
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
Clientside service
OA TN54 NPO2 OA
OA TN54 NPO2 OA
Client-side service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Client-side service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1513
16 PID Unit
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/ TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 40G services. When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end. When the TN54NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, the single-wavelength incident optical power must be 2 dBm. It is recommended to use an OA board that outputs 2 dBm single-wavelength optical power, such as the TN12OAU100 board, or use an OA board that outputs 4 dBm single-wavelength optical power and a 2 dB attenuator.
1514
16 PID Unit
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance events of the board.
The TN55NPO2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. Not supported Not supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. WDM side Inloop Outloop Supported
NOTE The TN55NPO2 board supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.
Channel Loopback
Inloop Outloop
Supported
NOTE The TN55NPO2 board supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1515
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1516
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1517
16 PID Unit
8 1588
Cross-connect module
OTN processing module
OUT
PID Module
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1518
16 PID Unit
8
PID Module
OUT
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1519
16 PID Unit
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Module Function
l PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e signals OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. PQ2 service processing board Processes 40 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2 board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2 board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000. For details on how to create a logical PQ2 subboard, see Adding Boards in the Commissioning Guide.
1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1520
16 PID Unit
NPO2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT
IN
NPO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1521
16 PID Unit
NPO2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2
NPO2
PQ2 installed
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 16.6.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NPO2. Table 16-54 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1522
16 PID Unit
Table 16-54 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives the line signal. Transmits the line signal.
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is IU3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Description The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385. l "605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.85 THz.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, and the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode.
NOTE
For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
l l
Figure 16-51 shows the board model of the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board in compatible mode. Table 16-58 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board. Figure 16-52 shows the board model of the T55NPO2 board in standard mode. Table 16-59 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1524
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
133(OCHLP1 /OCHLP1)-1
IN/OUT
189 (ODU0LP29/ODU0LP29)-1 189 (ODU0LP29/ODU0LP29)-2
58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-1 78 (ODU2LP8/ ODU2 ODU2LP8)-1 58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-4 140(OCHLP8 /OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9 /OCHLP9)-1
144(OCHLP12 /OCHLP12)-1
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a crossconnection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1525
16 PID Unit
Table 16-58 Meaning of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP8 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP8 OCHLP1-OCHLP12 IN/OUT Meaning Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1526
16 PID Unit
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH: 1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The TN55NPO2 board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 16-59 Meaning of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode) Port Name 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:(112)ODU1:(14)-ODU0:(12) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:(112)ODU1:(14) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112) Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the WDM-side port.
1(IN/OUT)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1527
16 PID Unit
The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-53 and Figure 16-54 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1528
16 PID Unit
Other board a
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
compatible mode
192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-1 192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-2
TN55NPO2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
standard mode
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1529
16 PID Unit
Other board b
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
2
192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-1 192(ODU0LP32/ODU0LP32)-2
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-55 and Figure 16-56 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1530
16 PID Unit
Other board a
Cross-connect module WDM side
compatible mode
TN55NPO2 board
standard mode
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1531
16 PID Unit
Other board a
Cross-connect module WDM side
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1532
16 PID Unit
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-57 and Figure 16-58 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-57 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU2 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
compatible mode
77(ODU2LP7/ODU2LP7)-1 78(ODU2LP8/ODU2LP8)-1
TN55NPO2 board
standard mode
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2
Other board a TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1533
16 PID Unit
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
TN54NPO2 board
(compatible mode)
2
77(ODU2LP7/ODU2LP7)-1 78(ODU2LP8/ODU2LP8)-1
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2
Other board a TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
16 PID Unit
standard mode
ENQ2 board
compatible mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1
TN55NPO2 board
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
standard mode
The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1535
16 PID Unit
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
The cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NPO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1536
16 PID Unit
NOTE The TN55NPO2 board supports only WDM-side loopbacks when working in compatible mode and only ODU2 channel loopbacks when working in the standard mode. The loopback points in the standard mode are the same as those in the compatible mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1537
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-63, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1538
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-64, 64 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 32 ODU1 services, which are then converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1539
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-65, eight OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1540
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1541
16 PID Unit
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-67, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 services is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1542
16 PID Unit
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-68, 32 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1543
16 PID Unit
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-69, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1544
16 PID Unit
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1545
16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 16-71, eight OTU2/OTU2e services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through. Figure 16-71 WDM-side outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1546
16 PID Unit
Table 16-61 NPO2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN55NPO2 only in the compatible mode.
See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Channel Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Service Mode Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2 (compatible mode).
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: On The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1547
16 PID Unit
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only C band is supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only C band is supported.
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
Line Rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1548
16 PID Unit
Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ 200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN NRZ
NRZ
1549
16 PID Unit
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km) 200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm 192.10 to 196.05 +2 192.10 to 196.05 +2 192.10 to 196.05 -2
dBm
-4.5
-4.5
-6
dB GHz
6 5
6 5
6.5 5
nm
0.8
0.8
0.8
dB
30
30
30
ps/nm
800
1500
200
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 1200 to 1650 PIN 1200 to 1650 PIN 1200 to 1650
dBm
-13.5
-12
-12
dBm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1550
16 PID Unit
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km) -27 200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN -27
dB
-27
Mechanical Specifications
TN54NPO2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
TN55NPO2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.)
TN54PQ2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69 in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H)) Weight: 0.1 kg (0.22 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 134 143 1.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 147 157.3 1.2
16.7 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1551
16 PID Unit
16.7.2 Application
The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side service
Tributary board
Client-side service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E 4xOTU2/ OTU2e TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN55 NPO2
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service
NOTE
The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1552
16 PID Unit
Clientside service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Figure 16-74 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN54NPO2)
64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
OA TN54 NPO2
32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e Tributary board
OA TN54 NPO2
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
Clientside service
TN54 ENQ2
TN54 ENQ2
Clientside service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1553
16 PID Unit
Table 16-63 Functions and features of the ENQ2 Function or Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse process is similar. Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 or 16 channels of ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. WDM specification ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback
Provides the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Not supported Not supported l Supports the ODUk SNCP. WDM side Inloop Outloop Supported
NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1554
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1555
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1556
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1557
16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 16-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/4XODU2e 4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e Backplane (service cross-connection)
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the NPO2 board through the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the NPO2 board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals. The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1558
16 PID Unit
Module Function
l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2 board.
Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2 signals OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1559
16 PID Unit
ENQ2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ENQ2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
16 PID Unit
Table 16-64 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15, IU19, IU23, IU27, IU31, IU35, IU39, IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65 IU1, IU5, IU12, IU16, IU20, IU24, IU29, IU33 IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN54ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode.
NOTE
For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
l l
Figure 16-77 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in compatible mode. Table 16-65 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board. Figure 16-78 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in standard mode. Table 16-66 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1561
16 PID Unit
Backplane
32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 16 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000. Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU1 mapping path
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1562
16 PID Unit
Table 16-65 Meaning of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4 Meaning Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
4xODU2/ 4XODU2e
ODU2:1
NPO2/ NPO2E
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 32xODU0 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 ODU1:4 ODU2:1
NOTE
Service cross-connections of the TN54ENQ2(standard mode) board are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board (either in standard mode) using the NMS. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1563
16 PID Unit
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 16-66 Meaning of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode) Port Name 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14)-ODU0:(12) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912) Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the WDM-side port.
1(IN/OUT)
The ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. When the ENQ2 board works in standard mode, service cross-connections are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board using the NMS. The ODUk services processed by the ENQ2 board are mapped onto OCH9-OCH12 optical channels on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board in standard mode. For details, see Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2) and Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2E).
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-79 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1564
16 PID Unit
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
ENQ2 board
2
176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2
Cross-connect module
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2
ODU1 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-80 shows the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1565
16 PID Unit
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
ENQ2 board
2
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
Cross-connect module
WDM side
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1566
16 PID Unit
ODU2 Cross-Connections
Figure 16-81 shows the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-81 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU2 level)
Client side
Other board a
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
ENQ2 board
72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1
74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Cross-connect module
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Cross-connect module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-84 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2. Figure 16-82 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
standard mode
ENQ2 board
compatible mode
Cross-connect module
WDM side
144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1
TN55NPO2 board
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
standard mode
The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1568
16 PID Unit
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
The cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
ENQ2 board
(standard mode)
NPO2E board
(standard mode)
Cross-connect module
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1569
16 PID Unit
NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports only WDM-side loopbacks when working in compatible mode and only ODU2 channel loopbacks when working in the standard mode. The loopback points in the standard mode are the same as those in the compatible mode.
NOTE
When an TN54ENQ2 board works in standard mode, channel loopback must be configured at the mapping NPO2/NPO2E board in standard mode; when an TN54ENQ2 board works in compatible mode, channel loopback must be configured at the mapping ENQ2 board, WDM-side loopback must be configured at the mapping NPO2 board in compatible mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1570
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-86, four OTU2 service received from the NPO2/NPO2E board is demapped into four ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the NPO2/ NPO2E board at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1571
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-87, 32 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1572
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-88, four OTU2 services received on the NPO2/NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1573
16 PID Unit
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1574
16 PID Unit
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-90, four OTU2 services received from the NPO2/NPO2E board is demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1575
16 PID Unit
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-91, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 4 ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1576
16 PID Unit
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-92, four OTU2 services received from the NPO2/NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1577
16 PID Unit
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1578
16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e NPO2/NPO2E
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 16-94, four OTU2/OTU2e services received from the NPO2/ NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through. Figure 16-94 WDM-side outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board
ODU2/ODU2e OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e NPO2/NPO2E
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
16 PID Unit
Table 16-68 ENQ2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Loopback Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback Service Mode Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Used to configure the line rate of OTN. Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries or sets the path Loopback.
FEC Mode
Line Rate
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1580
16 PID Unit
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 40 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 44
ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1581
17
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1582
17.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board
Type
Unit TN11M4 0/ TN12M4 0 Type 01 02 Description Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1583
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11M40 Substitute Board TN12M40 Substitution Rules The TN12M40 can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12M40 functions as the TN11M40. -
TN12M40
None
17.1.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1. Figure 17-1 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1584
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Supported
Multiplexer
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1585
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1586
M40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10 M31 193.00 M32 192.90 M33 192.80 M34 192.70 M35 192.60 M36 192.50 M37 192.40 M38 192.30 M39 192.20 M40 192.10
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12
M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26
M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
M40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1587
M13
M01
M02
M27 M28
M39 M40
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00 M31 193.00 M22 193.90 M32 192.90 M23 193.80 M33 192.80 M24 193.70 M34 192.70 M25 193.60 M35 192.60 M26 193.50 M36 192.50 M27 193.40 M37 192.40 M28 193.30 M38 192.30 M29 193.20 M39 192.20 M30 193.10 M40 192.10
M40
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 17-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1588
Table 17-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board Interface M01-M40 OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs. Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 17-3 and Table 17-4 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board. Table 17-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4001 board (C_EVEN) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56
Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55
1589
Table 17-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4002 board (C_ODD) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1590
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40 board, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-6 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40 board, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1591
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
For M40 parameters, refer to Table 17-9. Table 17-9 M40 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Configure Band Value C Default: C Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity All, Odd, Even Default: / Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-10 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board. Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the M40 board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Polarization dependence loss Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB nm/C dB Value 100 6.5 < -40 1529-1561 > 22 > 25 0.5 0.002 3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1593
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11M40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN12M40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 10.0 10.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 13.0 13.0
TN11M40 TN12M40
17.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1594
Type
Unit TN11M4 0V/ TN12M4 0V Type 01 02 Description Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11M40V Substitute Board TN12M40 V Substitution Rules The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12M40V functions as the TN11M40V. -
TN12M40V
None
17.2.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-5. Figure 17-5 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40V 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40V 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1595
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1596
Figure 17-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board
Optical module Multiplexer VOA VOA
VOA
Temperature detection
PIN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing. Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
M40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10 M31193.00 M32192.90 M33192.80 M34192.70 M35192.60 M36192.50 M37192.40 M38192.30 M39192.20 M40192.10
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12
M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26
M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
M40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1598
M13
M01
M02
M27 M28
M39 M40
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00 M31 193.00 M22 193.90 M32 192.90 M23 193.80 M33 192.80 M24 193.70 M34 192.70 M25 193.60 M35 192.60 M26 193.50 M36 192.50 M27 193.40 M37 192.40 M28 193.30 M38 192.30 M29 193.20 M39 192.20 M30 193.10 M40 192.10
M40V
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 17-12 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1599
Table 17-12 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board Interface M01-M40 OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs. Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 17-13 and Table 17-14 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and wavelengths of the M40V board. Table 17-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (even) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56
Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55
1600
Table 17-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1601
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40V board, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-16 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40V board, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1602
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
For M40V parameters, refer to Table 17-19. Table 17-19 M40V parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity All, Odd, Even Default: / Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Sets the working band type of a board.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-20 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board. Table 17-20 Optical specifications of the M40V board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Loss accuracy Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB dB Value 100 8a < -40 1529-1561 > 22 > 25 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB) Polarization dependent loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB dB 0.5 3a
NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11M40V: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN12M40V: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.) TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 20.0 16.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 24.95 26.0
TN11M40V TN12M40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1605
17.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board
Type
Unit TN11D40/ TN12D40 Type 01 02 Description Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1606
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11D40 Substitute Board TN12D40 Substitution Rules The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12D40 functions as the TN11D40. -
TN12D40
None
17.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 17-9. Figure 17-9 Position of the D40 in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1607
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Supported
Demultiplexer
PIN
Temperature detection
Temperature control
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1608
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Optical module Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1609
D40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
D01 196.00 D02 195.90 D03 195.80 D04 195.70 D05 195.60 D06 195.50 D07 195.40 D08 195.30 D09 195.20 D10 195.10 D11 195.00 D12 194.90 D13 194.80 D14 194.70 D15 194.60 D16 194.50 D17 194.40 D18 194.30 D19 194.20 D20 194.10 D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10 D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10
MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26
D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1610
D13
D27 D28
D39 D40
D01 196.00 D11 195.00 D02 195.90 D12 194.90 D03 195.80 D13 194.80 D04 195.70 D14 194.70 D05 195.60 D15 194.60 D06 195.50 D16 194.50 D07 195.40 D17 194.40 D08 195.30 D18 194.30 D09 195.20 D19 194.20 D10 195.10 D20 194.10
D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10
D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10
D40
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 17-22 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1611
Table 17-22 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces Interface IN D01-D40 MON Type LC LC LC Function Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed. Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN" interface of the OTUs. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 17-23 and Table 17-24 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board. Table 17-23 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4001 board (C_EVEN) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56
Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55
1612
Table 17-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002 board (C_ODD) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1613
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the TN11D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN11D40 displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-26 Valid slots for the TN12D40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12D40 board, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1614
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
For D40 parameters, refer to Table 17-29. Table 17-29 D40 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Optical Specifications
Table 17-30 lists the optical specifications of the D40. Table 17-30 Optical specifications of the D40 Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit GHz dB dB
Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Polarization dependent loss Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference -1 dB bandwidth -20 dB bandwidth
Unit nm dB dB dB nm/C dB nm nm
Value 1529-1561 > 25 > 25 0.5 < 0.002 3 0.2 < 1.4
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11D40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN12D40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 10.0 10.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 13.0 13.0
TN11D40 TN12D40
17.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1617
Type
Unit TN11D40V Type 01 02 Description Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
17.4.2 Application
As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and adjusts the output optical power of each channel. For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-13. Figure 17-13 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40V 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40V 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1618
Table 17-31 Functions and features of the D40V board Function and Feature Basic function Description Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels. Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after demultiplexing. Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1619
Figure 17-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board
Optical module Demultiplexer
VOA VOA
Splitter
IN MON PIN
VOA
Temperature detection
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.
Module Function
l Optical module Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
D40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
D01 196.00 D02 195.90 D03 195.80 D04 195.70 D05 195.60 D06 195.50 D07 195.40 D08 195.30 D09 195.20 D10 195.10 D11 195.00 D12 194.90 D13 194.80 D14 194.70 D15 194.60 D16 194.50 D17 194.40 D18 194.30 D19 194.20 D20 194.10 D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10 D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10
MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26
D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
D40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1621
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 17-32 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board Interface IN D01-D40 MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL. Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 17-33 and Table 17-34 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board. Table 17-33 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN) Interface D01 D02
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Frequency (THz) 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Interface D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
Frequency (THz) 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 17-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1623
Interface D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Frequency (THz) 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13
Interface D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
Frequency (THz) 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1624
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
1625
Interface on the NM 42
Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1626
Value -
Description The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-39 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board. Table 17-39 Optical specifications of the D40V board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Loss accuracy Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB dB Value 100 8a < -40 1529-1561 > 25 > 30 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB) Polarization dependent loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB dB 0.5 3a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1627
Item
Unit
Value
NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 20.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 24.95
D40V
17.5 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board
17.5.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the DFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes the signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1628
OA
NOTE
The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually refer to one physical board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1629
Figure 17-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board
Optical module
ERC ERM ETC ETM WRC WRM WTC WTM
Multiplexer
EOUT
Demultiplexer
EIN
Multiplexer
WOUT
Demultiplexer
WN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the WOUT optical interface. The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC and WTM optical interfaces The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the EOUT optical interface. The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC and ETM optical interfaces
Module Function
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical module
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1630
Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
DFIU
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board. Table 17-41 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1631
Table 17-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board Interface WIN WOUT WTC WRC WTM WRM EIN EOUT ETC ERC ETM ERM Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the west line signal. Transmits the west line signal. Transmits the west main path signal. Receives the west main path signal. Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the east line signal. Transmits the east line signal. Transmits the east main path signal. Receives the east main path signal. Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1632
Table 17-43 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1633
Table 17-45 DFIU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Configure Band Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
C Default: C
Sets and queries the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the DFIU board.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km)) Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km))
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-46 Optical specifications of the DFIU board Interface Item Operating wavelength range Unit nm Value 1529-1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1634
Interface -
Item Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insertion loss
Unit nm
Value 1500-1520
EIN-ETM ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT EIN-ETM WIN-WTM EIN-ETC WIN-WTC
dB dB
> 40 1.5
Insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
Isolation
dB
> 12
dB
< 0.2
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
TN21DFIU
17.6 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11FIU Substitute Board TN12FIU Substitution Rules l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1636
Substitution Rules l When the ASON function is not required. upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version.
TN13FIU TN21FIU
None None
17.6.2 Application
As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-19 and Figure 17-20. Figure 17-19 Position of the FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power)
OTU OTU MUX OA FIU FIU OA DMUX OTU OTU
DMUX
OA
OA
MUX
Figure 17-20 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power)
OTU OTU MUX HBA FIU FIU HBA DMUX OTU OTU
DMUX
HBA
HBA
MUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1637
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1638
Figure 17-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the TN12FIU board
Optical module
RC RM
Splitter
OUT MON
Multiplexer
TC TM
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1639
Figure 17-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board
Optical module
RC RM
Splitter
OUT MON
Multiplexer
TC TM
Demultiplexer
IN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the OUT optical interface. The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and TM optical interfaces
Module Function
l Optical module Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals to the MON interface for detection. l Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
NOTE
Only the TN11FIU and TN12FIU support the input optical power detection.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1641
FIU
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1642
FIU
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1643
FIU
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON TM RM IN TC
RC OUT
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1644
TM RM TC RC IN OUT MON
FIU
Indicators
The TN11FIU board has four indicators on the front panel. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) The TN12FIU board has four indicators on the front panel.
The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel. The TN21FIU board has no indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU board. Table 17-48 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-48 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board Interface IN OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Type LC LCa
Interface TC RC TM RM MON
Type LC LCa LC LC LC
Function Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum when it is connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 10 dB).
a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".
TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
Table 17-50 shows the valid slots for the TN12FIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1646
Table 17-50 Valid slots for the TN12FIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17
Table 17-51 shows the valid slots for the TN13FIU board. Table 17-51 Valid slots for the TN13FIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2IU5, IU11
Table 17-52 shows the valid slots for the TN21FIU board. Table 17-52 Valid slots for the TN21FIU board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1, IU8, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1647
Table 17-53 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Value -
1648
Value -
Description Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU and TN12FIU .
See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Channel Number Mode C80 Mode, C40 Mode, CWDM Mode Default: C80 Mode Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km)) Fiber Type All, Odd, Even Default: / 0-1 Default: 0.05 G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber Default: G652 Fiber Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km)) -15 - 30 Default: 0 This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the type of a fiber. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the FIU board. Sets the working band type of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1649
Field Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm) Receive DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)
Description Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the transmit end.
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the receive end.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-56 Optical specifications of the FIU board Interface Item Operating wavelength range Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insertion loss Unit nm nm Value 1529-1561 1500-1520
dB dB
> 40 1.5
Insertion loss
dB
dB dB dB
Mechanical Specifications
TN11/TN12/TN13FIU: l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1650
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN21FIU: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220.0 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 4.2 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 4.6 0.3
TN11/TN12FIU TN13/TN21FIU
17.7 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
Type
Unit TN11ITL Type 01 Description The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing.
1651
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Type 04
Description The optical module of the ITL04 board consists of two interleavers. The interleaver is used for both demultiplexing and multiplexing.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11ITL Substitute Board TN12ITL Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or later version. The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz.
TN12ITL
TN11ITL
17.7.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s. For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-27.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1652
WMU
ITL
WMU
OA
C_ODD
C_EVEN
NOTE
The WMU board must be used when the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other cases, the WMU board is optional.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1653
Figure 17-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board
Optical module
TO TE RO RE
IN OUT MON
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Figure 17-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1654
Signal Flow
TN11ITL01: l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
TN11ITL04: l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
TN12ITL: l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
ITL
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE
ITL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1656
ITL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE
ITL
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL board. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1657
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the ITL board. Table 17-58 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-58 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board Interface IN OUT TE RE TO RO MON Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals). Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board so that the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB.
Valid Slots TN11ITL: IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 TN12ITL: IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36
IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1659
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1660
Optical Specifications
Table 17-63 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01 Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Maximum reflectance Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range dB dB ps dB dBm -40 > 45 < 0.5 < 0.5 26 dB dB <1 > 25 dB < 2.5 Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 < 4.5
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Table 17-64 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04 Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Maximum reflectance dB -40 dB dB <1 > 25 dB <3 Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 <3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1661
Item Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range -
Unit dB ps dB dBm
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Table 17-65 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Maximum reflectance Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range dB dB ps dB dBm -40 > 45 < 0.5 < 0.5 23 dB dB <1 > 22 dB < 3.5 Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 < 4.5
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1662
Power Consumption
Board The typical power consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 10.0 The maximum power consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3 11.5
TN11ITL TN12ITL
17.8 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
17.8.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel (OSC). For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-32. Figure 17-32 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system
OA
SYS1
LINE1
LINE1
SYS1
SYS1
LINE1
LINE1
SYS1
OA
OSC2
OA
OSC2 OSC1
SCC
ST2
OSC1 SYS2
S F I U
LINE2 LINE2
S F I U
OSC2 OSC1
ST2
SCC
SYS2
S F I U
LINE2 LINE2
S F I U
OSC2
ST2
OSC1 SYS2
SCC
OA
OA
SYS2
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1663
NOTE
Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board. A Raman board cannot be configured between two NEs that are interconnected through SFIU boards.
LINE1
LINE2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) DC power supply from a backplane SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1664
Signal Flow
The LINE1 optical interface receives or transmits the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path. However, it cannot receive the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path and transmit OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path at the same time. The SYS1, SYS2, and LINE2 optical interface receive or transmit the signals of the main optical path. However, each port cannot receive the signals of the main optical path and transmit the signals of the main optical path at the same time. The OSC1 and OSC2 optical interfaces can receive or transmit the OSC signals. One optical interface, however, cannot receive the OSC signals and transmit OSC signals at the same time. That is, if the OSC1 or OSC2 optical interface is used to receive the OSC signals, the other optical interface must be used to transmit OSC signals. The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC1 optical interface receives the OSC signals and the OSC2 optical interface transmits OSC signals. l l The OSC signals received through the OSC1 optical interface is output through the LINE1 optical interface. The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the OSC2 optical interface. And the signals of the main optical path received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the SYS1 optical interface. The signals in the main optical path received through the SYS2 optical interface are output through the LINE2 optical interface.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC2 optical interface receives the OSC signals and the OSC1 optical interface transmits OSC signals. l l The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the OSC1 optical interface. The optical module multiplexes the signals of the main optical path received through the SYS1 optical interface and the OSC signals received through the OSC2 optical interface into one channel of optical signals. Then, the one channel of optical signals is output through the LINE1 optical interface. The signals in the main optical path received through the LINE2 optical interface are output through the SYS2 optical interface.
Module Function
l l Optical module Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals. Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
SFIU
STAT
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DO NOTVIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
SFIU
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SFIU board. Table 17-67 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board Interface LINE1 Type LC Function The LINE1 optical interface is located on the line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in addition to transmitting main optical path signals. The LINE2 optical interface is located on the line side. It transmits the signals of the main optical path. The SYS1 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path. The SYS2 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path. The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC signals. The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC signals.
LINE2
LC
LC LC LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1667
For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Table 17-71 SFIU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the working band type of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the board.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km)) Fiber Type
All, Odd, Even Default: All 0-1 Default: 0.05 G651 Fiber, G652 Fiber, G655 Fiber Default: /
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Sets the fiber type of the board.
-15 - 30 Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of the transmitting direction.
1669
Value -
Description Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of the receiving direction.
Optical Specifications
Table 17-72 Optical specifications of the SFIU board Interface LINE1SYS1 LINE2SYS2 LINE1OSC1 LINE1OSC2 LINE1OSC1 @c LINE1OSC2 @c OSC1SYS1 SYS1OSC1 OSC1OSC2 OSC2OSC1 Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Operating wavelength range (C band) Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Insertion loss
Uni t nm nm dB
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
dB dB dB
65 40 45
Directivity
dB
55
dB
> 40
1670
Interface -
Uni t dB dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F)(W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F)(W) 0.3
TN11SFIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1671
18
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1672
18.1 CMR1
CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
18.1.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-1. Figure 18-1 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system
Client side OTU Client side OTU
CMR1
CMR1
Table 18-1 Functions and features of the CMR1 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported
IN
OUT
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1674
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1675
IN D MO MI A OUT
CMR1
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board. Table 18-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board Interface A D IN OUT MI MO Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1677
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-7 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board. Table 18-7 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board Correspondi ng interfaces IN-D Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit nm dB dB
Unit dB dB dB dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
TN21CMR1
18.2 CMR2
CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1679
Substitution Relationship
The CMR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.2.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-4. Figure 18-4 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU
CMR2
CMR2
Table 18-8 Functions and features of the CMR2 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported
IN
OUT
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1681
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1682
CMR2
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2
CMR2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1683
IN D1 D2 MO MI A2 A1 OUT
CMR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board. Table 18-9 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR2 board Interface A1-A2 D1-D2 IN OUT MI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1684
Interface MO
Type LC
Function Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Table 18-11 Slots for the TN21CMR2 Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1685
Table 18-12 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board Code First four digits Meaning First wavelength that carries optical signals Second wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1686
Table 18-14 CMR2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-15 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2 board. Table 18-15 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit nm nm nm dB dB dB
1687
Item 0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance
Unit nm dB dB dB dB
IN-MO MI-OUT -
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows. l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows. l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
CMR2
18.3 CMR4
CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1688
Substitution Relationship
The CMR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.3.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-8. Figure 18-8 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system
Client side OTU 4 OTU Client side OTU 4 OTU
CMR4
CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1689
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1690
Figure 18-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board
D1 D4 MO MI A1 A4
IN
OUT
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1691
Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
CMR4
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4
CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1692
IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT
CMR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR4 board. Table 18-17 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR4 board Interface A1-A4 D1-D4 IN OUT MI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1693
Interface MO
Type LC
Function Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Table 18-19 Slots for the TN21CMR4 Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1694
Table 18-20 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board Code First and second digits Meaning First wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l l l l "47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm. "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
Interface on the NM 1 2 3
1695
Interface on the NM 4 5 6
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-23 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1696
Table 18-23 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance Unit nm nm nm dB dB dB nm dB Value 1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded) 20 6.5 2 > 25 > 35 6.5 2
dB dB dB
1.5 13 -40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1697
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
CMR4
18.4 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1698
Substitution Relationship
The DMR1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.4.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions. For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-12. Figure 18-12 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system
1310nm WD WIN
OTU
OTU
1310nm EA
D M R 1
WMO
O A D M
O A D M
WOUT
D M R EMO 1
ED
EMI
EOUT
WMI WA
EIN
1310nm
1310nm
NOTE
The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are actually one physical board. In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards. The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1699
Table 18-25 Functions and features of the DMR1 board Functions and Features Basic functions WDM specification Port concatenation Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions. Supports the CWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported
WIN EIN
EOUT WOUT
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1700
Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through EMO. Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT. Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1701
DMR1
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
DMR1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1702
DMR1
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 18-26 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board Interface EA/WA ED/WD EIN/WIN EOUT/WOUT EMI/WMI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east client-side equipment transmits. Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main paths. Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main paths. Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It connects to the output interfaces on other boards.
1703
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface EMO/WMO
Type LC
Function Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It connects to the input interfaces on other boards.
Table 18-28 Slots for the TN21DMR1 Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1704
Table 18-29 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode First to fourth digits Meaning Optical signal frequency Description Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.
Interface Display
Table 18-30 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board. Table 18-30 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board Interface on Front Panel WA/WD EA/ED WMI/WMO WIN/WOUT EMI/EMO EIN/EOUT Number on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Value -
Field Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type
Value -
Description Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to configure the band type.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-32 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board Correspondin g interfaces EA/ED/WA/ WD EIN-ED WIN-WD Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation EA-EOUT WA-WOUT EIN-EMO WIN-WMO EMI-EOUT WMI-WOUT Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1260-1360 1 > 40 1 0.8 25 0.8 15 -40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1706
Mechanical Specifications
Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb.)
Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
DMR1
18.5 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1707
Substitution Relationship
The MR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.5.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-16. Figure 18-16 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU
OA MR2 OA MR2
OA OA
Description Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specifications.
1708
Description Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported
IN
OUT
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1709
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1710
MR2
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2
MR2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1711
IN D1 D2 MO MI A2 A1 OUT
MR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR2 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR2 board. Table 18-34 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-34 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board Interface A1-A2 D1-D2 IN OUT MO Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1712
Interface MI
Type LC
Function Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Table 18-36 Valid slots for the TN21MR2 board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU1, IU8, and IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1713
Table 18-37 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal. Frequency of the second optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1714
Table 18-39 MR2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-40 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board. Table 18-40 Optical specifications of the MR2 board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing -1dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB
1715
Item -1dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Polarization dependence loss Maximum reflectance
Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB
IN-MO MI-OUT -
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 1 in. (W) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
MR2
18.6 MR4
MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
Substitution Relationship
The MR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.6.2 Application
As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-20. Figure 18-20 Position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system
Client side OTU 4 OTU Client side OTU 4 OTU
OA MR4 OA MR4
OA OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1717
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1718
Figure 18-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4 board
D1 D4 MO MI A1 A4
IN
OUT
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1719
Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
MR4
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4
MR4
Figure 18-23 shows the front panels of the TN21MR4 boards respectively.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1720
IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT
MR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR4 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR4 board. Table 18-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR4 board Interface A1-A4 D1-D4 IN OUT MI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1721
Interface MO
Type LC
Function Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Table 18-44 Valid slots for the TN21MR4 board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU1, IU8, and IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1722
Table 18-45 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code First four digits Meaning Frequency of first optical signal Description Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240. l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l l The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1723
Optical Specifications
Table 18-48 lists the optical specifications of the MR4 board. Table 18-48 Optical specifications of the MR4 board Interface IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing -1dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss
Unit nm GHz nm dB
1724
Interface
Unit dB dB nm dB
-1dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance
dB dB dB
1 2 3 4 5
80 72 64 56 48
1559 .79 1556 .55 1553 .33 1550 .12 1546 .92
76 68 60 52 44
1558 .98 1555 .75 1552 .52 1549 .32 1546 .12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1725
G ro u p
A1/D1 Wa vel en gth No. Wav elen gth (nm) Fre que ncy (TH z)
6 7 8 9 10
40 32 24 16 8
1543 .73 1540 .56 1537 .40 1534 .25 1531 .12
36 28 20 12 4
1542 .94 1539 .77 1536 .61 1533 .47 1530 .33
Mechanical Specifications
Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)
Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 1 in. (W) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
MR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1726
18.7 MR8
MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
18.7.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex eight channels of signals. For the position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-24. Figure 18-24 Position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system
Client side OTU 8 OTU Client side OTU 8 OTU
OA MR8 OA MR8
OA OA
Table 18-50 Functions and features of the MR8 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported
IN
OUT
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1728
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1729
MR8
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
D4
MR8
IN OUT MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3
A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 D8 A8
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8 board. Table 18-51 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1730
Table 18-51 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8 board Interface A1-A8 D1-D8 IN OUT MI MO Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-53. Table 18-53 Characteristic code for the MR8 board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the MR8 board is 92109280. l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
1732
Interface on the NM 7 8 9 10
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-56 lists the optical specifications of the MR8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1733
Table 18-56 Optical specifications of the MR8 board Interface IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT IN-MRO MRI-OUT Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing -1dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation -1dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 100 0.2 4 > 25 > 35
nm dB
0.2 4
dB dB dB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1734
Group A2/D2 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A3/D3 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A4/D4 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A5/D5 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A6/D6 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A7/D7 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A8/D8 Waveleng th No.
1 78 1559.79 192.20 76 1558.98 192.30 74 1558.17 192.40 72 1557.36 192.50 70 1556.55 192.60 68 1555.75 192.70 66
2 62 1553.33 193.00 60 1552.52 193.10 58 1551.72 193.20 56 1550.92 193.30 54 1550.12 193.40 52 1549.32 193.50 50
3 46 1546.92 193.80 44 1546.12 193.90 42 1545.32 194.00 40 1544.53 194.10 38 1543.73 194.20 36 1542.94 194.30 34
4 30 1540.56 194.60 28 1539.77 194.70 26 1538.98 194.80 24 1538.19 194.90 22 1537.40 195.00 20 1536.61 195.10 18
5 14 1534.25 195.40 12 1533.47 195.50 10 1532.68 195.60 8 1531.90 195.70 6 1531.12 195.80 4 1530.33 195.90 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1735
1 1554.94 192.80
2 1548.51 193.60
3 1542.14 194.40
4 1535.82 195.20
5 1529.55 196.00
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
MR8
18.8 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
18.8.2 Application
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1736
For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-27. Figure 18-27 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system
Client side Client side
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OA MR8V OA MR8V
OA OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1737
Figure 18-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board
D1 D8 MO MI A1 A2 A8
VOA
VOA
VOA
IN VO VI
V O A
OUT
Communication
SCC
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN or MI interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals. The IN or MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
NOTE
l The OTM station receives the multiplexed signals through the IN interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. l The OADM station receives the multiplexed signals through the MI interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. By default, the VO interface is connected to the IN interface on the VOA. The connection on the VOA can be changed manually.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1738
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals. Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of pass-through wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1739
MR8V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MR8V
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3
D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 D8 A8 VO VI
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8V board. Table 18-59 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1740
Table 18-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board Interface A1-A8 D1-D8 IN Type LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side when the IN interface is not connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board. Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber. OUT MI MO VI VO LC LC LC LC LC Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board. Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side. Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1741
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board. Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
"V"
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz. "V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
Table 18-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6 A7/D7 A8/D8 MI/MO IN/OUT VI VO Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1743
Field Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type
Description Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default:Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 18-64 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1744
Table 18-64 Optical specifications of the MR8V board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT VI-VO IN-MRO MRI-OUT Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 1 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation 1 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 100 0.2 4 > 25 > 35
nm dB dB dB
0.2 6 0-20 1 (attenuation 10 dB) 1.5 (attenuation 15 dB) 1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)
dB dB dB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1745
Group Frequenc y (THz) A2/D2 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A3/D3 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A4/D4 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A5/D5 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A6/D6 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A7/D7 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz)
1 192.10 78 1559.79 192.20 76 1558.98 192.30 74 1558.17 192.40 72 1557.36 192.50 70 1556.55 192.60 68 1555.75 192.70
2 192.90 62 1553.33 193.00 60 1552.52 193.10 58 1551.72 193.20 56 1550.92 193.30 54 1550.12 193.40 52 1549.32 193.50
3 193.70 46 1546.92 193.80 44 1546.12 193.90 42 1545.32 194.00 40 1544.53 194.10 38 1543.73 194.20 36 1542.94 194.30
4 194.50 30 1540.56 194.60 28 1539.77 194.70 26 1538.98 194.80 24 1538.19 194.90 22 1537.40 195.00 20 1536.61 195.10
5 195.30 14 1534.25 195.40 12 1533.47 195.50 10 1532.68 195.60 8 1531.90 195.70 6 1531.12 195.80 4 1530.33 195.90
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1746
1 66 1554.94 192.80
2 50 1548.51 193.60
3 34 1542.14 194.40
4 18 1535.82 195.20
5 2 1529.55 196.00
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 7.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 8.6
MR8V
18.9 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1747
18.9.2 Application
The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-30. Figure 18-30 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU
SBM2
SBM2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1748
Figure 18-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board
D1 D2 A1 A2
LINE
EXT
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface. The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1749
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
SBM2
STAT
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
EXT LINE D1 A1 D2 A2
SBM2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1750
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board. Table 18-67 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board Interface A1/A2 D1/D2 LINE EXT Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives and transmits multiplexed signals. Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1751
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1752
Optical Specifications
Table 18-71 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board. Table 18-71 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board Interface LINE-D1 LINE-D2 A1-LINE A2-LINE Optical return loss Pass-through loss Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation Add channel insertion loss Isolation CWDM Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1271 to 1611 3 30 3 30 > 40 1.5
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
SMB2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1753
19
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1754
19.1 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)
19.1.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1755
DMUX DCM OA 8
DMUX
RDU9
OA
WSM9 8 MUX
OA DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O O T T U U Client-side
O T U
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
NOTE
The RDU9 board broadcasts services and the uses the same wavelength for all of its optical ports to drop services. If the RDU9 only needs to receive a single wavelength, it can be directly connected to an OTU board. In most situations, however, the RDU9 needs to receive multiplexed wavelengths and must be connected to a D40 board for wavelength demultiplexing.
Description Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine directions at the same time. Supports the DWDM specification.
1756
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Supported
Optical demultiplexer module ROA TOA IN Optical module MONI MONO EXPO
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1757
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. The optical signals from the IN optical interface are divided into two channels of signals based on the optical power by the optical splitter. The main path optical signals are output through the EXPO interface and other signals are output through the TOA interface. The RDU9 board can be cascaded to the optical amplifier unit (OAU) through the TOA interface. If no cascade is required, the signals from the TOA interface should be input to the ROA interface directly. The optical wavelength signal from the ROA interface is split equally into different channels of optical signals, and the signals are then output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONO interface for performance detection. A few signals are extracted from the optical signals that are from the ROA interface and are output through the MONI interface for performance detection.
Module Function
l Optical module Broadcasts signals in nine directions. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1758
RDU9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MONO MONI EXPO IN TOA ROA DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
RDU9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board. Table 19-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1759
Table 19-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board Interface DM1-DM8 Type LC Function Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input through the ROA interface. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the ROA port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for the signals output through the EXPO interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Used as the cascade output interface. Used as the cascade input interface.
IN EXPO MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
TOA ROA
LC LC
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
Value -
Description Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-6 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board Item Operating wavelength range Insertion loss IN-Drop (DM1-DM8) ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8) IN-EXPO IN-TOA Consistency of the insertion loss of each channel Reflectance Polarization dependence loss Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 12.5 11.5 12.5 1 1.2 < -40 0.5
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1762
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 6.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 6.6
TN11RDU9
19.2 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
Type
Table 19-7 lists the types of the RMU9 board. Table 19-7 Type description of the RMU9 board Board TN11RMU 9 TN11RMU 9 Type 01 02 Description Processes the odd and even wavelengths of C-band. Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and supports the port blocking function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1763
19.2.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port by the optical transponder units. For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-4. Figure 19-4 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 RMU9 OA O T U
OA
RMU9 8 MUX
WSD9 8 DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
Client-side
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1764
Table 19-8 Functions and features of the RMU9 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-channel signals to the main path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 board implements the dynamic input of eight channel signals. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Port blocking
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1765
Figure 19-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board
AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted. l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface. The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1766
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface. A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection. A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.
Module Function
l Optical module Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board. Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. l l Optical power detection module Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface. Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1767
RMU9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MONO MONI OUT EXPI TOA ROA AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
RMU9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board. Table 19-9 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1768
Table 19-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board Interface AM1-AM8 Type LC Function Receive the single-wavelength signals or multichannel signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the main optical path. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for the signals output through the TOA interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the TOA port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB). Used as the cascade output interface. Used as the cascade input interface.
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
TOA ROA
LC LC
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1770
Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Description The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1771
Description Before wavelengths are added to the AM interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to Enabled. After configurations of wavelengths and services on the OTU are complete, set this parameter to Disabled. Before the OTU where wavelengths are added is replaced, set this parameter to Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and wavelengths and services are configured, set this parameter to Disabled.
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-13 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board. Table 19-13 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board Item Operating wavelength range Insertion loss EXPI-OUT AMxa-TOA ROA-OUT Reflectance Attenuation range Attenuation precision Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 8.5 12.5b 1.5 < -40 0-15 < 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB) VOA attenuation under channel blocking functionc Polarization dependence loss dB dB > 42 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1772
Item
NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
Unit
Value
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 7.7 8.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 8.6 9
TN11RMU901 TN11RMU902
19.3 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
Type
Table 19-14 lists the types of the ROAM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1773
Table 19-14 Type description of the ROAM board Board TN11ROAM Type 01 02 Description Processes the even wavelengths in C band. Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.
19.3.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-7. Figure 19-7 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system
OA ROAM OA ROAM OA OA
DMUX O O T T U U
40
40
DMUX O O O T T T U U U Client-side O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O T U
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1774
Table 19-15 Functions and features of the ROAM board Function and Feature Basic function Description Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network. Supports the DWDM specification. Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Not supported
WDM specification Power equilibrium Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1775
VOA
OUT
VOA
VOA
EXPI
IN
EXPO DM
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface. The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40 interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and then output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l PLC optical module Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board. The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station and adjusts the optical power of other signals. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
ROAM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
M01 196.00 M02 195.90 M03 195.80 M04 195.70 M05 195.60 M06 195.50 M07 195.40 M08 195.30 M09 195.20 M10 195.10
M11 195.00 M12 194.90 M13 194.80 M14 194.70 M15 194.60 M16 194.50 M17 194.40 M18 194.30 M19 194.20 M20 194.10
M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10
M31193.00 M32192.90 M33192.80 M34192.70 M35192.60 M36192.50 M37192.40 M38192.30 M39192.20 M40192.10
EXPO
OUT IN M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10
EXPI
DM
ROAM
M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1777
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 45 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-16 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board Interface M01-M40 DM OUT IN EXPO EXPI Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Add channels from the local station. Drops channels to the local station. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal. Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.
There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-17 and Table 19-18 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board. Table 19-17 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
Frequency (THz) 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Interface M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
Frequency (THz) 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 19-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1779
Interface M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
Frequency (THz) 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13
Interface M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
Frequency (THz) 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1780
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1781
Value -
Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Applies to the ROAM board only and is used to set the single wavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are multiplexed.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-22 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board. Table 19-22 Optical specifications of the ROAM board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Mxa-OUT IN-DM EXPI-OUT IN-EXPO Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Unit GHz dB dB dB dB nm dB dB Value 100 9b 7 14b 3 1529 - 1561 > 22 > 25
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1782
Unit dB dB
Module switch time Extinction ratio -0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength -0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through wavelength
NOTE a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
ms dB nm nm
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3.2 kg (7.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 66 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 72.6
TN11ROAM
19.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1783
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11WSD 9 TN12WSD 9 TN13WSD 9 Substitute Board TN12WSD 9 None None Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version. -
19.4.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1784
The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration. If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station. If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local station. For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-10. Figure 19-10 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 WSM9 OA O T U
OA
WSM9 8 MUX
WSD9 8 DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
Client-side
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1785
Table 19-23 Functions and features of the WSD9 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can output any wavelength combination to any interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel. Supported
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1786
Figure 19-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board
DM1 DM2 DM8
Splitter
IN MONI
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multichannel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO interface.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO interfaces. The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1787
Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1788
WSD9
STAT ACT PROG SRV STAT ACT PROG SRV
WSD9
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MONO MONI
MONO MONI EXPO IN DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
WSD9
WSD9
TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSD9 board. Table 19-24 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1789
Table 19-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board Interface DM1-DM8 Type LC Function Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
EXPO IN MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1790
Table 19-26 Valid slots for the TN12WSD9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
Table 19-27 Valid slots for the TN13WSD9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU12-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU1-IU15
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1791
Table 19-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO DM1-DM8 MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12
Default: Value of You can obtain the value range of this Max. Attenuation parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Rate (dB) Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1792
Value -
Description The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-30 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board Item Type Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit GHz
Item Type Insertion loss IN-DMxa IN-EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Operating wavelength range -1dB spectral width Port isolation Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of dropping wavelengths Attenuation precision of each of dropping wavelengths
Unit dB
dB nm nm dB dB dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB
1.5 1529-1561 > 0.32 > 25 > 25 > 30 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB)
1.5 1529-1561 > 0.16 > 25 > 25 > 30 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions of front panel: l l l TN11WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN12WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN13WSD9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)
Weight: l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.0 25.4 25.4 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 18.7 28.5 28.5
19.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
TN11WSM9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.5.5 Front Panel and 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9. l Specification: The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For details, see 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9. The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to versions. For details, see19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11WSM 9 TN12WSM 9 TN13WSM 9 Substitute Board TN12WSM 9 None None Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version. -
19.5.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the interfaces of WSM9 board. If the added signal is a multiplexed signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly received after being converted by the OTU. For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-13.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1796
OA
WSM9 8 MUX
WSD9 8 DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
Client-side
NOTE
Client-side
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1797
Function and Feature Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel. Supported by the TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9.
Splitter
EXPI MONI
Optical module Temperature detection Temperature and optical power deteciton module PIN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1798
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. l l If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface. If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs them through AM1-AM8 or EXPI. The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains a VOA module, which implements the optical power adjustment on a wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. l Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1799
WSM9
STAT ACT PROG SRV STAT ACT PROG SRV
WSM9
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MONO MONI
MONO MONI OUT EXPI AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
OUT EXPI AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
WSM9
WSM9
TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSM9 board. Table 19-32 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1800
Table 19-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board Interface AM1-AM8 OUT EXPI MONI Type LC LC LC LC Function Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1801
Table 19-34 Valid slots for the TN12WSM9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
Table 19-35 Valid slots for the TN13WSM9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU12-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU15
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9 or TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1802
Table 19-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel EXPI OUT AM1-AM8 MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1803
Value -
Description The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-38 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board Item Type Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss AMxa-OUT EXPI-OUT dB nm nm dB dB dB 1.5 1529-1561 > 0.32 > 25 > 25 > 30 1.5 1529-1561 > 0.16 > 25 > 25 > 30
1804
Unit GHz dB
Maximum channel insertion loss difference Operating wavelength range -1 dB spectral width Port isolation Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Type Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Directivity Maximum reflectance Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelengths Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelengths
Unit dB s dB dB dB dB dB
Value TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9 35 3 35 -40 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB) TN13WSM9 35 3 35 -40 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions of front panel: l l l TN11WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN12WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN13WSM9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.) TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.) TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Weight: l l l
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.0 25.4 25.4 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 18.7 28.5 28.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1805
19.6 WSMD2
WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
19.6.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1806
Client-side
MUX
O T U
Client-side
O T U
O T U
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1807
Function and Feature Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station. Not supported
Splitter
IN MONI
Splitter
OUT
Coupler
MONO
PIN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1808
Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions. Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the following optical interface: EXPI and AM. The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
WSMD2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
WSMD2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD2 board. Table 19-40 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1810
Table 19-40 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board Interface IN OUT DM Type LC LC LC Function Receives the main path signal. Transmits the main path signal. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Functions as a cascade output optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPO optical interfaces. Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI optical interfaces. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, monitors the optical performance of the transmitted main path signal online. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
AM
LC
EXPO
LC
EXPI
LC
MONI
LC
MONO
LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1811
Table 19-41 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 19-43. Table 19-43 WSMD2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the working band type of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1813
Value -
Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-44 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board. Table 19-44 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board Item Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Operating wavelength range -1 dB spectral width Insertion loss AM-OUT EXPI-OUT IN-DM IN-EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Port isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit GHz nm nm dB
dB dB dB s
1.5 > 25 35 3
1814
Item Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength
Unit dB dB dB dB dB
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3.2 kg (7.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 18.7
TN11WSMD2
19.7 WSMD4
WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1815
Type
Table 19-45 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board. Table 19-45 Version description of the WSMD4 board Board TN11WSMD4 Type 01 02 TN12WSMD4 01 Description Processes the even wavelengths in C band. Processes the odd wavelengths in C band. Processes the even wavelengths and odd wavelengths in C band.
Substitution Relationship
The TN12WSMD4 board and TN11WSMD4 board are not interchangeable.
19.7.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD4 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-19.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1816
West ODF
F I U
WSMD4
WSMD4
F I U
East ODF
South ODF
F I U
WSMD4
WSMD4
F I U
North ODF
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1817
Description Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station. Supported by the TN11WSMD401 and TN12WSMD4.
Splitter
IN MONI
Splitter
OUT
RDU optical WSS optical module module Optical module PIN Temperature detection PIN
MONO
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal flow
The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1818
planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to other directions. The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4. The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The RDU optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM1-DM4. Implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1819
WSMD4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MONO MONI OUT IN DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4
WSMD4
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD4 board. Table 19-47 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1820
Table 19-47 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD4 board Interface AM1-AM4 Type LC Function Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
DM1-DM4
LC
OUT IN MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 19-49 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board. Table 19-49 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD4 board, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
1822
Interface on the NM 5 to 7 8 to 10 11 12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1823
Value -
Description The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-52 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board Item Unit Value TN11WSMD4 Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Operating wavelength range -1dB spectral width
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
GHz nm nm
Item
Unit
Value TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4 8b 8 1.5 > 25 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (> 10 dB) 4
Insertion loss
AMxa-OUT IN-DMxa
dB
8b 8
Maximum channel insertion loss difference Port isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength Dimension
dB dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.) TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17 12 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 18.7 15
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1825
19.8 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
19.8.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD9 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-22.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1826
O T U
DCM
LIN IN SOUT
DMUX
DM1
DCM
DAS1
SIN LOUT OUT
WSMD9
EXPO EXPI AM1
WSMD9
IN SOUT DM1
DAS1
LIN
DCM
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
Client side
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions.
WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1827
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station. Supported
Splitter IN MONI
Splitter OUT
WSS optical module
MONO
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1828
Signal flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection. The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI. The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l l Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
WSMD9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L 1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N-A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4 DM5 AM5
WSMD9
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD9 board. Table 19-54 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1830
Table 19-54 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD9 board Interface AM1-AM8 Type LC Function Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal.
DM1-DM8
LC
OUT IN MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
EXPO EXPI
LC LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1831
Table 19-55 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD9 board, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 19-57 WSMD9 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity All, Odd, Even Default: All Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1833
Value -
Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 19-58 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board Item Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT IN-DMxa/EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Operating wavelength range -1dB spectral width Port isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength dB nm nm dB dB s dB dB dB dB Unit GHz dB Value 80 50 8b 12 1.5 1529-1561 > 0.16 > 25 35 3 -40 35 1 0 to 15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1834
Unit dB
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 6.8 lb. (3.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 25 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 30
TN11WSMD9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1835
20
About This Chapter
20.2 DAS1 DAS1: optical amplifier unit
20.1 CRPC CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
20.3 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board 20.4 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifier unit 20.5 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit 20.6 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1836
20.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
Type
Table 20-1 lists the types of the CRPC board. Table 20-1 Type description of the CRPC board Board CRPC Type 01 03 Description Adopts the backward pumping technology. Adopts the forward pumping technology.
20.1.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board adopts backward pumping technology. It supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the CRPC. For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1837
Figure 20-1 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump)
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Client side
M U X D M U X
OBU1
F I U F I U
CRPC
F I U F I U
OAU1
D M U X M U X
Client side
Client side
OAU1
CRPC
OBU1
Client side
Figure 20-2 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump)
Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU M U X D M U X OBU1 F I U F I U CRPC F I U F I U OAU1 D M U X M U X OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side
Client side
OAU1
CRPC
OBU1
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1838
LINE
Signal
SYS MON
Pump source
Pumping current and temperature control
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1839
Figure 20-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)
Signal
Pump light
LINE
Signal
SYS MON
Pump source
Pumping current and temperature control
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
l Backward pump The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC. l Forward pump The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1840
optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal. For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Module Function
l Raman pump optical module The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module. Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
SYS
LINE
CAUTION
CRPC
!
ALM
RUN
RS232-1
RS232-2
LAN
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel. l l Running status indicator (RUN) - green Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the CRPC board. Table 20-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board Interface LINE SYS MON Type LSH/APC LC LC Function Receives the line optical signal. Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). LAN RJ-45 For OptiX OSN 6800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 of the EFI2 board for the communications with the SCC. RS232-1/ RS232-2 RS232 communication interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1842
J3
2 10
CPU
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers. For OptiX OSN 6800:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1843
l l l l l l l l l l
Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode) Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode) Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4. Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode: When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU29. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU30. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31. The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode: When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.
For OptiX OSN 8800: l l l l l l l l l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4. Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations: When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1844
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
Value -
Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name.
1845
Value C, C + L, L Default: C
Description Sets the working mode of a board. According to the board working mode, you can specify the type of the band from which the optical signals are accessed. Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the working band type of a board.
C Default: C
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of an optical amplifier board. See D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is smaller than the minimum value, the board might work abnormally. See D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally. See D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1846
Optical Specifications
Table 20-8 Optical specifications of the CRPC board Item Un it nm nm dB m dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Value CRPC01 1400-1500 1529-1561 29 > 10 NA > 12 > 13 0 NA -1 -1.5 0.5 LSH/APC, LC/PC CRPC03 1400-1500 1529-1561 29.5 > 10 > 16 NA NA NA NA NA NA 0.5 LSH/APC, LC/PC
Pump wavelength range Operating wavelength range Maximum pump power Channel gain on G.652 fiber Channel gain on G.653 fiber Channel gain on LEAF fiber Channel gain on TWRS fiber Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber Effective noise figure on G.653 fiber Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber Effective noise figure on TWRS fiber Polarization dependence loss Output connector type
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) or 13.8 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W) CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.) CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Weight l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1847
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 110.0 70.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 121.0 77.0
CRPC01 CRPC03
20.2 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit
20.2.2 Application
The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end. For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1848
O T U
DCM
LIN IN SOUT
DMUX
DM1
DCM
DAS1
SIN LOUT OUT
WSMD9
EXPO EXPI AM1
WSMD9
IN SOUT DM1
DAS1
LIN
DCM
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
Client side
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions. It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station. The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1849
Table 20-9 Functions and features of the DAS1 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals. l Supports transparent transmission of one channel of FE electrical signals. Gain adjustment Online optical performance monitoring The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFAamplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without interrupting the services. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. 1511nm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1850
LIN TM
Demultiplexer
RVI
VOA
RPAIN
EDFA module
Splitter
SOUT
RX TX
FE signal processing module Supervisory signal processing module Service processing module
WSC
RM
Multiplexer
EDFA module
TBA IN
VOA
SIN
PIN
PIN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1851
Signal Flow
Signal flow in the main optical channel l In the transmit direction: The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the signals to the demultiplexer module. The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main optical channel signals to the VOA. The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT optical interface. l In the receive direction: The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the signals to the VOA. The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the multiplexer module. The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through the LOUT optical interface. Signal flow in the OSC l l l l l The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface, and sends the OSC signals to the optical receiver module through the RX optical interface. The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the service processing module. The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical signals. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module. The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.
Signal flow in the FE l In the transmit direction: The DAS1 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the DAS1 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal through its TX port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1852
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs. l In the receive direction: The DAS1 board receives an optical signal from the upstream board through its LIN port. The demultiplexer splits FE optical signal from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs FE signal through the TM optical interface and sends it to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation through the RX optical interface. Then, the DAS1 board drops it through its WSC port.
Module Function
l l l l Multiplexer Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals. Demultiplexer Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals. VOA Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements. EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Service processing module FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding. l l OSC optical module Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals. Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
DAS1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
WSC
TX RX TM RM MONT MONR LOUT LIN SOUT SIN TTDC TRDC RTDC RRDC
DAS1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1854
l l l l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces and one FE electrical interface on the front panel of the DAS1 board. Table 20-10 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board Interface WSC TX RX TM RM MONT MONR Type RJ45 LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals. Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MONT port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the LOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Plout (dBm) Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). The MONR port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psout (dBm) Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). Transmits the amplified signal (including the supervisory signal). Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (including the supervisory signal). Transmits the amplified signal(not including the supervisory signal). Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not including the supervisory signal). Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation.
LC LC LC LC LC LC
Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC interface on the DAS1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1855
Interface on the NM 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11
1856
Interface on the Panel SIN TPAINa TRDC TBAOUTa TTDC MONT a: Virtual port
Interface on the NM 12 13 15 16 17 18
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1857
Value -
Description The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Optical Interface Loopback
All, Odd, Even Default: All Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1858
Value Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: The specific value is related to the module.
Description The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
DEG Threshold
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1859
Value 2 to 10 Default: 7
Description Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12, Default: 1E-4
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the type of a fiber.
Fiber Type
G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber Default: G652 Fiber
Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km)) Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) Receive DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm)
-15 - 30 Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the transmit end.
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1860
Optical Specifications
Table 20-14 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board Item Specifica tions of OA Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 channels 80 channels Uni t nm dB dB m dB m dB m dB m dB m dB ms dB dB dB/ dB dB dB dB m dB dB dB m Value 1529-1561 20 -32 to 0 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19 8.5 < 10 20 to 31 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 1529-1561 26 -32 to -6 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25 5.5 < 10 1529-1561 31 -32 to -11 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30 5.5 < 10
Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1861
Item Polarization dependent loss Input VOA inherent insertion loss Input VOA dynamic attenuation range Input VOA adjustment accuracy Specifica tions of demultipl exer and multiplex er Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insert loss of optical supervisory channel Insert loss of C-band Polarization dependent loss Specifica tions of OSC optical module Operating wavelength range Signal rate Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload LIN-TM RMLOUT
Uni t dB dB dB dB nm dB dB
dB dB nm Mbi t/s dB m dB m dB m
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1862
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 22 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 28.6
TN11DAS1
20.3 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
20.3.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end. For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-10. Figure 20-10 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX OTU MUX HBA FIU OAU1 FIU HBA MUX OAU1 DMUX OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1863
Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1864
Figure 20-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board
Splitter
IN OUT
EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature
MON
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1865
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1866
HBA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON IN OUT
HBA
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA board. Table 20-16 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1867
Table 20-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LSH/APC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MON port is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (999/1) = 30 dB).
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle slot. l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1868
Second character Third to the fourth digits Fifth character Sixth and seventh digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1869
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1870
Value Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: 29
Description The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1871
Description The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 20-21 Optical specifications of the HBA board Item Type Channel allocation Nominal input power range Typical input power of a single wavelength Unit nm dBm dBm Value TN11HBA 1529 - 1561 -25 to -3 80-channel system: -22 40-channel system: -19 10-channel system: -13 Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Maximum total output power Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Polarization dependent loss dB dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB <8 < -45 < -45 26 < 10 291 2.5 < 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1872
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3.0 kg (6.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 47 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 75
HBA
20.4 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit
Type
Table 20-22 lists the types of the OAU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1873
Table 20-22 Type description of the OAU1 board Unit TN11OAU1 Type 01 02 03 05 TN12OAU1 00 01 02 03 05 TN13OAU1 01 03 05 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Gain Range 20 dB to 31 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB 16 dB to 25.5 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11OAU1 Substitute Board TN12OAU 1, TN13OAU 1 Substitution Rules The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1874
Substitution Rules The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at tpye 01,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1 functions as the TN12OAU1. -
TN13OAU1
None
20.4.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end. For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-13. Figure 20-13 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX MUX MUX OBU1 OAU1 DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side
OAU1
OBU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1875
Description The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based on the input optical power.
NOTE 20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1876
PAOUT
IN
BAIN
OUT
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1877
Figure 20-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1
TDC RDC MON
PAOUT
IN VO VI
BAIN
OUT
Driving current
PIN
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1878
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1879
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N-A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
OAU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1880
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N -A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
OAU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1881
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N -A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
OAU1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OAU1. There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1. Table 20-24 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1882
Table 20-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board Interface IN OUT TDC/RDC MON Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB). VIa VOa LC LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side. Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 20-26 shows the valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board. Table 20-26 Valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU4, IU11
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 20-27 shows the valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board. Table 20-27 Valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
Interface on the NM 1
1885
Interface on the Panel PAOUTa BAINa OUT RDC/TDC MON a: Virtual port
Interface on the NM 2 3 4 5 6
Table 20-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN PAOUTa BAINa OUT RDC/TDC MON VI VO a: Virtual port Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1886
Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Description This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Actual Band Configure Band C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1887
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: The specific value is related to the module.
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1888
Field Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Upper Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)
Description Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.
NOTE Only the TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.
NOTE Only the TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 20-32 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm Value 1529-1561 16 -20 to 2 -32 to -14 -32 to -17 1529-1561 22 -26 to -4 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 1529-1561 25.5 -32 to -7.5 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -26.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1889
Item Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VO Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy 40 channels 80 channels
Value -14 -17 8 < 10 16 to 25.5 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 18 0.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 18 0.5 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 18 0.5 -20 -23 5.5 < 10 -23.5 -26.5 5.5 < 10
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
Table 20-33 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Unit nm dB dBm Value 1529-1561 20 -32 to 0 1529-1561 26 -32 to -6 1529-1561 31 -32 to -11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1890
Item Input power range per channel Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF)a 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
Value -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19 8.5 (TN11OAU101, TN12OAU101) 7.5 (TN13OAU101) -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25 5.5 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30 5.5
Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb
< 10 20 to 31 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 1.5
< 10
< 10
2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5
2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1891
Table 20-34 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB dB Value 1529-1561 20 -32 to -3 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22 7.5 < 10 20 to 31 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 17 0.5 1.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 17 0.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 17 0.5 1529-1561 26 -32 to -9 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28 5.5 < 10 1529-1561 31 -32 to -14 -32 to -30 -32 -30 -32 5.5 < 10
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1892
Table 20-35 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU103/TN12OAU103/TN13OAU103 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB Value 1529-1561 24 -32 to -4 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23 7.5 (TN11OAU103, TN12OAU103) 6.5 (TN13OAU103) Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB < 10 24 to 36 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 < 10 < 10 1529-1561 29 -32 to -9 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28 5.5 1529-1561 36 -32 to -16 -32 -32 -32 -32 5.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1893
Item VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb
Unit dB
Value 1.5
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Table 20-36 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU105/TN12OAU105/TN13OAU105 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm Value 1529-1561 23 -32 to 0 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19 < 8.5 < 10 23 to 34 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 2 2 < -40 <-40 < -30 1529-1561 30 -32 to -7 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 -23 -26 <6 < 10 1529-1561 34 -32 to -11 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30 <6 < 10
Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1894
Item Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb
Unit dB dB dBm dB dB
Value -27 -27 23 0.5 1.5 -27 -27 23 0.5 -27 -27 23 0.5
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN13OAU1: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.) TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 18.0 14.0 18.0 22.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 24.0 18.0 24.0 29.0
1895
Board
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 11.0 12.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 12.0 12.0 15.0
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 14.0 15.0 13.0 15.0 21.0 15.0 15.0 21.0
20.5 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit
Type
Table 20-37 lists the types of the TN11OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1896
Table 20-37 Type description of the TN11OBU1 board Unit TN11OBU1 Type 01 03 04 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Gain Range 201.5 dB 231.5 dB 171.5 dB
Table 20-38lists the types of the TN12OBU1 board. Table 20-38 Type description of the TN12OBU1 board Unit TN12OBU1 Type 01 03 04 P1 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The TN12BOU1P1 board is an OA board intended for PID Gain Range 201.5 dB 231.5 dB 171.5 dB -
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11OBU1 Substitute Board TN12OBU 1 Substitution Rules The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the TN11OBU1. -
TN12OBU1
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1897
20.5.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals. For the position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-19. Figure 20-19 Position of the OBU1 board in the WDM system
Client side
OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX OBU1 OBU1 MUX OTU OTU OTU OTU
MUX
OBU1
OBU1
DMUX
Client side
Client side
Client side
For the position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-20. Figure 20-20 Position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system
Client side
Tributary board
NPO2 + ENQ2
OBU1P1 OBU1P1
NPO2 + ENQ2
Tributary board
Client side
NOTE
The TN12BOU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together with the TN55NPO2 board. In a PID-featured NE with separated optical and electrical subracks, the TN12OBU1P1 board is configured on the OptiX OSN 6800, and the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 8800.
Description l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB.
NOTE 20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1899
Figure 20-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board
Splitter IN EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1900
Figure 20-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board
Splitter IN EDFA optical module VO Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON
VOA
VI
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
NOTE
On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN12OBU1P1 board's VI port and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1901
Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1902
OBU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN
OBU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1903
OBU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
MON OUT IN VO VI
OBU1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU1 board. And there are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN121OBU1 board. Table 20-40 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1904
Table 20-40 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). VIa VOa LC LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side. Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
Table 20-42 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU1 board. Table 20-42 Valid slots for the TN12OBU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE
The TN12OBU1P1 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1906
Table 20-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3
Table 20-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON VI VO Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1907
Value -
Description The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU1/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU1/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Actual Band Configure Band C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Gain (dB) The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1908
Value Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: l OBU101: 20dB l OBU103: 23dB l OBU104: 17dB
Description The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1909
Description The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 20-47 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board Item Unit Value TN11OBU10 1/ TN12OBU10 1 Operating wavelength range Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels dB dB ms dBm nm dBm dBm 1529-1561 -32 to -4 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23 5.5 20 < 10 TN11OBU10 3/ TN12OBU10 3 1529-1561 -32 to -3 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22 6.0 23 < 10 TN11OBU10 4/ TN12OBU10 4 1529-1561 -32 to -1 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20 5.5 17 < 10
Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF) Nominal gain
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1910
Item
Unit
Value TN11OBU10 1/ TN12OBU10 1 TN11OBU10 3/ TN12OBU10 3 231.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 2.0 0.5 TN11OBU10 4/ TN12OBU10 4 171.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 16 2.0 0.5
Channel gain Gain flatness Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss VI-VOa Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuatio n range Adjustment accuracya
dB dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB dB dB
201.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 16 2.0 0.5 1.5
dB
20
dB
Table 20-48 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board Item Operating wavelength range Total input power range at the VI optical port Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Unit nm dBm dB dB dBm Value 1529 to 1561 -30 to 7 < -40 < -40 < -30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1911
Item Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss
Mechanical Specifications
l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 1b.) TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 11.0 13.0 12.0 10.0 11.0 10.0 10.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 13.0 15.0 14.0 11.0 12.1 12.0 11.0
20.6 OBU2
OBU2: optical booster unit
Type
The OBU2 board is available only in one type, that is, OBU205.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11OBU2 Substitute Board TN12OBU 2 Substitution Rules The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the TN11OBU2. -
TN12OBU2
None
20.6.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1913
For the position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-25. Figure 20-25 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX MUX OBU2 OBU2 DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side
OBU2
OBU2
MUX
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1914
Description l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON
EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature
OUT MON
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1915
Figure 20-27 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU2 board
Splitter IN EDFA optical module VO Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON
VOA
VI
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1916
Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1917
OBU2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OBU2
MON OUT IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1918
OBU2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OBU2
MON OUT IN VO VI
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU2 board. There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OBU2 board. Table 20-50 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1919
Table 20-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). VOa VIa LC LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface. Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Table 20-52 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1920
Table 20-52 Valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU4, IU11
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
Table 20-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON VI VO Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1922
Table 20-56 OBU2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Actual Band Configure Band C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1923
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: 23dB
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1924
Value All, Odd, Even Default: All -30 - 30 Default: The specific value is related to the board
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 20-57 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board Item Unit Value OBU205 Operating wavelength range Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 Channels 80 Channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 Channels 80 Channels dB dB ms dBm nm dBm dBm 1529-1561 -24 to 0 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19 7.0 23 < 10
Noise figure (NF) Nominal gain Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1925
Item
Unit
Value OBU205
Channel gain Gain flatness Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss VI-VOa Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuatio n range Adjustment accuracya
231.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 23 2.0 0.5 1.5
dB
20
dB
Mechanical Specifications
l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.) TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 24
1926
TN11OBU205
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
TN12OBU205
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1927
21
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1928
21.1 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
Substitution Relationship
Table 21-1 Substitution rules of the SXM board Original Board TNK2SXM Substitute Board TNK4SXM Substitution Rules The TNK4SXM can be created as TNK2SXM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM. None
TNK4SXM
None
21.1.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM cross-connects services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1929
For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 21-1 and Figure 21-2.
1
STM-16
client side
WDM side
WDM side
Description Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer ASON
Supported
Backplane(service cross-connection)
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, flex) service,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1931
and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1932
SXM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1933
Mechanical Specifications
TNK2SXM: l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.74 kg (8.2lb.) Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59b.)
TNK4SXM:
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 190 97 173 114 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 209 107 190 125 Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 5303.6 x (64 n) 1881.2 x (64 n) 3782.5 x (64 n) 3242.5 x (64 n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 5833.6 x (64 n) 2071.32 x (64 n) 4162.5 x (64 n) 3562.5 x (64 n)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1934
Board
NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM and XCT must be configured. n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.2 SXH
SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1935
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TNK2SXH Substitute Board TNK4SXH Substitution Rules The TNK4SXH can be created as TNK2SXH on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXH functions as the TNK2SXH. None
TNK4SXH
None
21.2.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXH cross-connects services. For the position of the SXH board in the system, see Figure 21-5 and Figure 21-6.
1
STM-16
client side
WDM side
WDM side
Table 21-4 Functions and features of the SXH board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Description Grooms services. Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming when the SXH board is jointly used with the XCT board. l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup. Switching mode Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching. Electrical-layer ASON Supported
Protection scheme
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1937
Figure 21-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board
VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex Backplane(service cross-connection)
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
SXH
SXH
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1939
Interfaces
The SXH board does not provide external interfaces.
Mechanical Specifications
TNK2SXH: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)
TNK4SXH: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 130 95 113 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 143 105 124 Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 4703.6 x (64 n) 1691.2 x (64 n) 3182.5 x (64n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 5173.6 x (64 n) 1861.32 x (64 n) 3502.5 x (64n)
1940
Board
TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT
NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH and XCT must be configured. n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.3 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board
21.3.2 Application
The XCH cross-connects services. For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-9. Figure 21-9 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM XCH 4 NS2 4 DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 Client side XCH TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1941
Switching mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1942
Figure 21-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex/ODU3/ODU3e/VC-4 Backplane(service cross-connection)
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Clock processing module The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter, clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module. Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source. Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1943
XCH
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1944
l l l l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.9 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H) Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 65 43 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 72 47.3 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 243 - 3.6 x (32 n) 101 - 1.12 x (32 - n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 267.3 - 3.6 x (32 - n) 111 - 1.12 x (32 - n)
TN52XCH01 TN52XCH02
NOTE n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1945
21.4 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board
21.4.2 Application
The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000. For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-12. Figure 21-12 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system
External clock External clock
TN16ATE
G.694.1 MUX DMUX 4 NQ2 4 Client side DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4
TN16ATE
TN16 4 XCH
TQX
WDM side
Client side
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-8. Table 21-8 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board Function and Feature Cross-connect function System control function Description Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals. l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH. l Supports IP over DCC. l Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. l Supports subrack cascading. The functions of the TN16XCH are different when it is housed in the master and slave subracks. The TN16XCH in the slave subrack processes overheads of the slave subrack. The TN16XCH in the master subrack processes overheads and alarms of the master and slave subracks, sends configurations to the slave subrack, and communicates with the U2000. Clock function l Basic function: Locks the reference clock source. Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. l Clock source selection function: Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. l Time synchronization function: Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE. Protection scheme Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1947
Description Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer ASON
Supported
Cross-connect module
Monitoring module
Communication module
Backplane
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1948
the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Clock procession module Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides the board and system with a synchronization clock source. Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the requirements of data setup time and holdoff time. l CPU and control module Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the board. l Overhead processing module Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes. In the TN16XCH board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board. l l Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000. Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. Transmits urgent data through the RS485. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1949
XCH
RESET
XCH
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1950
21.4.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the TN16XCH board. It switches the power supplied by the battery on the board on or off. The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 21-15 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16XCH board. Figure 21-15 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board
J1
CPU
Battery Jumper
321
CF Card
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1951
Figure 21-16 shows the power jumper. Figure 21-16 battery jumper
When battery is required When battery is not required
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of the front panel: 54.5 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H) Weight: 4.0 lb. (1.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 40 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 48 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 731.4 x (16n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 88.81.4 x (16 n)
TN16XCH
21.5 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1952
21.5.2 Application
The XCM is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCM implements the cross-connection of services. For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-17. Figure 21-17 Position of the XCM in the OCS system
1
STM-16
1
STM-16
Description Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer ASON
Supported
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Voltages for boards Power module Fuse
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) signals or VC-4/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1954
VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to complete service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1955
XCM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The XCM does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1956
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H) Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 125 67 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 138 73.7 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 339 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m 124 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 368 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m 136.4 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m
TN52XCM01 TN52XCM02
NOTE n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 1.
21.6 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board
Substitution Relationship
Table 21-12 Substitution rules of the XCS board Original Board TN11XCS TN12XCS Substitute Board TN12XCS None Substitution Rules Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
21.6.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCS board cross-connects services. For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-20. Figure 21-20 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system
OTU XCS OTU OTU XCS OTU 40 40 1 D40 OA OA M40 40 1 M40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU XCS OTU OTU XCS OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1958
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1959
Figure 21-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board
Backplane(service cross-connection)
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
XCS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
XCS
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.
Table 21-14 shows the valid slots for the XCS board. Table 21-14 Valid slots for the XCS board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 20.0 25.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 22.0 27.5
TN11XCS TN12XCS
21.7 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1962
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TNK2XCT Substitute Board TNK4XCT Substitution Rules The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT. None
TNK4XCT
None
21.7.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT cross-connects services. For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-23. Figure 21-23 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM XCT SXH / SXM 4 NS2 4 DMUX MUX 4 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 client side SXH XCT / SXM TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
client side
WDM side
WDM side
Table 21-15 Functions and features of the XCT board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Protection scheme Description Grooms services. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming when the XCT board is jointly used with the SXM/SXH board. l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup. Switching mode Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching. Electrical-layer ASON Supported
Cross-connect module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1964
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1965
XCT
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1966
Mechanical Specifications
TNK2XCT: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
TNK4XCT: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 2.9 kg (6.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 190 130 97 95 173 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 209 143 107 105 190 Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 5303.6 x (64 n) 4703.6 x (64 n) 1881.2 x (64 n) 1691.2 x (64 n) 3782.5 x (64 n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 5833.6 x (64 n) 5173.6 x (64 n) 2071.32 x (64 n) 1861.32 x (64 n) 4162.5 x (64 n)
1967
TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 114 113 112
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 125 124 123
Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 3242.5 x (64 n) 3182.5 x (64n) 3212.5 x (64n)
Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 3562.5 x (64 n) 3502.5 x (64n) 3532.5 x (64n)
NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM/ SXH and XCT must be configured. n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.8 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit
1968
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11SCC Substitute Board TN51SCC Substitution Rules l When the ASON function is not used, or only the opticallayer ASON function instead of the electrical-layer ASON function is used, the TN51SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. l When the electrical-layer ASON function is used, the TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC. TN52SCC TN16SCC TN51SCC TN52SCC TNK2SCC TN21SCC TN22SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Software upgrade is required for the replacement. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. 1969
Original Board
Substitute Board
Substitution Rules
NOTE If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two SCC boards must be the same.
21.8.2 Application
The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Provides clock source for the system communications. Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Supported Supported
Table 21-18 Functions and features of the TN16SCC board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC. l Supports IP over DCC. DCC communication Active/Standby backup Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1971
Description l Basic function: Locks the reference clock source. Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. l Clock source selection function: Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. l Time synchronization function: Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.
Subrack cascading
Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Table 21-19 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board Function and Feature Basic function DCC communication Active/standby backup Description Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a chassis. Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network management. Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes active automatically. Not supported: Active/standby backup configuration is not supported in AC-powered systems. Clock function Optical-layer ASON Provides clock source for the system communications. Supported by the TN22SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1972
Clock module
Required voltage Power supply module Fuse Monitorin g module Overhead processing module Communication
Module Function
l CPU and control module Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the board. l Overhead processing module Receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes. In the TN11SCC board, the 360 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN51SCC board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN52SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1973
In the TNK2SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board, the 40 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN16SCC board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. Sends the overhead signals to the service board. l l Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000. Clock module Provides the clock source for the system. TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC/TN21SCC/TN22SCC: Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station. Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board. TN16SCC: Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides the board and system with a synchronization clock source. Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the requirements of data setup time and holdoff time. l Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. Transmits urgent data through the RS485. l Power supply module TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W. TN21SCC/TN22SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800 converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module of the board. TN16SCC: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board, and provides the system with 10W backup power.
SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1975
RESET
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1976
SCC
SubRACK_ID
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1977
Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel. l l l l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green) System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green) Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green) Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
NOTE
The TNK2SCC/TN16SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB. The TN16SCC board does not have ALMC.
There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board. l l l l Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red
Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 21-20 lists the function of each button. Table 21-20 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board Button RESET ALM CUT LAMP TEST Function Used to reset the SCC. Used to clear an audible alarm. Used to test all of the indicators.
NOTE
The TN16SCC board does not have ALM CUT and LAMP TEST.
LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 21-21 shows its function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1978
Table 21-21 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board LED indicator SubRack_ID Function The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used. "0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-31. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
Interfaces
The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1979
Table 21-23 Valid slots for the TN16SCC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
Table 21-24 Valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU11, IU28 IU17, IU18
Table 21-25 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU74, IU85
Table 21-26 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU8, IU9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1980
21.8.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC board. It switches the power supplied by the battery on the board on or off. The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 21-32 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN11SCC board. Figure 21-32 Position of the battery jumper on the TN11SCC board
CPU
CF Card
Battery jumper
1 2 3 Battery jumper
Figure 21-33 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1981
J1
CPU
Battery jumper
321
CF Card
Figure 21-34 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board. Figure 21-34 Position of the battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board
CPU
Battery jumper
3 2 1 Battery jumper
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1982
J42
Battery Supply
U45
J1
CPU
J12
U42
Battery Jumper
321
CF Card
Figure 21-36 shows the power jumper on the TN52SCC board. Figure 21-36 Position of the battery jumper on the TN52SCC board
Battery Supply
321
Battery Jumper
CPU
J1
U33
U18
CF Card
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1983
Figure 21-37 shows the power jumper on the TNK2SCC board. Figure 21-37 Position of the battery jumper on the TNK2SCC board
Battery Jumper 3 2 1
J44
CPU
Figure 21-38 shows the power jumper. Figure 21-38 battery jumper
When battery is required When battery is not required
Battery Supply
CF
Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions of front panel: l l TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN16SCC: 54.5 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1984
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l l l l
TN21SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) TN22SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) TN51SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN52SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4 in. (H)
Weight: l l l l l l l TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.) TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.) TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN22SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.) TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 27.0 32.0 14.0 10.0 18.0 23.0 26.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 30.0 35.0 16.0 13.0 20.0 25.1 29.3
21.9 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
Type
The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-27 lists the types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-27 Type description of the AUX Board TN11AUX Type TN11AUX01 Description Provides three jumpers to set subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 7. Provides eight jumpers to set subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 31.
TN11AUX02
Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX board, which are used to set the subrack ID. For detail, see 21.9.7 Jumper. The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide backup power supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. For detail, see 21.9.7 Jumper. l Appearance: The appearance and dimensions of front panels of different hardware versions are different. The TN51/TN16 board does not provide external interfaces. The TN21 and TN22 boards are applied to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 21.9.5 Front Panel and 21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX. The board software status indicators of the TN21 and TN22 are different. For details, see 21.9.5 Front Panel. l Specification: The power consumption of the boards of different versions is different. For details, see 21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11AUX TN21AUX TN22AUX TN51AUX TN16AUX Substitute Board None TN22AUX None None None Substitution Rules If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version. -
21.9.2 Application
The TN51AUX board is a system control and communication unit that does not provide external interfaces. The TN16AUX, a system control and communication board, provides the intrasubrack management function but does not provide external interfaces. The TN11AUX board is a system control and communication unit that provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board are system control and communication units that provide backup power supply and various auxiliary and management interfaces.
are system control and communication units that provide various auxiliary and management interfaces. For detailed functions and features of the TN51AUX board, refer to Table 21-28. Table 21-28 Functions and features of the TN51AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Interface Description Implements communications between boards or subracks. Does not provide external interfaces.
For detailed functions and features of the TN16AUX board, refer to Table 21-29. Table 21-29 Functions and features of the TN16AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Description Implements communication between boards or subracks and intersburack management. Whether the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH affects the intersubrack management function of the TN16AUX. l If the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the TN16XCH. After processing overhead information, the TN16XCH sends the processed information to the TN16AUX. Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the other boards. l If the subrack is not configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX collects and processes overhead information about other boards and sends the processed information to the other boards. Interface Does not provide external interfaces.
For detailed functions and features of the TN11AUX board, refer to Table 21-30. Table 21-30 Functions and features of the TN11AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1988
Description Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications interfaces
Setting of subrack ID
For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 21-31. Table 21-31 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Interface Description Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various auxiliary and management interfaces. Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators. Power supply backup Alarm function Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply backup. Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1989
Figure 21-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/TN22AUX/ TN21AUX board
Figure 21-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board
CPU and control module
Monitoring module
Communication module
Backplane
Module Function
l CPU and control module The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the communication module and detects the power supply at the same time. TN11AUX: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN21/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN51AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1990
TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. l Communication module
NOTE
The TN51AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards. The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI board.
Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the SCC. Implements the data communication between boards. Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and the NM terminal. TN11AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication network interfaces. TN21/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. l Power supply module TN11AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board. TN21/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX OSN 3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. TN16AUX/TN51AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1991
Figure 21-42 shows the front panel of the TN16AUX board. Figure 21-42 Front panel of the TN16AUX board
AUX
STAT ACT PROG SRV ALMC
SubRACK-ID
RESET
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1992
STAT PROG
AUX
Figure 21-44 shows the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board. Figure 21-44 Front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board
STAT PROG
AUX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX board. There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1993
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
Interfaces
The TN51AUX board provides no external interfaces. The TN16AUX board provides no external interfaces. There are four interfaces on the front panel of the TN11AUX board. Table 21-32 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board Interface NM_ETH1 Type RJ-45 Function l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. ETH1 RJ-45 Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
ETH2
RJ-45
There are three interfaces on the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board. Table 21-33 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1994
Table 21-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21/TN22AUX board Interface NM_ETH1 Type RJ-45 Function l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. EXT DB64 Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading interface, commissioning network interface and management serial interface.
Buttons
Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 21-34. Table 21-34 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board Button RESET ALM CUT LAMP TEST Function Used to reset the TN16AUX board. Used to clear an audible alarm. Used to test all of the indicators.
LED
LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table 21-35.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1995
Table 21-35 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board LED indicator SubRack-ID Function The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode. "0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-45. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
Table 21-36 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Slot IU41 IU72, IU83
Table 21-37 shows the valid slots for the TN16AUX board. Table 21-37 Valid slots for the TN16AUX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Slot IU21, IU22
Table 21-38 shows the valid slots for the TN11AUX board. Table 21-38 Valid slots for the TN11AUX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Slot IU21
Table 21-39 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Table 21-39 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU10
21.9.7 Jumper
There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX01 board, and eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board. These jumpers are used to set the subrack ID. There are three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. There is no jumper inside the TN51AUX/TN16AUX// board.
Jumper of TN11AUX
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel. The TN11AUX01 board has three jumpers, the jumpers are numbered 3 to 1 from the side close to CPU, and the jumpers are numbered 1 to 3 from the most significant bit to the lest significant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1997
bit. The default value of the four jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks shows the jumpers on the board. Figure 21-46 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01 board
jumpers
3 CPU
The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02 board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-47 shows the jumpers on the board. Figure 21-47 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board
Jumpers
J4 J17
J3 J16
J2 J15
J18
J14
CPU
When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are not placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 1. When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the value 0. In Figure 21-48 the value represented by the three jumpers is 001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is "1". The value is "0" by default.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1998
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX01
1 jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX02
J16
J15
J4
J3
J2
NOTE
The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over the two pins.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX
The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 21-49 shows the jumpers. The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4 jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 21-50.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1999
CPU
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper cap
8 (J4)
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel: TN51AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) TN11AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN21AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2000
TN22AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) l Weight: TN51AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.5 26.5 12.0 11.7 15.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 17.5 29.2 17.0 13.0 17.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2001
22
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2002
22.1 HSC1
HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board
22.1.2 Application
As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-1. Figure 22-1 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system
OAU F I U F I U OAU HSC1 HSC1 F I U F I U OAU
SCC
HSC1
HSC1
SCC
SCC OAU
OAU
OAU
NE1
NE2
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-1, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2003
The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal. The HSC1 board supports a maximum of 53 dB span transmission. The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2004
Figure 22-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board
RM
O/E
E/O
Optical transmitting module
TM
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.
...
14
15
16
...
31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2005
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-2. Table 22-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performance events. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
18
F3 byte
19 21-23
Other
Module Function
l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal. Overhead processing module
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2006
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2007
HSC1
STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW
TM RM
HSC1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the HSC1 board. Table 22-3 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2008
Table 22-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board Interface TM RM EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2009
Description The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The number of the optical interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2010
Field Optical Interface Name Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Optical Interface Loopback
Value 240/1510.00/198.540
Description Sets and displays the optical interface name. This parameter is queriable only.
This parameter is queriable only. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Optical Specifications
Table 22-8 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board. Table 22-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board Item Signal rate Operating wavelength range Signal coding
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit Mbit/s nm -
Value 5 to 10 -48 -3
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 8.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 8.8
HSC1
22.2 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11SC1 Substitute Board TN12SC1 Substitution Rules The TN12SC1 can be created as TN11SC1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the TN11SC1. -
TN12SC1
None
22.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-5. Figure 22-5 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system
OA F I U F I U
OA SC2 SCC OA F I U F I U
OA
SCC
SC1
SC1
SCC
OA
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-5, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured as described above, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
Table 22-9 Functions and features of the SC1 board Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description
The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal. The SC1 supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission. The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added. The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2014
Figure 22-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board
RM
O/E
E/O
Optical transmitting module
TM
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.
...
14
15
16
...
31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2015
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-10. Table 22-10 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
18
F3 byte
19 21-23
Other
Module Function
l l l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2017
SC1
STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW
TM RM
SC1
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC1 board. Table 22-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2018
Table 22-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board Interface TM RM EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.
Table 22-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC1 board. Table 22-13 Valid slots for the TN12SC1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-14. Table 22-14 Characteristic code for the SC1 board Code First character Second to the tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The number of the optical interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2020
Table 22-16 SC1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Optical Interface Loopback Value 240/1510.00/198.540 Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. This parameter is queriable only.
This parameter is queriable only. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 22-17 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board. Table 22-17 Optical specifications of the SC1 board Item Signal ratea Operating wavelength range Signal coding Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Unit Mbit/s nm dBm dBm dBm Value 16.896 1500 to 1520 CMI -4 to 0 -46 -3 -48 4.096
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2021
Item
Unit
Value
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 11.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 14.9
SC1
22.3 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11SC2 Substitute Board TN12SC2 Substitution Rules The TN12SC2 can be created as TN11SC2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the TN11SC2. -
TN12SC2
None
22.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-9. Figure 22-9 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system
OA F I U F I U OA SC2 SCC OA F I U F I U OA
SCC
SC1
SC1
SCC
OA
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-9, you can manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
Table 22-18 Functions and features of the SC2 board Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description
The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission. The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added. The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2024
Figure 22-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board
RM1
O/E O/E Optical receiving module CMI decoding module Overhead processing module CMI encoding module
TM1 TM2
RM2
Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.
...
14
15
16
...
31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2025
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-19. Table 22-19 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
18
F3 byte
19 21-23
Other
Module Function
l l l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2027
SC2
STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW
SC2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC2 board. Table 22-20 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2028
Table 22-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board Interface TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2 EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the first/second supervisory signal. Receives the first/second supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to realize orderwire communication between NEs.
Table 22-22 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC2 board. Table 22-22 Valid slots for the TN12SC2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-23. Table 22-23 Characteristic code for the SC2 board Code First character Second to tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The numbers of optical interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Table 22-25 SC2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Optical Interface Loopback Value 240/1510.00/198.540 Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. This parameter is queriable only.
This parameter is queriable only. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 22-26 lists the optical specifications of the SC2. Table 22-26 Optical specifications of the SC2 board Item Signal ratea Operating wavelength range Signal coding Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Unit Mbit/s nm dBm dBm dBm Value 16.896 1500 to 1520 CMI -4 to 0 -46 -3 -48 4.096
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2031
Item
Unit
Value
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 12.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 14.9
SC2
22.4 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
22.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. In addition, the ST2 board can process the IEEE 1588v2 protocol for time synchronization. The ST2 board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2032
For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-13. Figure 22-13 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
ST2
OA
S F I U / F I U
S F I U / F I U
OA
ST2 scc
OA
S F I U / F I U
S F I U / F I U
OA
ST2
SCC
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east directions. In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network. The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
Performs IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization. Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE. The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this NE. Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE. Passes through west and east IEEE 1588v2 packets and service clock signals. Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where the clock board is located.
Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals. NE1: In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port. In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TM2 port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2033
NE3: In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port.
Operating wavelength
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WSC2
RM1 RM2
O/E O/E
Optical receiving module
E/O E/O
Optical transmitting module
TM1 TM2
1588 module
Service processing module
Control Memory
CPU
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required Voltage
Signal Flow
l The optical supervisory signal from the FIU/SFIU board is converted into an electrical signal by the O/E module. After the conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the service processing module. The service processing module extracts the supervisory information from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for processing. In addition, the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the clock signal to the STG board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board, and the clock signal and time information processed by the STG board are sent to the E/O module, where they are converted into an optical supervisory signal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2035
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. l In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board through its TM1 port. The ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board through its TM2 port. In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and an FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it through its WSC1 port. In addition, the ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it through its WSC2 port.
Module Function
l l l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals. Service processing module FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding. 1588 module Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
WSC1
WSC2
ST2
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces, one orderwire phone interface and two FE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board. Table 22-28 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2037
Table 22-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board Interface TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2 WSC1/WSC2a EOW Type LC LC RJ45 Function Transmits the first/second supervisory signal. Receives the first/second supervisory signal. Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE electrical signals. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.
a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface on the TN11ST2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2038
Table 22-30 Characteristic code for the ST2 board Code First character Second to tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The numbers of optical interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2039
Table 22-32 ST2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Loopback Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only support Non-Loopback and Outloop. When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. This parameter is queriable only.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type DEG Threshold
This parameter is queriable only. Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter. Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.
2 to 10 Default: 7
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12, Default: 1E-4
Optical Specifications
Table 22-33 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2040
Table 22-33 Optical specifications of the ST2 board Item Signal rate Operating wavelength range Unit Mbit/s nm Value 155.52 1504.5 to 1517.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload dBm dBm dBm 0.5 to 5 -41 -10
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 19.5
ST2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2041
23
About This Chapter
23.2 OLP OLP: optical line protection unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2042
23.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
Type
Board TN11DCP Type 01 02 TN12DCP 01 Description Supports the single-mode optical module. Supports the multi-mode optical module. Supports the single-mode optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2043
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11DCP Substitute Board TN12DCP Substitution Rules In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP can substitute for the TN11DCP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. -
TN12DCP
None
23.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1 protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-1, Figure 23-2 and Figure 23-3. Figure 23-1 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO11 TO21 MUX TI1 RO1 RI1 1
OTU
MUX TO21
RI12
DCP TO12
TI2
DCP
RO2 TI2
OTU RO2
OTU
MUX TO22
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2044
Figure 23-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU1 OTU2 2 1 OADM (West) 2 1 (West) 2 1 OADM (East) 1 2 OTU1 OTU2
2/1
1/2 2 x DCP
2/1 2 x DCP
1/2
FIU
FIU
2 1 OADM (East) 1 2
FIU
FIU
2 1 OADM (West) 1 2
2 x DCP
1/2
: Working signal
: Protection signal
: Optical signal
Figure 23-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TI1 RO1 TO21 RI21 TO11 RI11
MUX OTU (W) FIU DMUX MUX FIU DMUX FIU FIU
RI11 TO11
Client-side
RO1 TI1
DCP
TI2 RO2
TO12 RI12
DCP
RO2 TI2
TO22
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the DCP board can be used for client-side protection.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-1. Table 23-1 Functions and features of the DCP board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two signals to implement 1+1 protection. l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services. l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all stations. Protection scheme The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection: l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and singleended switching. l If the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not needed.
NOTE The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
The OWSP protection: l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dualended switching. l When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is needed. Optical-layer ASON Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2046
Figure 23-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board
TI1 TI2 RO1 TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22
RO2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals. The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11 and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2047
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts. Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2048
DCP
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2
DCP
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board. Table 23-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2049
Table 23-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board Interface TI1 Type LC Function Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection) Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP protection) TI2 LC Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection) RO1 LC Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU board. (OWSP protection) RO2 LC Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection) TO11 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection) TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2050
Interface TO21
Type LC
Function Transmits the second channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
TO22
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
RI11/RI12
LC
Receives the first channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the working route and protection route, respectively. (OWSP protection)
RI21/RI22
LC
Receives the second channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2051
Table 23-3 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 23-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP board. Table 23-4 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2053
Field Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Description The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. See D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
3-8 Default: 5
Optical Specifications
Table 23-8 Optical specifications of the DCP on the OptiX OSN 8800 Interface Item Unit Value TN11DCPa TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN12DCPb 4 -
Single-mode multimode
dB dB
4.5
Single-mode Multi-mode
dB dB
1.5 -
2054
Interface
Item
Unit
dBmdBm nm
-35 to 0 -
Multi-mode Switching threshold of optical power difference Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
nm dB dB
830 to 870 5 3 to 8
a: TN11DCP has no single-mode optical module. b: TN12DCP has no multi-mode optical module.
Table 23-9 Optical specifications of the DCP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 Interface Item Unit Value TN11DCP TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2 Insertion loss at the transmit end Single-mode Multi-mode dB dB 4 4.5 TN12DCPa 4 -
Single-mode Multi-mode
dB dB
1.5 2
1.5 -
dBm dBm nm
nm dB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2055
Interface
Item
Unit
dB
3 to 8
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 6.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 7.5
DCP
23.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2056
Type
Table 23-10 lists the type description of the TN11OLP board. Table 23-10 Type description of the TN11OLP board Board TN11OLP TN11OLP Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection. Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection.
Table 23-11 lists the type description of the TN12OLP board. Table 23-11 Type description of the TN12OLP board Board TN12OLP Type 01 Description Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection and intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high power application; supports optical line protection.
03
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11OLP Substitute Board TN12OLP Substitution Rules In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version.
2057
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Substitution Rules -
23.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-6, Figure 23-7, Figure 23-8 and Figure 23-9. Figure 23-6 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 1)
OTU OTU MUX
TI TO1 RI1 RI1 TO1 RO
DMUX
OTU OTU
OLP
TO2 RI2 TO2 RI2
OLP
TI
DMUX
MUX
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Figure 23-7 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 2)
OTU OTU MUX OA OA OLP OA OTU OTU DMUX OA FIU FIU FIU FIU OA OA MUX OTU OTU FIU FIU FIU FIU OA OA OLP DMUX OTU OTU
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2058
Figure 23-8 Position of the TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO1
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
RI1 TO1
RI1
FIU MUX
OTU
TI RO OLP
TO2 RI2
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
RI2
OLP
RO TI OTU
FIU MUX
TO2
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Figure 23-9 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO1 RI1 RO OLP TO2 OTU RI2 (P) TI
FIU MUX
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
FIU MUX
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the OLP board can be used for client-side protection.
Description The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-ended switching.
NOTE The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not required. Optical-layer ASON Supported
Optical switch
RO
Optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2060
The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part. Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2061
OLP
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OLP
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the OLP board. Table 23-13 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2062
Table 23-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board Interface TI Type LC Function Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical line protection) Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection) RO LC Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line protection) Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection) TO1/TO2 LC Transmits the working and the protection signals to the line side. (optical line protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) RI1/RI2 LC Receives the working or the protection signal from the line side. (optical line protection) Receives the signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2063
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Table 23-15 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP board. Table 23-15 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2064
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2065
Field Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Description The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. See D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
3 to 8 Default: 5
Optical Specifications
Table 23-19 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 8800 Interfa ce TI-TO1 TI-TO2 Item Unit Value TN11OLPa Insertio n loss at the transmit end Insertio n loss at the receive end single mode multimo de single mode multimo de dB dB dB dB 4.5 2 TN12OLP01b 4 TN12OLP03b 4 -
RI1-RO RI2-RO
1.5 -
1.5 -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2066
Interfa ce
Item
Unit
Value TN11OLPa TN12OLP01b -35 to 7 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 5 3 to 8 TN12OLP03b -30 to 23 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 5 3 to 8
dBm dBm nm nm dB dB
Switching threshold of optical power difference Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
a: TN11OLP has no single mode optical module. b: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
Table 23-20 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 Interfa ce TI-TO1 TI-TO2 Item Unit Value TN11OLP Insertio n loss at the transmit end Insertio n loss at the receive end single mode multimo de single mode multimo de single mode multimo de Operating wavelength range single mode dB dB dB dB dBm dBm nm 4 4.5 1.5 2 -35 to 7 -35 to 0 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 TN12OLP01a 4 TN12OLP03a 4 -
RI1-RO RI2-RO
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2067
Interfa ce
Item
Unit
multimo de Switching threshold of optical power difference Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
nm dB dB
830 to 870 5 3 to 8
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 6.0 4.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 6.6 4.5
TN11OLP TN12OLP
23.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2068
Type
Board SCS Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module. Supports multi-mode optical module.
23.3.2 Application
As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode). For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-12 and Figure 23-13. Figure 23-12 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TI1 RO1 TO11 RI11
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
FIU MUX
DMUX
RI11 TO11
Client-side
RO1 TI1
SCS
TI2 RO2
TO12 RI12
SCS
RO2 TI2
MUX FIU
DMUX
FIU MUX
TO22
Figure 23-13 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)
R1
S C S
L 4 G
F I U
F I U
L 4 G
S C S
R1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2069
Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2070
Figure 23-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board
Optical module
TI1 TI2 RO1 RO2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching. The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2071
Splitter Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. Coupler Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2072
SCS
STAT
TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2
SCS
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board. Table 23-22 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-22 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board Interface TI1/TI2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Type LC
Type LC LC LC LC LC
Function Transmits the first/second channel of client-side signals. Transmits the first channel of signals to the working and protection OTU. Transmits the second channel of signals to the working and the protection OTU. Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2074
Table 23-24 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2075
Table 23-26 SCS parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.
Optical Specifications
Table 23-27 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board. Table 23-27 Optical specifications of the SCS board Interface TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2 Item Splitting insertion loss Single-mode Multi-mode Unit dB dB Value 4 4.5
Single-mode Multi-mode
dB dB
4 4.5
Single-mode Multi-mode
nm nm
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2076
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
SCS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2077
24
About This Chapter
24.1 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 24.2 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 24.3 OPM8 OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board 24.4 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2078
24.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
Type
Table 24-1 lists the types of the MCA4 board. Table 24-1 Type description of the MCA4 board Board TN11MCA 4 Type 01 02 Description Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects optical power of 40 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
NOTE In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be detected.
24.1.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board supports spectral analysis for four channels. For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2079
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU OTU
DMUX
OAU
OAU
MUX
NOTE
The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path APE function Implements the APE function in cooperation with other boards. Detects the optical power of each channel. Optical-layer ASON Supported
Figure 24-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board
IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 1 4
optical switch Control signal Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l 1x4 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths. l Driving and control module Drives and controls spectrum. Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2081
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
MCA4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MCA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2082
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board. Table 24-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board Interface IN1-IN4 Type LC Function Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same time.
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2083
For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.
For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 24-7. Table 24-7 MCA4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Monitoring Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface. Sets the working band types of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Port Band Wavelength Monitor Status
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays port name and wavelength frequency. Displays the current band. Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. Displays the board name. The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA). See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status. See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information.
5 - 49995 Default: 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2085
Value Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps Default: Default
Description -
Optical Specifications
Table 24-8 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board. Table 24-8 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.) Detect accuracy for central wavelength Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dB dB Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR: 19 to 23) 0.1 4
nm pcs
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 8.0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
MCA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
24.2 MCA8
MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
Type
Table 24-9 lists the types of the MCA8 board. Table 24-9 Type description of the MCA8 board Board TN11MCA 8 Type 01 02 Description Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects optical power of 40 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
NOTE In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be detected.
24.2.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board supports spectral analysis for eight channels. For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2087
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU OTU
DMUX
OAU
OAU
MUX
NOTE
The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path The MCA8 reports the detected data to the SCC. The U2000 can display the detected information. APE function Implements the APE function when the board is used with other required boards. Detects the optical power of each channel. Optical-layer ASON Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2088
Spectrum analysis module optical switch Control signal Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal
1 8
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.
Module Function
l 1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Drives and controls spectrum. Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2090
MCA8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MCA8
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board. Table 24-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2091
Table 24-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board Interface IN1-IN8 Type LC Function Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same time.
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 24-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Port Band Wavelength Monitor Status
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays port name and wavelength frequency. Displays the current band. Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. Displays the board name. The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA). See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status. See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information. -
5 - 49995 Default: 10
WDM type
Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps Default: Default
Optical Specifications
Table 24-16 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board. Table 24-16 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.) Detect accuracy for central wavelength Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dBm dB Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR: 19 to 23) 0.1 8
nm pcs
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 4.2 lb. (1.9 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 12.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 13.0
MCA8
24.3 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board
24.3.2 Application
The OPM8 board monitors the optical power for eight channels. For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-7. Figure 24-7 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU
OPM8 OPM8
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU OTU
DMUX
OAU
OAU
MUX
NOTE
The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.
Description Supported
Optical power monitor module Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to, and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted, the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2097
Module Function
l 1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for optical. l Optical power monitor module Monitors channel optical power and wavelength information and reports the data to the driving and control module. l Driving and control module Drives and scans spectrum. Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2098
OPM8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OPM8
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board. Table 24-18 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2099
Table 24-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board Interface IN1-IN8 Type LC Function Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to "MON" interfaces of other boards at the same time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2100
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Port Band Wavelength Monitor Status
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays port name and wavelength frequency. Displays the current band. Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. Displays the board name. The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA). See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2101
Description parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status. See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 24-22 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board. Table 24-22 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detected accuracy for optical power Channel spacing Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dB GHz pcs Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 50/100 8
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 12 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 15
TN11OPM8
24.4 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2102
24.4.2 Application
The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system. For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-10. Figure 24-10 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system
OSC DMUX OA DMUX FIU ITL WMU OA MUX DMUX OA ITL MUX MUX OA WMU FIU
MUX
DMUX
O O O O T T T T U U U U
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2103
One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 24-10 shows the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2104
IN1 IN2
Optical wavelength and power detection module Driving signal Control Data signal
Memory
CPU
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the results to the SCC board and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l 1x2 optical switch Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for optical wavelength and power detection. l Optical wavelength and power detection module Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module, and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2105
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
WMU
STAT ACT PROG SRV
IN1 IN2
WMU
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2106
l l l l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board. Table 24-24 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board Interface IN1/IN2 Type LC Function Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical amplifier boards in two different transmit directions, respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.
Valid Slots
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17
Interface on the NM 1
2107
Interface on the NM 2
Optical Specifications
Table 24-27 Optical specifications of the WMU board Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing Per-channel input optical power range Detect accuracy for central wavelength Detect accuracy for single channel optical power Detect range for Central wavelength offset Unit nm GHz dBm GHz dB GHz Value 1529-1561 50/100 -36 to -16 <2.5 <2 -10 to 10
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2108
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 12 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 15
TN11WMU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2109
25
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2110
25.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11VA1 Substitute Board TN12VA1 Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version. -
TN12VA1
None
25.1.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment for one signal. For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2111
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2112
IN
OUT
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l l Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals. Driving and control module Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board. Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2113
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
VA1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
OUT IN
VA1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2114
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA1 board. Table 25-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 25-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives the optical signals to be adjusted. Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Valid Slots
Table 25-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board. Table 25-3 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 25-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2115
Table 25-4 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2116
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2117
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2118
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 6.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 7.2
VA1
25.2 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2119
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11VA4 Substitute Board TN12VA4 Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version. -
TN12VA4
None
25.2.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical signals. For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-4. Figure 25-4 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU VA4 VA4 OA MR2 OA VA4 VA4 MR2 OA VA4 OTU OTU VA4 VA4 OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2120
Description Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers. TN11VA1: When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time. TN12VA4: When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the VA4 keeps the original value or changes to its maximum value automatically. When at the maximum value, shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains at its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set the previous time.
Attenuation range
The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2121
Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l l Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals. Driving and control module Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board. Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2122
Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
VA4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
VA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2123
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA4 board. Table 25-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 25-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board Interface IN1-IN4 OUT1-OUT4 Type LC LC Function Receives the optical signals to be adjusted. Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Valid Slots
Table 25-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA4 board. Table 25-12 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 25-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA4 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2124
Table 25-13 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2125
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2126
Description Queries the actual working band of the board. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Table 25-18 Optical specifications of the TN12VA4 board Item IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit dB dB dB Value 1.5 20 1 (attenuation10 dB) 1.5 (attenuation15 dB) 1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 8.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 9.4
VA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2128
26
About This Chapter
26.1 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit 26.2 TDC TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2129
26.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
26.1.2 Application
As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical transmission system. For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-1. Figure 26-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system
DCU OTU OTU OTU OTU DCU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU MUX DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU
OBU
OAU
DMUX
OAU
OBU
MUX
MUX
DCU
OBU
OAU
DMUX
DMUX
OAU
OBU
DCU
MUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2130
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2131
Figure 26-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board
IN
Dispersion compensation EDFA optical module module Control Memory CPU Communication
OUT
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l The dispersion compensation module After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2132
DCU
OUT IN
DCU
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board. Table 26-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2133
Table 26-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in terms of dispersion. Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been compensated in terms of dispersion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2134
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2135
Optical Specifications
Table 26-7 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1) Item Unit Value DC U0 1 Typical dispersion compensation distance Maximum insertion loss Dispersion compensation slope Polarization mode dispersion Polarization-dependent loss Maximum input power a Operating wavelength range Dispersion compensating fiber type km dB ps dB dBm nm 20 3.3 DC U0 2 40 4.7 DC U0 3 60 6.4 DC U0 4 80 8 DC U0 5 100 9 DC U06 120 9.8 D CU 07 5 2.3 DCU0 8 10 2.8
90%-110% 0.4 0.1 20 0.5 0.1 20 0.6 0.1 20 0.7 0.1 20 0.8 0.1 20 0.8 0.1 20 0.3 0.1 20 0.3 0.1 20
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
Table 26-8 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2) Item Unit Value DCU 11 Typical dispersion compensation distance Maximum insertion loss Dispersion compensation slope Polarization mode dispersion Polarization-dependent loss
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DCU 12 40 5
DCU 13 60 5.9
DCU 14 80 6.9
km dB ps dB
20 4
90%-110% 0.4 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.9 0.3 1.0 0.3
2136
Item
Unit
Maximum input power a Operating wavelength range Dispersion compensating fiber type
dBm nm -
20
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
Mechanical Specifications
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3
TN11DCU
26.2 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
2137
Type
Table 26-9 lists the types of the TDC board. Table 26-9 Type description of the TDC board Board TN11TDC Type 01 02 Description Compensates for dispersion of DQPSK and ODB optical modules. Compensates for dispersion of DRZ optical modules.
26.2.2 Application
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel. If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM system, see Figure 26-4. Figure 26-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system
M40 M40 OA OA OA OA D40 D40 TDC
O T U
O L P
O L P
O T U
OA OA
OA OA
M40 M40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2138
Table 26-10 Functions and features of the TDC board Function and Feature Basic function Description The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals. Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion is adjustable. Information report Optical-layer ASON Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the board. Supported by TN11TDC01.
OUT
Driving signal
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2139
Signal Flow
The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the OUT.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module. The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module. l Driving and detection module Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2140
TDC
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
TDC
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board. Table 26-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2141
Table 26-11 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces Interface IN OUT Connector Type LC LC Description Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single signal that is to be equalized. Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2142
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.
NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2143
Description Sets Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only C band is supported.
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
NOTE Only C band is supported.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Specifications
Table 26-16 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board. Table 26-16 Optical specifications of the TDC board Parameter Optical channels Dispersion tuning range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit ps/nm
Value 80 400
2144
Parameter Dispersion tuning resolution Input power range Dispersion accuracy Output optical power
Value <15 -13 to 0 10 The output optical power should be close to the input power, with an error range of 1.5 dB.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 13 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 15
TN11TDC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2145
27 Clock Unit
27
About This Chapter
27.1 STG STG: Centralized Clock Board
Clock Unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2146
27 Clock Unit
27.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board
Substitution Relationship
The STG boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
27.1.2 Application
The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, see Figure 27-1. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, see Figure 27-2. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 6800, see Figure 27-3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2147
27 Clock Unit
STI
external clock
STI
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM 4 Client side NS2 WDM side DMUX MUX NS2 WDM side NS2 G.694.1 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 TOM 4 Client side 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
STI
external clock
STI
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM 4 Client side NS2 WDM side DMUX MUX NS2 WDM side NS2 G.694.1 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 TOM 4 Client side 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2148
27 Clock Unit
When the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, the external clock is input on the STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2149
27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board
Time signals/ Clock signals Clock signals/Frame signals
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
Module Function
l Clock processing module The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter, clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module. Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source. Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2150
27 Clock Unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2151
27 Clock Unit
STG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TOD
CLK
IN
OUT
STG
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
Table 27-2 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2152
27 Clock Unit
Table 27-2 Interface description of the STG board Interface IN OUT CLK TOD Connector SMB SMB RJ-45 RJ-45 Function Clock signal input interface Clock signal output interface Clock signal input and output interface Time signal input and output interface
NOTE The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals. If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output clock signals.
Table 27-4 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG board. Table 27-4 Valid slots for the TN52STG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU42, IU44
Table 27-5 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board. Table 27-5 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU75, IU86
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2153
27 Clock Unit
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of the front panel: TNK2STG: 50.3mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN52STG: 28.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN11STG: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN11STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 14.0 13.0 8.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 16.0 14.1 9.57
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2154
28
About This Chapter
28.1 BPA BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
28.2 EAS2 EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board 28.3 EGSH EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 28.4 SF64 SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.5 SF64A SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.6 SFD64 SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.7 SL64 SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 28.8 SLD64 SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board 28.9 SLH41 SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board 28.10 SLO16 SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board 28.11 SLQ16 SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board 28.12 SLQ64 SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2155
28.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
28.1.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 28-1 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system. Figure 28-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system
Tx
BA
Rx
Tx
PA
Rx
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2156
Description Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical signals by 2233 dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver increases to 37 dBm. l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned on.
EDFA
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.
Optical part
Drive module
SCC
Communication module
Control module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2157
Optical Part
The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2158
BPA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
BPA
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 28-2 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2159
Table 28-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board Interface BIN BOUT PIN POUT Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives one channel of optical signals for amplification. Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals. Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification. Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical signals.
Optical Specifications
Table 28-5 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board. Table 28-5 Optical specifications of the BPA board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Line code pattern Input wavelength (nm) Value 2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2 NRZ BA: 1530 to 1565 PA: 1550.12 Input optical power (dBm) BA: -6 to +3 PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate of 10 Gbit/s) PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate less than 10 Gbit/s) Output optical power (dBm) Sensitivity (dBm) Noise figure (dB) 13 to 15 (BA) PA: -37 BA: < 6.5 PA: < 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2161
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high input optical power to the optical module.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows: l l Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 11 W
28.2 EAS2
EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board
28.2.2 Application
The EAS2 is used to access Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services. Figure 28-4 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. The Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2162
NMS
NE1
NE4
PORT 2 User B2 Service flow Line board Data board Cross-connect and timing board User A1 VLAN 100 PORT 1 VLAN 100 User B1
The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2163
Funct ion and Featu re Functi ons when being used with an interfa ce board Interfa ce charac teristic s
Description
Query/ Supported Setting of port status Query of interface types RMON measure ment Supported
Supported
Setting of Not supported optical power threshold s Hot optical module swapping Servic e catego ries EPL service Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2164
Description
EVPL service
l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN. l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN. l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. l Supports a maximum of 4096 links.
EPLAN service
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 1. l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address
EVPLA N service Servic e specifi cation s Formats of Ethernet data frames Maximu m frame length MTU
l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation. l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. IEEE 802.3 Ethernet II IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported Supported Supported
l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. 128xVC-4
Supports VC-4-Xv (X 64), and VC-4-4c/16c/64c contiguous concatenation services. HDLC LAPS GFP-F Not supported Not supported Supported
MPLS technolo gy
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2165
Description
Supports a total number of 4095 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p. 20 Gbit/s
Number of VCTRUNKs: 34 Configuration principles are as follows: l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4 paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4 paths. Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports MSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1s. Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation. Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
TPS BPS PPS DLAG LCAS LPT STP/ RSTP MSTP LAG
ERPS
Supported
Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2166
Description
ETHOAM
l Supports multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB), link trace (LT), and associated alarms, and complies with IEEE 802.1ag. l Supports OAM automatic discovery and loopback at the remote end, and complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes. Not supported Supported PHY layer at Ethernet ports MAC layer at Ethernet ports VC-4 level VC-3 level VC-12 level Inloops Inloops Not supported Not supported Not supported
Ethernet performa nce monitori ng (RMON) Alarms and performa nce events QoS
l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level. l Supports the query of the rate of a port. l Supports the detection of alarms indicating that the traffic at a port exceeds the threshold.
Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports traffic classification that is based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS label, or MPLS label+EXP. l Supports CAR with a granularity of 64 kbit/s. l Supports eight levels of priority queues at each port. l Supports port- and queue-based traffic shaping.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2167
Description
l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol. l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters. l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Supported
10GE
Cross-connect unit
Laser shutdown
LOS Communication Clock reference and frame delimitation SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
Power module
Fuse
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2168
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals when the board is working.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2169
EAS2
STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2
EAS2
Indicators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators: l l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow) Connection status indicator (LINK) one color (green) Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) one color (orange)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 28-7 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EAS2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2170
Table 28-7 Interfaces of the EAS2 Interface IN1IN2 OUT1OUT2 Type of Interface LC LC Usage Receives 10 GE signals. Transmits 10 GE signals.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
LCAS LPT
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2171
l l l l l l
Each parameter of the EAS2 on each tab page is described as follows. l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-10. Table 28-10 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Value Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board.
2172
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Name
Description Specifies the name of a PORT port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese. The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled. See D.8 Enabled/Disabled to obtain the details.
Enabled/Disabled
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode)
Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port on a board. This parameter determines the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of the Ethernet port. When setting this parameter, you must ensure the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available. Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port. Displays the actual working state of a port. The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.29 MAC Loopback to obtain the details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2173
Description The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.44 PHY Loopback to obtain the details.
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 28-11. Table 28-11 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field Port Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default: Disable Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode. See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details.
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-12. Table 28-12 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port) Field Port Value Description Displays the type of a VCTRUNK port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2174
Field TAG
Description Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI. The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. See D.11 Entry Detection to obtain the details.
Default VLAN ID
VLAN Priority
Entry Detection
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-13. Table 28-13 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port) Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the name of a VCTRUNK port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese. Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI.
Name
TAG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2175
Value -
Description The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. See D.11 Entry Detection to obtain the details.
VLAN Priority
Entry Detection
The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-14. Table 28-14 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.
Port Attributes
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-15. Table 28-15 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Broadcast Packet Suppression Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. The Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2176
Description The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded. See D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to obtain the details.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 28-16. Table 28-16 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field Port Mapping Protocol Value GFP Default: GFP Scramble Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Set Inverse Value for CRC Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port. Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. You can set this parameter only when the mapping protocol is HDLC or LAPS. Check Field Length FCS32, No Default: FCS32 FCS Calculated Bit Sequence Big endian, Little endian Default: Big endian Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2177
Description Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 28-17. Table 28-17 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field Port Value VCTRUNKn Description Indicates the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the number of the VCTRUNK port. The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers. The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end. The Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this parameter to postpone the LCAS switching.
Enabling LCAS
LCAS Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2178
Description The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact caused by the alarm jitter on the link status. The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member. When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members - Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction.
TSD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2179
Description Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. If the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is less than the specified value, an alarm is reported.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 28-18. Table 28-18 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port) Field VCTRUNCK Port Level Service Direction Bound Path Value Description Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port. Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path. Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service. Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number. Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports. Displays the channels in use. Displays whether the path is active.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2180
Table 28-19 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2 Parameter Transmission rate Processing capability Type of optical interface Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Transmission distance (km) Maximum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum mean launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Connector type Value 10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s 2x10GE signals 10GBASE-LR/LW Single-mode LC 1290 to 1330 10 0.5 -8.2 -12.6 3.5 LC
Port 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2181
Table 28-20 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 28-21 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 28-22 lists the latency specifications of the EAS2.
NOTE
The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment are used. The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port. The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer. The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer. In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and reverse tests values, respectively.
l l l l
Table 28-20 Throughput specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Passed Rate (%) 100.00000 98.00000 98.00000 98.00000 97.00000 97.00000 97.00000 Tx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8278145 4432624 2302025 1161710 932835 788146 Rx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8278145 4432624 2286453 1156436 927296 783050 Total (%) 100.00000 100.00000 100.00000 99.32000 99.55000 99.41000 99.35000
Table 28-21 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Rate Tested (%) 100.00000 100.00000 99.00000 98.00000 97.00000 97.00000 97.00000 Tx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8445945 4480286 2302025 1161710 932835 788146 Rx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8445945 4470526 2286453 1156469 927323 783073 Total (%) 0.00 0.00 0.21 0.67 0.45 0.59 0.64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2182
Table 28-22 Latency specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Rate Tested (%) 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 Tx Frames (pks/sec) 14204544 8116883 4340277 2256317 1148897 923190 780274 Rx Frames (pks/sec) 14204544 8116883 4340277 2256317 1148897 923190 780274 Min Latency (us) 24.4 24.6 25 25.9 27.7 28.6 29.4 Ave Latency (us) 25.681 25.944 26.322 27.176 28.949 29.802 30.562 Max Latency (us) 27.9 28.1 28.5 29.3 31.2 32 32.8
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows: l l Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 254.1 (H) Weight (kg): 1.1
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the EAS2 at room temperature (25C) is 78 W. The maximum power consumption of the EAS2 at high temperature (55C) is 91 W.
28.3 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board
28.3.2 Application
The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access, bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching. Figure 28-8 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data; isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN; configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide solution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2183
U2000
NE1 MSP ring NE3 VLAN 100 PORT 2 User B2 Service flow OCS line board OCS data board Cross-connect and timing board User A1 VLAN 100 PORT 1 VLAN 100 User B1
NE4
PORT 2
The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching, and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is connected to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the backplane. In this manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed. Accesses 16 channels of Ethernet signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2184
Description
l Supports the 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-SX optical interface. l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000BASE-T electrical interface at the same time. l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.
l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats. l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes and supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.
l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24. l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or 24 VC-3s. Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X8), and VC-3-Xv (X24) granularities. Supports the GFP-F encapsulation. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN. l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint (P2MP) convergence. l Supports the L2 forwarding function. l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 32k. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address. l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. Only one VB is supported. The maximum number of logical ports for one VB is 40. l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB +VLAN or VB+LP. l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are referred to as EPLAN services.
Mapping granularities Encapsulatio n format EPL services EVPL services EPLAN services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2185
Description
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Supports 4095 VLANs. l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridge or IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridge.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is limited. Supports the MPLS. Supports a maximum of 4000 VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the LAG function. Supports the DLAG protection.
MPLS VLAN STP Link aggregation Distributed link aggregation Multicast function ETH-OAM function CAR
Supports the multicast function. Supports continuity check (CC) for the multicast service, loopback (LB) test for the unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD), autonegotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
QoS flow classificatio n LCAS function LPT function Flow control function Highprecision time Test frames
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow. Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 V2 clock at ports 2 and 4. The synchronous Ethernet realizes frequency synchronization, and the IEEE 1588 V2 clock realizes time synchronization. Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2186
Description
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer: l STP/RSTP l LCAS l LPT l LAG l DLAG l ERPS
NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Ethernet performance monitoring Alarms and performance events Protocol or standard compliance
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Protocols or standards (non-performance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.1s STP RSTP MSTP All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2187
Description
IEEE 802.3z interface IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.1s STP RSTP MSTP
SDH ASON
Supported
Communication Reference clock and frame header +3.3V Clock module 66 25 125 155 MHz MHz MHz MHz Power module Power Fuse module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2188
Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.
Interface Module
In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the electrical signals to the L2 service processing module. In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service processing module into optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2189
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2190
EGSH
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RX 1 TX 15 2 TX 16 RX
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2191
Table 28-24 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board Interface RX1RX16 TX1TX16 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
NOTE
When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-11 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
58.25 50.75
50.5
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-SX optical interfaces. b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-LX optical interfaces. The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the 1000BASE-LX optical interface.
Interface on the NM 1 2 3
2193
Interface on the Panel TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 TX9/RX9 TX10/RX10 TX11/RX11 TX12/RX12 TX13/RX13 TX14/RX14 TX15/RX15 TX16/RX16
Interface on the NM 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2194
Figure 28-12 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group
FAN A S U T X G A U X S T G
EFI2
EF I1
PIU
PIU
PIU
PIU
STI
ATE
S C C X C H / X C M
IU7 IU8
Fiber routing
X C H / X C M
Fiber routing
IU9 IU10 IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19
E G S H (A)
E G S H (B)
S C C
E G S H (A)
E G S H (B)
In Table 28-27, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards. Table 28-27 Slot assignment for the EGSH board Board EGSH (protection board) EGSH (working board) Protection Group 1 Slot 5 Slot 3 Protection Group 2 Slot 17 Slot 14
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2195
Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows. l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-29. Table 28-29 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Name Value For example, PORT-1 Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Specifies the name of a port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2196
Field Enabled/Disabled
Description The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled. See D.8 Enabled/Disabled to obtain the details.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode) 1518-65535 Default: 1522
Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board. The Working Mode parameter indicates the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of a port. Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port. Displays the actual working state of a port. The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.29 MAC Loopback to obtain the details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2197
Description The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.44 PHY Loopback to obtain the details. Displays the type of the physical port. Displays the type of the logical port.
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 28-30. Table 28-30 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field Port Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default: Disable Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode. See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control Default: Disabled Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-31.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2198
Table 28-31 Parameters on the TAG tab page Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI. Specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. Specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. See D.11 Entry Detection to obtain the details. l The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-32. Table 28-32 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.
TAG
Default VLAN ID
Port Attributes
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-33.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2199
Table 28-33 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Broadcast Packet Suppression Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold Value Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% Default: 30% Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets. The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded. Specifies the function of reporting the self-loop alarms. The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.
Loop Detection
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 28-34. Table 28-34 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field Port Mapping Protocol Value GFP Default: GFP Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2200
Field Scramble
Value Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1]
Description Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol. Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.
Yes, No Default: No
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 28-35. Table 28-35 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field Port Enabling LCAS Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers. See D.10 Enabling LCAS to obtain the details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2201
Description The LCAS mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end. See D.23 LCAS Mode to obtain the details.
Hold-off Time(ms)
Specifies the duration of the HO (Hold Off) Procedure timer of the LCAS protocol. When the LCAS and other network-level protection schemes (such as the MSP and SNCP) coexist, a proper value of the hold-off time can be set to delay the LCAS switching. Specifies the duration of the Wait To Restore (WTR) Procedure timer of the LCAS protocol. A proper value of the WTR time can be set to prevent an alarm jitter from affecting the link status. The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled, and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member. See D.54 TSD to obtain the details.
WTR Time(s)
TSD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2202
Description When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members-Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction. See D.35 Min. MembersTransmit Direction to obtain the details.
Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. When the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is smaller than this value, an alarm is reported .
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 28-36. Table 28-36 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port) Field VCTRUNCK Port Level Service Direction Bound Path Value Description Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port. Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path. Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service. Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number. Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports. Displays the channels in use.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2203
Value -
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-37. Table 28-37 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port) Field Port Loop Detection Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. The Loop Detection parameter specifies the function of reporting the self-loop alarms after one of the following loopback cases is detected. See D.25 Loop Detection to obtain the details. Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again. See D.26 Loop Port Shutdown to obtain the details.
Optical Specifications
Table 28-38 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2204
Table 28-38 Optical specifications of the EGSH board Item Type of optical interface Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 1000BASE-LX (10 km) Single-mode LC 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) Multi-mode LC 770 to 860
9 to 3 20 3 9
9.5 to 3.5 18 0 9
Electrical Specifications
Table 28-39 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board. Table 28-39 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board Type of Interface 1000BASE-T, RJ-45 Code Pattern 4D-PAM5
NOTE
Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows: l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2205
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 89.3 W
28.4 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.4.2 Application
The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-13 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-13 Networking and application of the SF64 board
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2206
Table 28-40 Functions and features of the SF64 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specificat ions of the optical interface Description
l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function. l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports the XFP wavelength-tunable optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services. l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specificat ions of the REG Protectio n schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2207
Description
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.774.7
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2208
Figure 28-14 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board
Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s SPI 10.71 Gbit/s E/O O/E converting module 10.71 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX IIC LOS Laser shutdown 669 MHz PLL DEMU X 4x2.67G bit/s 4x2.5G bit/s 622 MHz PLL Reference clock Clock unit
K1 and K2 insertion/extraction
O/E
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SF64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 28-41 lists the type and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2211
Table 28-41 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Table 28-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2213
Value /
Description The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-45 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board. Table 28-45 Optical specifications of the SF64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application codea Value 10.709 Gbit/s Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2214
Item
Value OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2 OBU101 (-31 dBm to -34 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU08 (10) + MR2 OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 OBU101 (-37 dBm to -40 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2
Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm)c Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Single-mode LC 1550.12
1 to +2
-19
10.5
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101 is -28 dBm to -31 dBm. b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used. c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.
Table 28-46 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board. Table 28-46 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board Item Type of optical module Line code format Value 1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable NRZ - 80 channels tunable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2215
Item
Value
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Central wavelength (THz) Central wavelength deviation (GHz) Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) 3
-1
1600
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum reflectance (dB) APD 1260 to 1600
-24
-7 -27
Table 28-47 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2216
Table 28-47 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 10.709 Gbit/s 40 -1 to 2 -19 0 800 10
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 27.3 W
28.5 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.5.2 Application
The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2217
Figure 28-16 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-16 Networking and application of the SF64A board
NE3
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2218
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication.
Alarms and performa nce events Specificat ions of the REG Protectio n schemes
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2219
Description
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2220
Figure 28-17 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board
622MHz 622MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s DEMUX 16x669 Mbit/s 16x622 Mbit/s 622MHz PLL Reference clock Backplane Clock unit
O/E
S P I
E/O
10.71 Gbit/s
SDH overhead processing module 669MHzPLL Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Power module Frame header Communication Fuse
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SF64A
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT
IN
SF64A
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 28-49 lists the type and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2223
Table 28-49 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2224
Table 28-51 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2225
Description Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-53 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board. Table 28-53 Optical specifications of the SF64A board Item Nominal bit rate Application codea Value 10.709 Gbit/s Ue-64.2c OBU101 (-29 dBm to -26 dBm) + OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 Single-mode LC 1550.12 Ue-64.2d OBU103 (-28 dBm to -25 dBm) + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2 Ue-64.2e OBU101 (-34.6 dBm to -32 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 OBU101 (-37.9 dBm to -34.9 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2226
Item Launched optical power range (dBm)c Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1 to +2
-19
10.5
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "OBU101 (-29 dBm to -26 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101 is -29 dBm to -26 dBm. b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used. c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.
Table 28-54 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board. Table 28-54 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 10.709 Gbit/s 40 3 to 2 19 0 800 13.5
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 35.7 W
28.6 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.6.2 Application
The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-19 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-19 Networking and application of the SFD64 board
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2228
l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function. l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports the XFP wavelength-tunable optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services. l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2229
Description
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.774.7
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2230
Description
Supported
K1 and K2 insertion/extraction
O/E
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2231
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
Manages and configures the other modules of the board. Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface. Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units. Controls the laser. Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2232
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SFD64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
SFD64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2233
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 28-56 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Table 28-56 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board Interface RX1RX2 TX1TX2 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2234
Table 28-57 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface Board SSN4SFD6401M01 SSN4SFD6401 Characteristic Code 01M01 01 Type of Optical Interface Fixed-wavelength optical interface Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Sets overhead transfer mode of the optical interface. Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-60 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board. Table 28-60 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board Item Nominal bit rate Value 10.709Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2236
Value Ue-64.2c OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2 Ue-64.2d OBU101 (-31 dBm to -34 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU08 (10) + MR2 Ue-64.2e OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 OBU101 (-37 dBm to -40 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2
Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm)c Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Single-mode LC 1550.12
1 to +2
-19
10.5
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101 is -28 dBm to -31 dBm. b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used. c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.
Table 28-61 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board. Table 28-61 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board Item Type of optical module Value 1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2237
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Central wavelength (THz) Central wavelength deviation (GHz) Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) 3
-1
1600
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum reflectance (dB) APD 1260 to 1600
-24
-7 -27
Table 28-62 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2238
Table 28-62 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 10.709 Gbit/s 40 -1 to 2 -19 0 800 10
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 38.2 W
28.7 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
28.7.2 Application
The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-22 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2239
NE3
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals. l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply with ITU-T G.959. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.
l Supports the XFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2240
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performan ce events Specificati ons of the REG Protection schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Maintenan ce features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2241
Description
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2242
Figure 28-23 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board
Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL K1 and K2 insertion/extraction Reference clock Clock unit
9.953 Gbit/s
O/E SPI
9.953 Gbit/s
DEMU X
16x622 Mbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
16x622 Mbit/s
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SL64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 28-64 lists the type and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2245
Table 28-64 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2247
Value /
Description The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-68 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board. Table 28-68 Optical specifications of the SL64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 S-64.2b P1L1-2D2 Le-64.2 V-64.2b (OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2)a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2248
Item Transmissio n distance (km) Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm)
Value 0 to 2 2 to 40 40 to 80 35 to 60 80 to 120
Single-mode LC 1550.12
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to +4
+2 to +4
-1 to 2 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) 16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)
-11
-14
-24
-21
-17 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) -26 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)
-1
-1
-7
-8
-1
8.2
8.2
10.5
a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.
Table 28-69 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board. Table 28-69 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.6 kg (1.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 15.2 W
28.8 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
28.8.2 Application
The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-25 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2250
NE3
Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
l Supports the XFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2251
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specificat ions of the REG Protectio n schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2252
Description
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2253
Figure 28-26 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board
Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL K1 and K2 insertion/extraction Reference clock Clock unit
9.953 Gbit/s
O/E
. . . .
9.953 Gbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SLD64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
SLD64
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 28-71 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2256
Table 28-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board Interface RX1RX2 TX1TX2 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Table 28-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 Interface on the NM 1 2
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-75 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board. Table 28-75 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 0 to 2 Single-mode LC 1290 to 1330 S-64.2b 2 to 40 Single-mode LC 1530 to 1565
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2259
Item Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-1
-1
8.2
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 20.3 W
28.9 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board
28.9.2 Application
The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-28 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2260
NE3
Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals, or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals. l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used. When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports hybrid configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces. l The 16xSTM-1 electrical module can be used.
l Supports the SFP optical/electrical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2261
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description
l When the STM-1 optical/electrical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services. l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Overhead processing
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1D12. Port 9 to port 16 support the ECC communication by using bytes D4D12. l Only interfaces 1-4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP.
Maintenan ce features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical/electrical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2262
Description
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2263
Figure 28-29 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board
155MHz PLL K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction Reference Backplane clock Clock unit
STM-1/ STM-4
O/E E/O
S P I
CDR
STM-1/ STM-4
O/E E/O
. . . .
S P I
CDR
MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation CDR: clock and data recovery
. . . .
Power module
SDH overhead processing module Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Frame header Communication Fuse
CDR Module
This module restores the data signal and the clock signal.
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
Figure 28-30 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example)
SM SFP WORK WITH G.657B FIBER ONLY G.657B
SLH41
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RX 1 TX 15 2 TX 16 RX
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are 16 optical/electrical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2266
Table 28-77 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-77 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board Interface RX1RX16 TX1TX16 Type LC/SAA-75J4Y LC/SAA-75J4Y Function Receives optical/electrical signals. Transmits optical/electrical signals.
NOTE
The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-31 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
58.25 50.75
50.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2267
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the interface.
Interface on the NM 1
2268
Interface on the Panel TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 TX9/RX9 TX10/RX10 TX11/RX11 TX12/RX12 TX13/RX13 TX14/RX14 TX15/RX15 TX16/RX16
Interface on the NM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2269
Description Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-81 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used. Table 28-81 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used Item Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Application code Transmission distance (km)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Overload optical power (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Table 28-82 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used. Table 28-82 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used Item Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s NRZ S-4.1 0 to 15 1274 to 1356 Single-mode LC 15 to 8 28 8 8.2
Electrical Specifications
Table 28-83 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used. Table 28-83 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used Item Type of interface Value 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2271
Item Code pattern Bit rate of the output signal Permitted frequency deviation on the input interface Permitted attenuation on the input interface
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 48.5 W
28.10 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
28.10.2 Application
The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-32 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2272
NE3
Transmits and receives 8xSTM-16 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
l Supports the SFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2273
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals. l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports eight channels of ECC communication. l Support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specifica tions of the REG Protectio n schemes
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
NOTE One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2274
Description
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2275
Figure 28-33 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board
155MHz O/E 2.488 Gbit/s E/O S P I 155MHzPLL K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction Reference clock Backplane Clock unit
2.488 Gbit/s
DEMUX
16x155 Mbit/s
2.488 Gbit/s
O/E E/O
. . . .
S P I 2.488 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX module 16x155 Mbit/s RST MST MSA HPT SDH overhead processing module IIC LOS Laser shutdown Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Power module
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SLO16
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8
SLO16
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 28-85 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2278
Table 28-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board Interface RX1RX8 TX1TX8 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Table 28-87 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 IN5/OUT5 IN6/OUT6 IN7/OUT7 IN8/OUT8 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2280
Value /
Description The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-89 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board. Table 28-89 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board Item Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Value 2488320 kbit/s NRZ I-16 0 to 2 Single-mode LC S-16.1 2 to 15 Single-mode LC L-16.1 25 to 40 Single-mode LC L-16.2 50 to 80 Single-mode LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2281
Item Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10 to 3 18 3 8.2
5 to 0 18 0 8.2
2 to +3 27 9 8.2
2 to +3 28 9 8.2
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 21.5 W
28.11 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
28.11.2 Application
The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-35 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2282
NE3
Transmits and receives 4xSTM-16 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
l Supports the SFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2283
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals. l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specifica tions of the REG Protectio n schemes
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
NOTE One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2284
Description
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2285
Figure 28-36 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board
Backplane 155 MHz 155 MHz PLL K1 and K2 insertion/extraction Reference clock Clock unit
2.488 Gbit/s
O/E SP E/O I
2.488 Gbit/s
. . . .
2.488 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SLQ16
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLQ16
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-91 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2288
Table 28-91 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board Interface RX1RX4 TX1TX4 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Table 28-93 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2290
Description Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-95 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-95 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 2488320 kbit/s I-16 0 to 2 Single-mode LC 1266 to 1360 S-16.1 2 to 15 Single-mode LC 1260 to 1360 L-16.1 25 to 40 Single-mode LC 1280 to 1335 L-16.2 50 to 80 Single-mode LC 1500 to 1580
-5 to 0 -18 0 8.2
-2 to +3 -27 -9 8.2
-2 to +3 -28 -9 8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2291
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.7 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 12.8 W
28.12 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
28.12.2 Application
The SLQ64 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 optical signals. The SLQ64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-38 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-38 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2292
Transmits and receives 4xSTM-64 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
l Supports the XFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services. l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2293
Description
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.774.7
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2294
Description
Supported
9.953 Gbit/s
O/E
S P I
9.953 Gbit/s
DEMUX
16x622 Mbit/s
K1 and K2 Highspeed bus SCC unit Cross-connect unit A Cross-connect unit B SCC unit
9.953 Gbit/s
E/O
9.953 Gbit/s
16x622 Mbit/s
SDH overhead processing module Frame header Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Power module Communication
Fuse
-48V/-60V -48V/-60V
In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical signals. In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission. The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2295
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
Manages and configures the other modules of the board. Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface. Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units. Controls the laser. Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2296
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
SLQ64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
SLQ64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2297
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-97 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-97 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board Interface RX1RX4 TX1TX4 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2298
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Description Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
Optical Specifications
Table 28-101 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-101 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
S-64.2b 10 to 40 Single-mode LC
2300
Item Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 37.2 W
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2301
29 Cables
29
About This Chapter
Cables
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables. 29.2 Optical Fibers Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC. 29.3 Ground Cables The equipment has ground cables, including cabinet door ground cables and a PDU ground cable. 29.4 Alarm Cables Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable. 29.5 Management Cables Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables. 29.6 Clock/Time Cable Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2302
29 Cables
Structure
l l l When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800: Figure 29-1 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable. When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800: Figure 29-2 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable. Figure 29-3 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable for the OptiX OSN 8800 and the OptiX OSN 6800.
Figure 29-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
1 W1 X1 2 W W1 W2 W2 X2
0.8m L
1m
2. Heat-shrink tube
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2303
29 Cables
Figure 29-2 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
1 2
3. Cable clip
Pin Assignment
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2304
29 Cables
Technical Parameters
Table 29-1 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800) Cable Cabin et power cable -48 V power cable Usage Accesses -48 V DC to the cabinet. Wire Used -48 V DC power cable (blue) l If the required length of the power cable is less than 20 m, use the 16 mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20 m to 35 m, use the 25mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 35 m to 50 m, use the 35mm2 cable. BGND cable Accesses the BGND to a cabinet. Battery grounding cable (black) l If the required length of the power cable is less than 20 m, use the 16 mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20 m to 35 m, use the 25mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 35 m to 50 m, use the 35mm2 cable. If copper Plates is used on the PDU, the 25m-35 mm2 power cable must be used.
NOTE If the intended power cable is longer than 25 m, contact a cable engineer of Huawei for tailoring.
Connector If copper Plates is used on the PDU, the 25m-35 mm2 power cable must be used.
NOTE If the intended power cable is longer than 25 m, contact a cable engineer of Huawei for tailoring.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2305
29 Cables
Table 29-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (16 mm2) (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Description Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-16mm2-Blue-85 A Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-16mm2-Black-85 A
Connector 1
Table 29-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2) (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Description Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown OT naked crimping connector-25 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-25 mm2-Blue-110 A Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown Naked crimping connectorOT type-25 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-25 mm2-Black-110 A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2306
29 Cables
Table 29-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2) (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Description Cord end terminal-35mm2 -0.03m-105A-Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Blue-135 A Cord end terminal-35mm2 -0.03m-105A-Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Black-135 A
Connector 1
Table 29-5 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables Item Cabinet PGND grounding cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Description OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Yellow and green-135 A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2307
29 Cables
1 W1 X1 W2 X2 W2 W1
500
1. Cable connector
2. Cable clip
29 Cables
Table 29-6 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables Cable W2 W1 Cable Connector X1.A1 X1.A3 Cord End Terminal X2 X3 Connection A1 connects to X2. A3 connects to X3. Core Color Blue (-48 V power) Black (power ground)
29.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is conducted before installation. The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 29-8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2309
29 Cables
Table 29-8 Classification of optical fibers Type of Connectors at Both Ends LC/PC-LC/PC Fiber Type 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode fiber LC/PC-FC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode fiber LC/PC-SC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode fiber LSH/APC-FC/UPC LSH/APC-LSH/APC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) singlemode fiber 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) singlemode fiber B1 fiber G.652 fiber G.657A2 fiber G.657A2 fiber G.657A2 fiber
NOTE
The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G. 657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G. 652D optical fibers needs to be verified.
29.2.2 Connectors
Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/ PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them. Table 29-9 lists details on classification of fiber connectors. Table 29-9 Classification of fiber connectors Type of Fiber Connectors LC/PC FC/PC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished Round fiber connector/protruding polished
2310
29 Cables
Description Square fiber connector/protruding polished Fiber connector with a cap that provides automatic protection against dust/eightdegree radian surface/protruding polished
The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 29-6, Figure 29-7, Figure 29-8 and Figure 29-9. Figure 29-6 LC/PC fiber connector
The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector. To insert a fiber jumper that uses an LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and apply proper force. To remove the fiber jumper, first, press the clip, then, slightly push the fiber connector inward, and finally, pull out the connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2311
29 Cables
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2312
29 Cables
Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 29-10, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 29-11. Figure 29-10 Protective caps recommended
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2313
29 Cables
NOTE
The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type of caps provides poor dustproof function.
Structure
Figure 29-12 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cables.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2314
29 Cables
X1 L
X2
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables are listed in Table 29-10. Table 29-10 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables Item Connector X1/X2 Description Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in. 2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10AWG Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0 mm2-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core strand
Structure
Figure 29-13 shows the structure of the PDU ground cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2315
29 Cables
X1
X2
2. Heat-shrink tube
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the PDU ground cable are listed in Table 29-11. Table 29-11 Technical parameters of the PDU ground cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Description Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6 Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A
Structure
The structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is shown in Figure 29-14.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2316
29 Cables
2. Heat-shrink tube
3. Common plug
4. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 29-12. Table 29-12 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Connector X1 X1.4 X1.5 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 Connectors X2, X3, X4, X5 X2.2 X2.1 X3.2 X3.1 X4.2 X4.1 X5.2 X5.1 Color White Green White Blue White Brown White Orange Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 29-13.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2317
29 Cables
Table 29-13 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Item Connector X1 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-single row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Twisted pair cable -100SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairs-black 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Structure
Figure 29-15 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable. Figure 29-15 Alarm output interface cable
1 View A 8 6 3 1
X1 L
1. Network interface connector
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm output interface cable, refer to Table 29-14.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2318
29 Cables
Table 29-14 Pin assignment of X1/X2 Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7 Color Orange White-orange Green White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 29-15. Table 29-15 Technical parameters of the alarm output interface cable Item Connector X1/X2 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor flat cable Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24AWG-4 pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and halogen-free cable 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Structure
Figure 29-16 shows the structure of the cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2319
29 Cables
X1
1. Network interface connector-RJ-45
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 29-16. Table 29-16 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7 Color Orange White-orange Green White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Technical Parameters
For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 29-17.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2320
29 Cables
Table 29-17 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Number of cores Core diameter Description Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector Communication cable-8 cores category-5 twisted pair-24AWG 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Structure
Figure 29-17 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable. Figure 29-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 29-18.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2321
29 Cables
Table 29-18 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port Connector X1 X1.1 X1.5 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.9 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.5 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 X2.9 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 29-19. Table 29-19 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable Item Connector X1, X2 Type Description Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable welding type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohmSEYVP-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack 4 pairs 10.0m (393.7 in.), 20.0m (787.4 in.)
Structure
Figure 29-18 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2322
29 Cables
2 B
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3
View B 1 8
W5 W1 X1 W4 W3
L1
View C
Pos.9
W2
C
X2
Pos.1
L2 L3 L4 L5
For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8X5 and interface types, refer to Table 29-20. Table 29-20 Relationship between connectors and interface types Connector X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Interface Type Serial ALMI1 ALMI2 ALMO LAMP1 LAMP2 ETH
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 29-21, Table 29-22, Table 29-23, Table 29-24, Table 29-25, Table 29-26 and Table 29-27.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2323
29 Cables
Table 29-21 Pin assignment of the W2 Connector X1 X1.3 X1.7 X1.4 X1.1 X1.6 X1.8 X1.5 X1.2 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 X2.9 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Table 29-22 Pin assignment of the W3 Connector X1 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 X1.17 X1.19 X1.10 X1.12 Connector X3 X3.1 X3.2 X3.3 X3.6 X3.4 X3.5 X3.7 X3.8 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Table 29-23 Pin assignment of the W4 Connector X1 X1.14 X1.16 X1.18 X1.20 Connector X4 X4.1 X4.2 X4.3 X4.6 X4.4 X4.5 Pair Relationship Pair
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2324
29 Cables
Connector X1 -
Relationship -
Table 29-24 Pin assignment of the W5 Connector X1 X1.21 X1.23 X1.25 X1.27 X1.22 X1.24 X1.26 X1.28 Connector X5 X5.1 X5.2 X5.3 X5.6 X5.4 X5.5 X5.7 X5.8 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Table 29-25 Pin assignment of the W6 Connector X1 X1.33 X1.35 X1.41 X1.43 X1.37 X1.39 X1.45 X1.47 Connector X6 X6.1 X6.2 X6.3 X6.6 X6.4 X6.5 X6.7 X6.8 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Table 29-26 Pin assignment of the W7 Connector X1 X1.34 Connector X7 X7.1 Relationship Pair
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2325
29 Cables
Relationship
Pair
Pair
Pair
Table 29-27 Pin assignment of the W8 Connector X1 X1.61 X1.57 X1.53 X1.49 Connector X8 X8.1 X8.2 X8.3 X8.6 X8.4 X8.5 X8.7 X8.8 Pair Relationship Pair
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 29-28. Table 29-28 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable Item Connector X1 Description Cable connector-D type-64 PIN-8 bit-straight through connector Cable connector-D type-9PIN Network interface connector-8 bit-8PINShielded
2326
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
29 Cables
W2-W8
Number of cores
Structure
Figure 29-19 shows the structure of the straight-through network cable. Figure 29-19 Structure of the straight-through network cable
8 1 RJ-45 8 1
X1
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the straight-through network cable, refer to Table 29-29. Table 29-29 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Relationship Pair
Pair
2327
29 Cables
Relationship
Pair
Pair
Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the straight-through network cable are listed in Table 29-30. Table 29-30 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Number of cores Core diameter Description Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector Communication cable-8-core category-5 twisted pair-24AWG 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2328
29 Cables
Table 29-31 Cables for connecting BITS/PTN device to OptiX OSN devices External interface of board TOD(time) Port Type of OptiX OSN Device RJ-45(time) Port Type of BITS or other Device RJ-45(time) Cable Type Description
CLK/IN / OUT(clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
SMB (clock)
Single Conversion Cable to connect RJ45 port and SMB port and coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends.For details, see Special Cables and SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. Cables made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm,75ohm Converter Box. For details, see Special Cables.
SMB (clock)
SMB (clock)
Coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends. For details, see SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. For details, see Cascading Network Cables .
RJ-45 (clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
NOTE
The TN52STI board of an OptiX OSN 8800 device has four 120-ohm RJ45 ports: CLK1, CLK2, TOD1, and TOD2. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports are used to receive or output clock signals. The TOD1 and TOD2 ports are used to receive or output time signals.
NOTE
The TN11STG board of an OptiX OSN 6800 device has two 120-ohm RJ45 (CLK and OUT) and two 75ohm SMB ports (IN and OUT). Users can use the CLK port or the IN and OUT ports to receive and transmit clock signals. The CLK port can also be used to output clock signals.
29 Cables
Special Cables
Special cables are used to connect BITS devices to OptiX OSN devices or OptiX PTN devices. Each special cable has one SMB connector at one end and an RJ45 connector at the other end.
Structure
Single Cable, Conversion Cable The single cable uses one RJ45 port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. The length of such a cable is only 3 meters. Figure 29-20 shows the structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable. Figure 29-20 Structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable
1: Coaxial Connector,SMB Socket 2: 75 ohm<->120 ohm PCB 3: Network Interface Connector X1: RJ45 port X2: SMB port X3: SMB port Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box Cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. A convertor box is usually used in three scenarios: l When an OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a BITS device for clock synchronization, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the BITS device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX OSN device using a straight-through network cable. When the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a OptiX PTN device, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX PTN device using a straight-through cable. If the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to an clock tester, users need to make two cables at the field, each with one SMB connector at one end and a BNC connector at the other end. Then connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device and the BNC connector to the clock tester.
Figure 29-21 shows a converter box, which provides two SMB ports (IN and OUT) on one side and an RJ45 port on the other side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2330
29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-32 provides the pin assignment of the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box. Table 29-32 Pin assignment when the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box is used Cable Straight-through network cable Coaxial cable Converter Box RJ-45 SMB Port on OptiX OSN Device RJ-45 SMB
NOTE
The connectors on the converter box and on the OptiX OSN device are male and the connectors at the two ends of the coaxial cable are female.
Technical Parameters
Table 29-33 provides the parameters of an Special Cables. Table 29-33 Parameters of an Special Cables Cable Single Cable, Conversion Cable Description Single Cable, Conversion Cable, 3m, 2*SMB75SM-IV, 120CC2P0.4P430U(S) +2*SYFVZ75-1/0.25, MP8-II, Expert 2.0 (BOM:04040582)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2331
29 Cables
Description 1. Coaxial Connector, SMB Socket, 75ohm/ Angle/Male, PCB Welding Type, Installation Hole D1.3mm, Installation Holes Spacing 5.1mm 2. A8010 Refiner, AS21TCTA, A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable, Coaxial Cable Impedance Transforming Board, 3*3 Assembled Board 3. Box Body, Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable Conversion Box (SMB Angle Male) 4. For more information of the parameters of SMB-BNC coaxial cable, see SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. 5. For more information of the parameters of Straight-through network cable, see Straight-Through Network Cable.
Structure
Figure 29-22 shows the structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Figure 29-22 Structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable
Pin Assignment
Table 29-34 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2332
29 Cables
Table 29-34 Pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable One End SMB-core SMB-ground Other End SMB-core SMB-ground
Technical Parameters
Table 29-35 provides the parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Table 29-35 Parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable Cable Cable type Description l Trunk Cable, 10.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4368 l Trunk Cable, 2.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4362 l Trunk Cable, 20.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4370 Cable length 2m, 10m, 20m
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2333
29 Cables
Connection type
Description Straight-through network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 time ports need to be connected for time synchronization. For more information,see Straight-Through Network Cable. ascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables . Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables .
clock
time
Structure
Figure 29-23 shows the structure of a cascading network cable. Figure 29-23 Structure of a clock/time cascading network cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends
Pin Assignment
Table 29-37 provides the pin assignment of a cascading network cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2334
29 Cables
Table 29-37 Pin assignment of a cascading network cable Connector X1 X1.1 (White-orange) X1.2 (Orange) X1.3 (White-green) X1.4 (Blue) X1.5 (White-blue) X1.6 (Green) X1.7 (White-brown) X1.8 (Brown) Connector X2 X2.4 (Blue) X2.5 (White-blue) X2.7 (White-brown) X2.1 (White-orange) X2.2 (Orange) X2.8 (Brown) X2.3 (White-green) X2.6 (Green) Twisted Twisted Twisted Relationship Twisted
Technical Parameters
Table 29-38 provides the parameters of cascading network cables. Table 29-38 Parameters of cascading network cables Item Connector X1/X2 Description l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solid Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014 Cable type Number of wires Communication cable-8-core class 5 twisted pair-24 AWG 8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2335
29 Cables
Table 29-39 Cables for Testing equipment Connections Connecti on relationsh ip Connection to Clock test instrument Port Type of Test Instrument BNC(clock) Port Type of OptiX OSN Device SMB(clock) Cable Type Description
SMBBNCCoaxia l cables
The coaxial cables use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. For more information, see SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables. These testing cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables are together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. For more information, see Special Cables, Straight-Through Network Cable, SMBBNC Coaxial Cables. For more information, see Time Signal Testing Cables.
BNC (clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
BNC(time)
RJ45(time)
Structure
Figure 29-24 shows the structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Figure 29-24 Structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2336
29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-40 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 29-40 Pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable One End SMB-core SMB-ground Other End BNC-core BNC-ground
Technical Parameters
Table 29-41 provides the parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 29-41 Parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable Cable Cable type Description Trunk Cable,10.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, BNC75AM-II, C, DL2521 10m
Cable length
Structure
Figure 29-25 shows the structure of a time signal testing cables. Figure 29-25 Structures of the BNC coaxial cable and cable connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2337
29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-42 provides the pin assignment of the time signal testing cables. Table 29-42 Pin assignment of a time signal testing cable Connector X1 (BNC) Core Connector X2 (RJ-45) 6(green) Description Pin 6 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the BNC port on the time test instrument. Pin 1 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the ground of the BNC connector on the time test instrument.
Ground(Metal shielding)
1(blue)
Technical Parameters
Table 29-43provides the parameters of time signal testing cables. Table 29-43 Parameters of time signal testing cables Cable RJ45 Description l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014 BNC Coaxial Connector,BNC,75ohm,Straight Plug, Male, Matching SYFVZ-75-1-1, With Heat Shrink Tube With Itself-For Agintrust Trunk Cable,RSP0/PV4 Plate To DDF, 30m, 75ohm, 2E1, 2.2mm, DIN4X8, 4*SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25
Trunk Cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2338
30 Optical Attenuator
30
About This Chapter
Optical Attenuator
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators (VOAs). 30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. 30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2339
30 Optical Attenuator
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2340
31 Filler Panels
31
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot. 31.2 Front Panel There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. 31.3 Valid Slots This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
Filler Panels
31.1 Functions and Features This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
31.4 Technical Specifications This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2341
31 Filler Panels
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2342
31 Filler Panels
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU18
2343
31 Filler Panels
Part Number 21132664 21134882 21135491 21135492 21135492 21135493 21135493 21135716 21135716
Product OptiX OSN 3800 OptiX OSN 3800 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Valid Slots IU11, IU2-IU5 IU1, IU6-IU11 IU42, IU44 IU76, IU77 IU38 IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89 IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48 IU41, IU43 IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86
NOTE Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two filler panels.
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10 IU74, IU85 IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44 IU9, IU10
NOTE l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a board except the TN16XCH board, this filler panel must be inserted before the board is inserted. l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be covered with this filler panel and then with a filler panel identified as 21132664.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2344
31 Filler Panels
Mechanical Specifications 25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H)) 50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H)) 25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H)) 27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H)) 110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) 34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H)) 54.5 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (2.1 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2345
A Indicators
Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. A.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green. A.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. A.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. A.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. A.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2346
A Indicators
major
minor
The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.
Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators Indicator PWR Name Power indicator Status On (Green) Off OptiX OSN 6800: CRI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Meaning The subrack works normally. The subrack does not work. There is a critical alarm.
On (Red)
2347
A Indicators
Name
Status Off
There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm. There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm.
MIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2348
A Indicators
Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators Indicato r STAT Name Board hardware indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Board software indicator On (red) Meaning The board works normally. A critical/major alarm occurs on the board. A minor alarm occurs on the board. The board is not powered on. The memory check fails. Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The board software is lost. Blinking (red) Blinking quickly (green) Blinking slowly (green) On (green) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails. On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress. On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress. The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The service is normal with any service alarm. A critical or major service alarm occurs. A minor or remote service alarm occurs. No service is configured. The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode. Off The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode. Blinking quickly (green) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.
SRV
ACT
On (green)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2349
A Indicators
Meaning The data port connection is normal. The data port connection is abnormal.
NOTE The STAT indicators for the TN13FIU, TN11ITL, TN11SFIU, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, TN11DMR1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11MR8, and TN11SBM2 boards are green. The STAT indicators are lit when the boards are powered on and are unlit when the boards are powered off.
Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board Indicato r STAT Name Board hardware indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Meaning The PQ2 sub-board works normally. The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal. Logical sub-board is not configured. The PQ2 sub-board is not powered on.
Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board Indicato r STAT Name Board hardware indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Board software indicator On (red) Meaning The board is working normally. A critical alarm occurs on the board. A minor alarm occurs on the board. The board is not powered on. The memory check fails. Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The NE software is lost. Blinking (red) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2350
A Indicators
Indicato r
Name
Meaning On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress. On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress. The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The service is normal with any service alarm. A critical or major service alarm occurs. A minor or remote service alarm occurs. No service is configured. The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.
SRV
ACT
On (green)
Off
The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.
Blinking quickly (green) PWRA Indicator for system power supply On (green) On (red) Off PWRB Indicator for system power supply On (green) On (red) Off PWRC Indicator for protection power supply On (green) On (red)
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress. -48 V power supply A is normal. -48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed). No power is input. -48 V power supply B is normal. -48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed). No power is input. The +3.3 V protection power is normal. The +3.3 V protection power is lost.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2351
A Indicators
Indicato r ALMC
Meaning There is no audible or visual warning in case of an alarm. Audible warning is generated in case of an alarm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2352
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time. B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2353
The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2354
B.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.
Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure B-3 and Figure B-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery information Board version (TN12) Board model number
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2355
Delivery information
The complete BOM should be 0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table B-1 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2356
Table B-1 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0303 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406 or 0303 (client side)
The board is installed with a wavelength tunable optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected as required for the board. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed with a fixed optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. Optical modules are installed on the client and WDM sides of the board.
0303
0307
0302
0231
NA
Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l l For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed. For the SSN3SLH41 board,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2357
The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305. Table B-2 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table B-2 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0302 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406
The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed optical modules.
0305
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2358
NOTE
In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.
The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-4. Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules Character A Dispersion (1550 nm) 1600ps/nm 3200ps/nm 800ps/nm 3200ps/nm B 1500ps/nm 1600ps/nm 3200ps/nm C 800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 6500ps/nm D E G H 12800ps/nm 6500ps/nm 800ps/nm >600ps/nm >600ps/nm K 800ps/nm 1800ps/nm L 12800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 1500ps/nm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Distance 80km 170km 40km 160km 80km 80km 170km 40km 640km 320km 640km 320km 40km >30km >30km 40km 90km 640km 640km 80km
Rate 2.5G 2.5G 10.66G 2.5G 10.66G 10.66G 2.5G 10.66G 2.5G 2.5G 2.5G 2.5G 10.71G 10.71G 10.66G 10.66G 2.66G 2.66G 2.5G 10.66G
2359
Character M
Z U
800ps/nm >600ps/nm
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-4.
The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module
The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2360
Table B-6 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules Character T Dispersion (1550 nm) 1200ps/nm 12800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 3400ps/nm -1000 to 1100ps/nm 4800ps/nm Distance 60km 640km 640km 170km 60km 240km Rate 10.71G 2.66G 2.67G 5.33G 10.71G 11.3G
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer to Table B-6.
NOTE
As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission (80 km).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2361
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2362
Description Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
"47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2363
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal. Frequency of the second optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.
Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code First four digits Meaning Frequency of first optical signal Description Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240. l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l l The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the MR8 board is 92109280. l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2365
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board. Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
"V"
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz. "V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-18. Table B-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. The second character is always G. The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value. The fifth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
Second character Third to the fourth digits Fifth character Sixth and seventh digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2368
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2369
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
Odd/even wavelengths
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2370
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2371
For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2372
Table B-28 Characteristic code for the M40 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2373
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-32. Table B-32 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2375
Table B-34 Characteristic code for the VA4 board Code First to third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2376
Table B-36 Characteristic code for the GFU board Code First and second characters Third and fourth digits Meaning Gradient Description The first and second characters are always GF. Indicate the gradient of optical signals.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2377
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards. C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. C.3 Other Unit Specification The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board. C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback. C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function. C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2378
Minim um (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 0 -19 -20 -22 -19 -3 -3 -3 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2.5 -3 0 5
-28
-9
0 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2379
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LDGD GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2.5 -3 0 5
-28
-9
0 -3 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LDGS GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2.5 -3 0 5
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
0 -3 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2380
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN12LDM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2381
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LDMD FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2382
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LDMS FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2383
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN12LDX OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24.0
XFP
-1
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2384
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN11LEM24 FE/GE 1000BASESX, I-850-LC 1000BASELX, I-1310-LC 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) TN11LEX4 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) TN11LOA FC200/GE/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/FE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 2
Minim um (dBm) -3 16 0
0 -3 -1 0.5 -1 -1 0.5 -1 0
eSFP
SFP+
SFP+
eSFP
-3 0
-11.5 -4.5
-19 -20
-3 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2385
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE SDI/HD-SDI/ 3G-SDI 1000 BASEZX-80 km I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 5 -3 0 3 3
-7
-16
GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2386
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE FC400 FC800 3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
0 -1 -1 -2.5 -3 0 5
0 -1 0.5 0 -3 -3 -3 -3
SFP+
TN11LOG TN12LOG
GE
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LOM TN12LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate -2.5
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-9.5
-17
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2387
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km FC 100/ FC 200/ FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express FC400/ FICON4G Module (Multimode) FC400/ FICON4G Module (Single mode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Multimode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Single mode) GE/ FC 100/ FC 200 -3 0 5 -1
-2
-8
-16
-2.5
-9.5
-17
-3
-10
-18
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
TN11LQG
GE
-2.5 -3
-9.5 -11.5
-17 -19
0 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2388
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN13LQM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-28
-9
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2389
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LQMD TN12LQMD FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2390
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LQMS TN12LQMS FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2391
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LSQ STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a L-16.2 3
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-6
TN11LSX TN12LSX
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN)
XFP
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2392
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km TN13LSX OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -1.3 4
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24.0
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN11LSXL TN12LSXL STM-256/ OC-768 STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE 40G Transponder 40G Transponder 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-3
16
3 3
0 0
-6 -6
3 3
TN11LWX2
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2393
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LWXD FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 -3 0 3
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 3
-9.5 -10 -5 -2
0 -3 0 -9
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2394
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LWXS TN12LWXS FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE ETR/ CLO/ GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 3
-9.5 -10 -5 -2
0 -3 0 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2395
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11TMX TN12TMX STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC) 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-3 0 3 3
-10 -5 -2 -2 0
-3 0 -9 -9 -9
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s 3 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km TN11TBE FE 100 BASEFX-10 km 100 BASEFX-80 km GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate -3 5 -2.5
-28
-9
-11.5 -2 -9.5
-3 -3 0
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2396
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -3 0 5 -1
Minim um (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 -6 -19 -20 -22 -11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24 -3 -3 -3 -1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1 XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
TN11TDG
GE
-2.5 -3 0
0 -3 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2397
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -1
-28
-9
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km TN53TDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200/ CBR_10G 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5
XFP
-1
-1.3
-7.3
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2398
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN54THA OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI TN54TOA OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE FC200/FC100/ FE/GE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ S-16.1 4
-3
-16
-5
-18
eSFP
1000BASELX-10km (I-1310-LC)
-3
-9.5
-20
-3
-3 0 3 3
-10 -5 -2 -2
-3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-2.5 -3
-9.5 -11.5
-17 -19
0 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2399
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE SDI/HD-SDI
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
-7
-16
Video eSFP
TN52TOG
GE
-2.5 -3 0 5
0 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2400
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11TOM TN52TOM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-28
-9
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2401
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE SDI 3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
-7
-22
eSFP
TN11TQM TN12TQM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2402
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN12TQM OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
TN11TQS
-3 0 3 3
-10 -5 -2 -2 0
-3 0 -9 -9 -9
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s 3 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km TN11TQX TN52TQX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -1
-28
-9
-6
XFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2403
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km TN53TQX TN55TQX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2 /CBR_10G/ FC800/ FC1200 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN11TSXL STM-256/ OC-768 40G Transponder
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-3
-16
-6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2404
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Minim um (dBm) 0 -6 3 -
a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service. b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service. c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2405
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 0 Minimu m (dBm) -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9
-28
-5
-28
-9
TN11LD GS
STM-16/ OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-1 -1 3 3 3
-5 -5 -2 -2 -2
0 -9 0 -9 -9
-2
-28
-9
TN12LD M TN11LD MD
OTU1 OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
3 -4 0
0 -8 -5
-9 -9 -9
-5
-28
-9
TN11LD MS
OTU1
-1 3
-5 -2
-28 -28
-9 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2406
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 3 Minimu m (dBm) -2 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9
-28
TN12LD X
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
-3
-16
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LE M24
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LE X4
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LO A
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LO G
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3
0 0 -9 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2407
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 2 2 2 2 Minimu m (dBm) -3 -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0 0 0 0
TN12LO G
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LO M
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
0 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0
TN12LO M
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -2
-16 -25
0 -9
TN11LQ G
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2408
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 3400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 2 3 -4 -4 0 0 0 Minimu m (dBm) -3 0 -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9
TN13LQ M TN11LQ MD
OTU1 OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-5
-28
-9
TN12LQ MD
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-4 0
-8 -5
-28 -28
-9 -9
-5
-28
-9
TN11LQ MS
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1 -1 3 3
-5 -5 -2 -2
0 -9 0 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2409
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 3 Minimu m (dBm) -2 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9
-28
-2
-28
-9
TN12LQ MS
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-1 3
-5 -2
-28 -28
-9 -9
-2
-28
-9
TN11LS Q
OTU3
0 0 2
-5 -5 -3
0 0 0
TN11LS X TN12LS X
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
0 0 -9 -9 0 0 0
TN13LS X
OTU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2410
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 2 Minimu m (dBm) -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0
-16
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
-3 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -3
-16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TN11LS XL
OTU3
TN12LS XL
OTU3
TN11LS XLR
OTU3
TN12LS XLR
OTU3/ OTU3e
TN11LS XR
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3
0 0 -9 -9 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2411
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimu m (dBm) -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0 9 0 -10 -9
TN11LW X2
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-1 -1 3 3 3
TN11LW XD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-4 -4 0 0 0
-8 -8 -5 -5 -5
0 -9 0 -10 -9
-5
-28
-9
STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1 -1 3 3
-5 -5 -2 -2
0 -9 0 -10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2412
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 3 Minimu m (dBm) -2 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9
-28
-2
-28
-9
TN11TM X
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
0 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0
TN12TM X
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2413
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimu m (dBm) -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0 0 0
TN12ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2 2
2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3
0 0 0 0
TN52ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
TN53ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
-3
-16
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-16
2 2 2
-3 -3 -3
0 0 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2414
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 2 2 2 Minimu m (dBm) -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9 0 0
TN12NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
0 -9 -9 0 0 0
TN52NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 2 2
-3 -3 -3
0 0 0
TN53NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 0 0 0
-3 -5 -5 -5
0 0 0 0
OTU3/ OTU3e
OTU3/ OTU3e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2415
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 0 Minimu m (dBm) -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0
-16
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode. b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
Table C-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) TN11EC OM GE 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LD GD TN11LD GS TN12LD M TN11LQ G STM-16/ OTU1 STM-16/ OTU1 OTU1 FEC 5G/ OTU5G 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km TN13LQ M TN11LQ MD OTU1 OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 5 5 2 Minimum (dBm) 0 0 -0.5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -3 -9 -9
2.5
-28
-9
5 5 5 5 2
0 2 2 0 -0.5
-9 0 -9 -9 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2416
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimum (dBm) 2.5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9
TN11LQ MS TN11LW X2
OTU1
-28
STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO
2.5
-28
-9
TN11LW XD
-0.5
-28
-9
2.5
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2417
Table C-4 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) TN11LE M24 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN11LE X4 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN11LO A TN12LO G OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN12TM X OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN12ND 2 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN53ND 2 TN51NQ 2 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN52NQ 2/ TN53NQ 2/ TN54NQ 2 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 2 4 -1 2 4 -1 2 -1 2 4 -1 2 4 -1 2 4 -1 2 -1 2 4 -1 2 Minimum (dBm) -6 -1 0 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimu m Overload Point (dBm) -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1
-11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2418
Board Name
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimum (dBm) -6 -1 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimu m Overload Point (dBm) -1 -1
TN53NS2
OTU2
-1 2
-11 -14
Input Power Range per Channel (dBm) 40 channels -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27 -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30 -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32 -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27 80 channels -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -27.5 -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30 -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32 -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32 -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30
Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels -14 -20 -23.5 -16 -22 -27 -19 -25 -30 -20 -25 -32 -16 -23 -27 80 channels -17 -23 -27.5 -19 -25 -30 -22 -28 -32 -23 -28 -32 -19 -26 -30
2419
OAU100
16 to 25.5
Board Name
Input Power Range per Channel (dBm) 40 channels -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17 -24 to -16 80 channels -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20 -24 to -19
Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels -20 -19 -17 -16 80 channels -23 -22 -20 -19
Table C-6 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1 Board Name TN12OBU1P1 Total input power range at the VI optical port(dBm) -30 to 7 Maximum total output optical power(dBm) 9
Table C-7 Quick reference table for CRPC Board Name Channel Gain (dB) G.652 fiber CRPC01 CRPC03 10 >10 LEAF fiber 12 NA Maximum Pump Power (dBm) 29 29.5
Table C-8 Quick reference table for HBA Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 80 channels HBA 291 -22 40 channels -19 10 channels -13 Nominal Input Power Range (dBm) -25 to -3 Channel Allocation (nm)
1529 to 1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2420
Table C-9 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards Board Name TN11MR2/TN21MR2 Insertion Loss (dB) IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR4/TN21MR4 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR8 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR8V IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN21CMR1 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11DMR1/ TN21DMR1 EIN-EMO EMI-EOUT WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT Add/drop channel TN11SBM2 TN11D40/TN12D40 TN11D40V Add/drop channel 6.5 8a 1 3 2 0.8 1.5 1.0 4.5 0.8 1 1.0 4 3 2.2 3.5 1.5 1.5 1.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2421
Insertion Loss (dB) EIN-ETM ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT 1 1.5
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN13FIU/TN21FIU
1.5
TN11SFIU
1.0
1.5
TN11ITL01
<4.5
<2.5
TN11ITL04
<3
<3
TN12ITL
<4.5
<3.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2422
Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB) Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5 Multimode 2
TN12DCP
Single mode 4 Single mode 1.5 Single mode 4 Multimode 4.5 Single mode 1.5 Multimode 2
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
4 1.5 4 4.5 4 4.5 12.5 11.5 12.5 1 8.5 12.5a 1.5 9a 7 14a 3 8a
TN11SCS
TN11RDU9
TN11RMU9
TN11ROAM
8a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2423
8a 12
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB. b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8. c: Mx denotes M1-M40. d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2424
Board Name OBU2 RDU9 RMU9 WSD9 WSM9 WSMD2 WSMD4 WSMD9
Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
FEC
AFE C
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N N
N N N N N N
N Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y Y Y N
N N N N Y Y
N N N N Y Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2425
Board Name
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
TN11LD MS TN12LD X TN11LE M24 TN11LEX 4 TN11LO A TN11LO G TN12LO G TN11LO M TN12LO M TN11LQ G TN13LQ M TN11LQ MD TN12LQ MD TN11LQ MS TN12LQ MS TN11LSQ
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N
N Y N N Y
Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N Y
eSFP XFP XFP/ SFP+ XFP/ SFP+ eSFP /SFP + eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP N
Y Y N N Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y N N N N N N N N
N Y N Y N N N N N N Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N Y Y N Y N N
N N N N N Y N Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2426
Board Name
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
TN11LSX TN12LSX TN13LSX TN11LSX L TN12LSX L TN11LSX LR TN12LSX LR TN11LSX R TN11LW X2 TN11LW XD TN11LW XS TN12LW XS TN11TM X TN12TM X TN11ND2 TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2 TN52NQ2
XFP
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y Y Y Y
N N N N
XFP N N N
Y N Y N
Y N N N
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y N N N
Y N N N
N N N N
Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y
N N N N
N N N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y N N N N N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y Y Y N N N
N Y N Y Y Y N Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N N N N
Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2427
Board Name
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
TN53NQ2 TN54NQ2 TN11NS2 TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 TN11NS3 TN52NS3 TN54NS3 TN11TBE TN11TD G TN11TD X TN12TD X TN52TD X TN53TD X TN54TH A TN54TO A TN11TO M TN52TO M TN11TQ M
Y Y Y
N N N
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
N N Y
Y Y N
Y Y Y
N N N
XFP XFP N
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
N N N
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
N N Y
Y Y N
Y Y Y
N N N
N XFP N
Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y N N N
N Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y N N N
N N N N
Y N N N
Y N N N
N N N N
N N Y
N N N N
Y N N Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y
N N N N
N N N N
N N N Y
N N N Y
Y Y Y Y
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2428
Board Name
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
N Y N
Y Y Y
N Y Y
N Y N
N N N
N N N
N N N
N N N
Y N Y
N N N N
Y N N N
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
N N N N
N N N N
N N N N
N N N N
N N N N
XFP N N eSFP
Y N Y N
l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface. l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2429
Board Name LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LDX LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX TN11LSXL TN12LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NQ2 NS2 NS3 TDG TDX
Client-Side Inloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
Client-Side Outloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
WDM-Side Inloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
WDM-Side Outloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
Channel loopback N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2430
Board Name THA TOA TOG TN11TOM TN52TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL
Client-Side Inloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Client-Side Outloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
WDM-Side Inloop N N N Y Y N N N N
WDM-Side Outloop N N N Y Y N N N N
Channel loopback Y Y N N Y N N N N
NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
N Y Y Y N N
N Y N N N N
N N N N N N
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y N Y Y
N Y N Y Y N
N N N N N N
N N N N N N
N Y N N N N
N N N N N N
2431
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board Name
Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP
LDMS LDX LEM24 LEX4 LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NQ2 NS2 NS3 TBE
N N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Ya N N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y N
Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2432
Board Name
Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n N N N N N N N N N N N Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion N N N N N N N N N N N DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP
TDG TDX TEM28 THA TOA TOG TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL
Y N N N N N Y Y N N N
N N N N N N N N N N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N N Y N N N N
N N N N N N Y N N N N
N N N N N N N N N N N
N N N N N N N N N N N
Y N Y N N N Y Y N N N
N Y N Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y
NOTE a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection. NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2433
Board Name LDMS LDX LEM24 LEX4 LOA LOG LOM LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWXS TMX ND2
NQ2
NS2
NS3
TDX
THA TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2434
TOG TSXL
8 x ODU0 1 x ODU3
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Table C-15 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection ECOM L4G LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LDX LEM24 LEX4 LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX 1 x GE 4 x GE 2 x GE 2 x GE N N N N 2 x 10GE 2 x 10GE N 8 x GE N 4 x GE 4 x GE 4 x GE 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 N N Distributed Cross-Connection 1 x GE 4 x GE 2 x GE 2 x GE N N N N N N N 8 x GE N 4 x GE 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 N N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2435
Board Name
LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NQ2 NS2
NS3 TBE TDG TDX TOG TN11TOM TN52TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e 16 x GE 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e 4 x ODU1 8 x GE/4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
N N 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1 4 x ODU1/ 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any 4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 4 x ODU1 N N
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Table C-16 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name ECOM L4G Electrical Cross-Connection 1 x GE 4 x GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2436
Board Name LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LDX LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSX LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX NS2 TBE TDG TDX TOG TOM TQM TQS
Electrical Cross-Connection 2 x GE 2 x GE N N N N N 8 x GE N 4 x GE 4 x Any/4 x GE 4 x Any/4 x GE 4 x Any/4 x GE N N N N N N 4 x ODU1 16 x GE 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1 4 x ODU1 8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1 4 x Any/1 x ODU1 4 x ODU1
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2437
D Parameter Reference
D
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) D.7 Default VLAN ID D.8 Enabled/Disabled D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression D.10 Enabling LCAS D.11 Entry Detection
Parameter Reference
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) D.18 Hardware REG Enabled D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m) D.22 Laser-in-Position Status D.23 LCAS Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2438
D Parameter Reference
D.24 Line Rate D.25 Loop Detection D.26 Loop Port Shutdown D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) D.29 MAC Loopback D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) D.37 MSP Sharing D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) D.44 PHY Loopback D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.54 TSD D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) D.56 VLAN Priority
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2439
D Parameter Reference
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2440
D Parameter Reference
Values
OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800 Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDM-side optical interfaces.
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description After the received signal is lost, the laser is automatically shut down and stops emitting optical signals. This can prolong the life span of the laser and avoid injuries to relevant personnel. l If automatic laser shutdown is enabled for a transmitting port on the client side of an OTU board, the laser on the transmitting port will be automatically shut down when the corresponding port on the WDM side of the board receives no signal or detects SF. In addition, the laser on the transmitting port of the local OTU board will be automatically shut down when the corresponding receiving port on the opposite OTU board receives no signal. Disabled After the received signal is lost, the laser is not shut down automatically. The parameter is usually set to Disabled during commissioning.
Configuration Guidelines
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2441
D Parameter Reference
Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS support the Automatic Laser Shutdown function of the WDM side.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 doesn't support the LWX2 and LWXD boards.
Values
The following table lists the work modes of the ECOM board. Value Range Service Mode, HUB Mode Default Value HUB Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the ECOM board. Parameter Value Service Mode HUB Mode Remarks Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service. Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12LQMS board. Value Range NS1 Mode, LQM Mode Default Value LQM Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2442
D Parameter Reference
Remarks As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with another tributary board. As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges four channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
NOTE
The NS1 Mode field is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is housed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11TOM. Value Range Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode Default Value Non-cascading Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11TOM. Parameter Value Cascading Mode Remarks Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
Non-cascading Mode
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR. Value Range Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default Value Electrical Relay Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/ TN12LSXLR. Parameter Value Electrical Relay Mode Optical Relay Mode Remarks In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2443
D Parameter Reference
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN54NS3. Value Range Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default Value Line Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/ TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3. Parameter Value Line Mode Electrical Relay Mode Optical Relay Mode Remarks The board works as a line board. The board works as a wavelength conversion relay unit. In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Configuration Guidelines
Select the board mode according to the actual service application scenario.
Values
Value Range 10%-100% Default Value 30%
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2444
D Parameter Reference
Configuration Guidelines
Value 10% Description Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 10% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 20% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 30% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 40% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 50% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 60% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 70% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 80% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 90% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 100% of the bandwidth of a port.
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2445
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Used, Unused Default Value Used
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Used Unused Description Indicates that the current channel is used. Indicates that the current channel is not used.
Configuration Guidelines
l l l This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment. When a channel is not used, you need to disable the laser of the channel. Otherwise, the laser forcibly enabled alarm may be reported.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2446
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range The specific value range is related to the board. Default Value The specific value is related to the board. Unit Mbit/s
Configuration Guidelines
The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range 16-2500 Default Value / Unit Mbit/s
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range 1-4095 Default Value 1
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D.8 Enabled/Disabled
Description
The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
D Parameter Reference
Description Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the port take effect. Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the port becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Values
Value Range Disabled, Enabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets is not limited. Indicates that excess broadcast packets will be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2449
D Parameter Reference
Configuration Guidelines
Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Disabled Enabled Description Disables the LCAS protocol. Enables the LCAS protocol.
Configuration Guidelines
You can set Enabling LCAS as required.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2450
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Enables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. Disables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. In this case, all packets can traverse the port.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2451
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default Value Vary with different boards
Configuration Guidelines
l l l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service. The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer. If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value -
The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value Enabled Disabled Remarks Indicates the FC distance extension function is enabled. Indicates the FC distance extension function is disabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2452
D Parameter Reference
Configuration Guidelines
If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to Enabled.
Values
Value Range FEC, AFEC Default Value Vary with different boards
Description Indicates a technology of coding error correction. It can correct bit errors generated in signal transmission. Indicates a new technology of coding error correction. It is suitable for correcting burst bit errors. The AFEC coding technology has stronger error correction capabilities than the FEC.
Configuration Guidelines
FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. According to the network design, set FEC Mode to a proper value. In the case of expansion of an existing network or proper OSNR, FEC is recommended; in the case of comparatively poor network performance and high OSNR requirement, AFEC is recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2453
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value The specific value is related to the board.
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates enabling the FEC function of a board. Indicates disabling the FEC function of a board.
Configuration Guidelines
The FEC Working State parameter on the transmit end must be consistent with that on the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.
NOTE
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range 5 dBm-30 dBm (continuously tunable) Default Value None.
Configuration Guidelines
Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC and ROP board should be larger than 23 dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.
Values
Value Range 20.0-40.0 Default Value None Unit dB
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D Parameter Reference
occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal gain of the board.
Values
Valid Value Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description Optical signals are regenerated after being received by the input optical interface, and then they are directly sent to the downstream board. This is similar to an outloop of the signals between the input and output optical interfaces. After receiving optical signals, an optical interface processes the optical signals in a usual way, like regenerating the signals and processing the SDH overhead.
Disabled
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2456
D Parameter Reference
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. The value can be set.
Values
Value Range -10.0 to 10.0 Default Value 0 Unit dB
Configuration Guidelines
After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula: Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface
D Parameter Reference
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range On, Off Default Value For OTU boards: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off For amplifier board: On
The following table lists the description of each value. Value On Off Description Indicates enabling the laser. Indicates disabling the laser.
Configuration Guidelines
l Optical wavelength conversion unit The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should be opened. When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter to Off to protect the downstream boards. In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required. l Optical amplifier board In the case of the CRPC board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the laser is disabled.
NOTE
After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2458
D Parameter Reference
In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
NOTE
The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.
Values
Valid Value 2000, 10000, 15000, 40000, 80000 Default Value -
The value of this parameter is subject to the type of the optical module. The following table lists the values of this parameter for different types of optical modules. Optical Module Type I-64.1 S-64.2b I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 Value 10000 40000 2000 15000 40000 80000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2459
D Parameter Reference
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Values
Valid Value In-Position, Not-in-Position Default Value -
The following table lists the description of each value. Value In-Position Not-in-Position Description Indicates that the physical laser on the line board is installed. Indicates that the physical laser on the line board is not installed.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2460
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Huawei mode, Standard mode Default Value Huawei mode
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Huawei mode Standard mode Description Inverts the RS_Ack message, and then transmits the MST message. Transmits the MST message, and then Inverts the RS_Ack message.
Configuration Guidelines
To set the LCAS mode, follow the principles: l l If the interconnected equipment at the two ends is Huawei equipment, select Huawei Mode. If Huawei equipment is interconnected to a third-party equipment, set the interconnected equipment to the same mode according to the mode supported by the third-party equipment.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default Value Vary with different boards
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Speedup Mode Description Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Speedup Mode when the following conditions are satisfied. l An OTU or a tributary board on the line transmits/ receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the board is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). l Line Rate for another board on the line is set to Speedup Mode. Standard Mode Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Standard Mode when the following conditions are satisfied. l The conditions for setting Line Rate to Speedup Mode and Speedup Mode 11.3G are not satisfied. l Line Rate for another line board on the line is set to Standard Mode.
Configuration Guidelines
l l l l This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical signal rate on the network. This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends. The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be the same. In the case of the LSXLR, LSXR, TN12ND2(Relay Mode), TN52ND2(Relay Mode), TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), and TN54NS3(Relay Mode) boards, it is recommended that you set Enable Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required.
Configuration examples: l Example 1: As shown in Figure D-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2462
D Parameter Reference
When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-1 Example 1
M U X D M U X M U X M U X D M U X M U X
12LSX
D M U X
52ND2
D M U X
12LSX
Example 2: As shown in Figure D-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2 (2) works as a regeneration board. When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-2 Example 2
M U X D M U X M U X M U X D M U X M U X
52TDX
52ND2 (1)
D M U X
52ND2 (2)
D M U X
52ND2 (3)
52TDX
Example 3: As shown in Figure D-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3 (2) works as a regeneration board. When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode. In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-3 Example 3
M U X D M U X M U X M U X D M U X M U X
52TQX
54NS3 (1)
D M U X
54NS3 (2)
D M U X
54NS3 (3)
52TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2463
D Parameter Reference
Values
Valid Values Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
Configuration Guidelines
To check the self-loop port, select Enabled.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Valid Values Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled
Configuration Guidelines
To block a self-loop port, select Enabled. Otherwise, select Disabled.
Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback
D Parameter Reference
Description Indicates that the equipment is normal. Optical interface loopback is not required when the equipment runs normally. Loops the signals to be output from the output optical interface back to the input optical interface of the same equipment at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the signal processing on the board is normal. Directly loops the accessed signals of the local equipment back to the corresponding output optical interface before signal processing on the premise that the signal structure is not changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.
Outloop
Configuration Guidelines
Loopback is usually used for equipment commissioning and troubleshooting. Before adding services to the equipment, you must check whether loopback is set for the optical interfaces. If the loopback exists, release it immediately. Outloop indicates a mode where the unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface with the signal structure unchanged. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors The following figure shows the outloop configuration. Type Client-side outloop of the OTU Illustration
Outloop OTU
Client side
WDM side
OTU Outloop
Client side
WDM side
Inloop indicates that the processed signal is transmitted from the transmit port at the local end and then looped back to the receive port at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the signal processing on the board is normal. The following figure shows the inloop configuration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2466
D Parameter Reference
Illustration
Inloop OTU
Client side
WDM side
Inloop
WDM side
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is transparently transmitted to the downstream station.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2467
D Parameter Reference
Value Disabled
Description Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is not transmitted to the downstream station.
Configuration Guidelines
l Enabling the LPT can support the system to transparently transmit link status. In this way, the downstream station can determine the running status of the upstream station according to whether the link_err alarm occurs, and thus adopts the corresponding working status. Therefore, whether to enable the LPT depends on the actual network situation. Before enabling the LPT, ensure the following: The board to be configured is an Ethernet service (such as the GE service) board. The services carried on the board are normal. The services carried on the board are not configured with ALS function.
Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop Default Value Non-Loopback
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Non-Loopback Inloop Description Indicates that no loopback is configured. Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2468
D Parameter Reference
Configuration Guidelines
l l l l For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC loopback can be set to only inloop. For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port. By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.
Values
The value can be queried through the system.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range 5 dBm-30 dBm Default Value l ROP: 28 dBm l CRPC: 26 dBm
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range 1518-9600 Default Value 9600
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2470
D Parameter Reference
Values
The value can be queried through the system.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2471
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range 5 dBm-30 dBm Default Value 20 dBm
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Values
Value Range 2-256 Default Value 256
Configuration Guidelines
Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range 5 to 49995 Default Value 10 Unit min
Configuration Guidelines
The default value is recommended.
Values
Valid Value Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description Indicates that multiple MS protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. Indicates that only one MS protection group can be configured at the same optical interface.
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2473
D Parameter Reference
Configuration Guidelines
Currently, an optical interface supports a maximum of two MS protection groups.
Values
l OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800 Value Range HBA: 29dB OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU102: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU103: 24dB to 36dB, continuously tunable OAU105: 23dB to 34dB, continuously tunable OBU101: 20dB OBU103: 23dB OBU104: 17dB OBU205: 23dB Default Value The specific value is related to the module.
Configuration Guidelines
l Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2474
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
D Parameter Reference
The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links. The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed. Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power. If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain according to the intermediate insertion loss.
l l
Values
Queriable only.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Queriable only.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Values
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default Value Disable
D Parameter Reference
Value Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control Send Only Receive Only
Description Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends. Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode. Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode. Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.
Configuration Guidelines
Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range Min. Attenuation Ratio Max. Attenuation Ratio Default Value Max. Attenuation Ratio Unit dB
Configuration Guidelines
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
D Parameter Reference
Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l Other board The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted.
Values
Value Range 1-8 Default Value None.
Configuration Guidelines
l l The MCA supports 8-optical interface detection or 4-optical interface detection, depending on the type of the MCA. Before setting the MCA to monitor wavelengths, you are recommended to query this parameter to confirm that the optical interfaces is available on the MCA.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2478
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop Default Value Non-Loopback
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Non-Loopback Inloop Description Indicates that no loopback is configured. Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.
Configuration Guidelines
l l l l l For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port. By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2479
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range C, CWDM Default Value -
The following table lists the description of each value. Value C CWDM Description Indicates that the current working band is C band. Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D Parameter Reference
Values
C band Value Range 192.10 to 1196.05 (wavelength spacing: 50 GHz) Default Value Unit THz
CWDM band Value Range 1271 to 1611(wavelength spacing: 20 nm) Default Value Unit nm
Configuration Guidelines
l l l l l l l l l In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the wavelength conversion board. In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network wavelength planning. The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions. If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these regeneration sections use the same wavelength. It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured. The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported. In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical wavelength but cannot change the band. In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical wavelength only. For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800: Table D-1 lists the wavelengths available for the CWDM system. Table D-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system Wavelengt h No. 11 12 13
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelength No. 15 16 17
D Parameter Reference
Wavelengt h No. 14
Wavelength No. 18
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Encapsulated to FEC5G, Encapsulated to OTU5G Default Value Vary with different boards
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) Description Supports transparent bit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this port mapping mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2482
D Parameter Reference
Description In this port mapping mode, 10GE LAN signals are encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then are mapped into standard OTU frames. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are encapsulated in standard OTU2 frames and the bit rate of the signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the FEC/ AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services. Supports transparent bit (10.7 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this mapping mode, certain AFEC fields are used for transmission of signals. In this mode, the bit rate of signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. Thus, for the signals that adopt AFEC, the encoding gain of AFEC is low and the correction capability of AFEC is comparatively poor.
Configuration Guidelines
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l l Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode. The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)", "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" or "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)". Users can select a proper mapping mode according to the service transmission requirements. "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the 10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field. In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals. "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services. The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.
D Parameter Reference
l l l
Set the Line Rate parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode automatically changes to AFEC. When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode remains unchanged.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates enabling the PRBS test. Indicates disabling the PRBS test.
Configuration Guidelines
The PRBS test is only used for deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Enabled during network-wide commissioning and to Disabled after the deployment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2484
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range -30.0-30.0 Default Value The specific value is related to the board Unit dBm
Configuration Guidelines
l The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally.
D Parameter Reference
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None Default Value None
The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value B1_SD OTUk_DEG ODUk_PM_DEG None Remarks Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade. OTUk signal degrade. ODUk_PM signal degrade. No condition is configured for SD switching.
Configuration Guidelines
When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD alarm according to the actual service type.
D Parameter Reference
Values
For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG Value Range OTN, SDH Default Value OTN
For the ND2, NQ2, NS2 Value Range ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic Default Value Automatic
For the NS3 Value Range ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic Default Value Automatic
For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM Value Range Client Mode, OTN Mode Default Value Client Mode
Configuration Guidelines
l In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode of line-side services should be set to SDH. In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM boards: When the client side accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client side accesses other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2487
D Parameter Reference
Values
Optical protection unit Value Range -35.0 to -10.0 Default Value Unit dBm
Optical supervisory channel unit Value Range -46.0 to -23.0 Default Value Unit dBm
For optical multiplexer unit, optical demultiplexer unit and amplifier board, the value can be queried through the system.
Configuration Guidelines
l Protection board The default value is usually recommended, namely, -35 dB. In special cases, you can set this parameter to any value within the allowed range according to the actual situation.
D Parameter Reference
Values
The value can be queried through the system.
Configuration Guidelines
None.
D.54 TSD
Description
The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled, and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
Configuration Guidelines
You can set whether to enable the TSD as required.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2489
D Parameter Reference
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. The value can be set or queried.
Values
Value Range 3.0 - 8.0 Default Value 5 Unit dB
Configuration Guidelines
l l l It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB. In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SD occurs.
D Parameter Reference
Values
Value Range 0-7 Default Value 0
Configuration Guidelines
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2491
E Glossary
E
A
AC access control list ACK acknowledgement See alternating current See acknowledgement
Glossary
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information. Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels. See access control list Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the OADM equipment. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. See asymmetric digital subscriber line See automatic gain control
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2492
E Glossary
access identifier See alarm indication signal A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared. The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm indication
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting the conditions. The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning. A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following: Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security See automatic level control A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical power control on the line that contains the link. The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit, variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work together to achieve the ALC function. See automatic laser shutdown Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.
alarm severity
alarm suppression
alarm type
ALC node
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2493
E Glossary
American National Standard Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange ANSI antistatic floor APD APE APID application-specific integrated circuit
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol standards. American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number between 0 and 127. See American National Standard Institute A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent accumulated static electricity See avalanche photodiode automatic power equilibrium access point identifier A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function. By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for many needs. See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) system. See American Standard Code for Information Interchange amplified spontaneous emission See application-specific integrated circuit See automatically switched optical network A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. autonomously generated correlation tag See Asynchronous Transfer Mode See administrative unit An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
APS ARP arrayed waveguide grating ASCII ASE ASIC ASON asymmetric digital subscriber line
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2494
E Glossary
automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. automatic laser shutdown A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics. automatic protection switching Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport optical network services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections. avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics. See arrayed waveguide grating
AWG
B
background block error ratio backup The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs. A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. See broadband access server A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables. background block error See background block error ratio See boundary clock Backward Defect Indication backward error indication See bit error rate backward incoming alignment error
bandwidth
BAS basic input/output system bayonet-neillconcelman BBE BBER BC BDI BEI BER BIAE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2495
E Glossary
bill of material
Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly. It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/ planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG]. See basic input/output system See bit-interleaved parity See bit interleaved parity order 8 An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See building integrated timing supply best master clock See bayonet-neill-concelman See bill of material A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths. See bridge protocol data unit board-level protection switching The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously. A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
BIOS BIP BIP-8 bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity order 8 bit-interleaved parity
BITS BMC BNC BOM boundary clock BPDU BPS bridge protocol data unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2496
E Glossary
The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks. In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS. Backbone WDM System
BWS
C
cable tie capex capital expenditure The tape used to bind the cables. See capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such as equipment, property, or industrial buildings. See committed access rate See committed burst size See connectivity check connection control interface See continuity check message chromatic dispersion See Code Division Multiple Access See customer edge See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computers main data-transfer path, the bus. centralized alarm system CF CGMP channel The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console. See compact flash Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s). The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device. See committed information rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2497
E Glossary
Common and Internal Spanning Tree common language equipment identification connectionless network protocol connectionless network service Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds. clock tracing CM CMEP CMI coarse wavelength division multiplexing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. See configuration management connection monitoring end point coded mark inversion A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency Access expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different code sequences for multi-address connection. committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. Common Object Request Broker Architecture A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP, object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
compact flash
concatenation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2498
E Glossary
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor for normal running of an entire network. 1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software. 2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration information of all nodes in the network.
configuration management
To set the basic parameters of an operation object. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency. A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets. A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. CCM is used to detect the link status. 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. 2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
convergence service CORBA corrugated pipe CPLD CPU CRC CSA CSES CSMA CST current alarm current performance data
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user. See Common Object Request Broker Architecture Used to protect optical fibers. Complex Programmable Logical Device See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check Canadian Standards Association consecutive severely errored second carrier sense multiple access Common Spanning Tree An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled. Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers, namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2499
E Glossary
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI Data backup data communication network data communications channel destination access point identifiers A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area. A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. distribute board protect system See data communications channel See dispersion compensation fiber See dispersion compensation module A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module). See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission over a communications channel as a single signal. Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber. A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately. It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device type, or another criterion. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2500
DBPS DCC DCF DCM DCM frame DCN DDF DDN demultiplexer dense wavelength division multiplexing device set
DHCP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet. A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques. A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. See distributed link aggregation group See demultiplexer Dual Node Interconnection A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled. dynamic random database differential phase return to zero Differentiated Services Code Point dispersion slope compensation rate See digital subscriber line access multiplexer Digital Signal Processing Data Terminal Equipment See dual tone multiple frequency data terminal ready In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used. A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure. Digital Video Broadcasting
digital distribution frame digital subscriber line access multiplexer dispersion compensation fiber dispersion compensation module Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol distributed link aggregation group
DLAG DMUX; DEMUX DNI domain DRDB DRZ DSCP DSCR DSLAM DSP DTE DTMF DTR dual tone multiple frequency dual-ended switching DVB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2501
E Glossary
DVMRP DWDM
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
E
E2E EAPE EBS ECC EDFA eDQPSK EFM ejector lever electric supervisory channel electromagnetic compatibility End to End enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium See excess burst size See embedded control channel See erbium doped fiber amplifier enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying See Ethernet in the first mile A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis. A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals. Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network management system (NMS). A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference See element management system A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2502
embedded control channel EMC EMI EMS enterprise system connection EPL EPLAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range. See electric supervisory channel See enterprise system connection See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. enhanced small form-factor pluggable A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976 in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and services. electrical variable optical attenuator See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line ETS ETSI ETSI 300mm cabinet European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization EVOA EVPL EVPLAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2503
E Glossary
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE. The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals. An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources and intentional settings. fiber Bragg grating See fiber channel flash database See fiber distributed data interface See fast Ethernet See forward error correction A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services. A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
fast Ethernet
fault
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2504
E Glossary
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers. The trough that is used for routing fibers. Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port. See fiber management tray fixed optical add/drop multiplexer fixed optical attenuator For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves, called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths. See field programmable gate array
FPGA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2505
E Glossary
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame alignment. FTP full-duplex See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
G
gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB. Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier. When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port. A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit general communication channel See GMPLS control plan See gigabit Ethernet The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the network resource more effectively. A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. See gain flattening filter See generic framing procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2506
Gateway IP
E Glossary
gigabit
In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9) bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second between two telecommunication points. GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. generalized multiprotocol label switching The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System
gigabit Ethernet
GNE GPS
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. grounding GSSP GUI The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit. General Snooping and Selection Protocol See graphical user interface
H
Hardware loopback HCS HDB HDLC hierarchical cell structure high level data link control History alarm History Performance Data A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. See hierarchical cell structure high density bipolar code See high level data link control This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment. That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories. The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored in the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2507
E Glossary
I
IAE IC ICC ICMP ID identity Idle resource optical NE incoming alignment error See integrated circuit ITU carrier code See Internet Control Message Protocol See identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known. When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network. See Internet Explorer See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See Internet Group Management Protocol The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function. A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive transmission service. A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice of broken fiber. The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers integrated circuit integrated services digital network
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2508
E Glossary
International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization International Telecommunication Union International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks. A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R). An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the X series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. See Internet Protocol A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify the host itself. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication. See intelligent power adjustment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2509
Internet Explorer
IP IP address
IP over DCC
IPA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
inter-packet gap See integrated services digital network See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
J
Jitter Jitter transfer Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing at the output port.
L
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network link access procedure on the D channel link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme See liquid crystal display local communication network local craft terminal See light emitting diode long hop
layer
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2510
E Glossary
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes, configures, and tests data-link Internet connections. The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the condition of the link. The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2. For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1. A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure, sandwiched between two transparent electrodes. See logical link control link management protocol loss of clock A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN). A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.
linktrace reply
Locked switching
logical port
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2511
E Glossary
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. See logical port link-state pass through See link state advertisement See label switched path linktrace See linktrace message See linktrace reply
M
MA MAC MADM main distribution frame main path interface at the transmitter main topology Maintenance Associations See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated. A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector. A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. See metropolitan area network The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and regenerator section.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2512
E Glossary
The information that is used for network management in a transport network. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal. A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network. A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet. See maintenance domain Memory Database See main distribution frame message dispatch process message distribution service software maintenance entities The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the transmitter. The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. maintenance end point A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. See multiframe alignment signal See management information base maintenance intermediate point See multicast listener discovery
Mapping marking-off template MD MDB MDF MDP MDS ME mean launched power Mean Time Between Failures media access control
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2513
E Glossary
MLM laser MO mother board mounting ear MP MPI MPI-R MPI-S MPLS MS MSA MSI MSOH MSP MSPP MST MSTI MSTP MTA MTBF MTU multi-longitudinal mode laser multicast listener discovery
See multi-longitudinal mode laser See managed object A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic modules. A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. See maintenance point main path interface main path interface at the receiver See main path interface at the transmitter See Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Adaptation multi-frame structure identifier See multiplex section overhead See multiplex section protection multi-service provisioning platform See multiplex section termination See multiple spanning tree instance See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Mail Transfer Agent See Mean Time Between Failures Maximum Transmission Unit An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes. The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network. A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2514
E Glossary
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction. Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. See multiplexer mechanical variable optical attenuator
multiplex section overhead multiplex section protection multiplex section termination multiplexer
Multiplexing
MUX MVOA
N
NA NCP NE NE database No Acknowledgment See Network Control Protocol See network element There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2515
E Glossary
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID. A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE. The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NEside data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored on the NMS side. Network Equipment Building System See network element function This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link. A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board. A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled. The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity. ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management, accounting management, configuration management, security management and performance management.
NE ID NE Panel
NE-side data
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client. NM NMS NNI NOC Noise figure NSAP NTP See network management See Network Management System See network node interface network operation center An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a system. See network service access point See Network Time Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2516
E Glossary
O
OA OADM OADM frame OAM OC OCI OCP OD ODB ODF ODUk OEQ OFC OLA OLP OM OMS ONE Online Help OOF OPA See optical amplifier See optical add/drop multiplexer A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards. See operation, administration and maintenance See optical coupler open connection indication See optical channel protection optical demultiplexing optical duobinary See optical distribution frame optical channel data unit-k optical equalizer open fiber control See optical line amplifier See optical line protection optical multiplexing optical multiplexing section See optical network element The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the user. See out of frame optical power adjust
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Open Systems Interconnection A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. operation expenditure optical physical section
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2517
E Glossary
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).+ A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium. A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system. In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured. A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is the EDFA amplifier. A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large. A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that form the NE to display the board layout. The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/ noise power. A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved. Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems. A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm). A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2518
optical signal-to-noise ratio optical spectrum analyzer optical supervisory channel Optical switch
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
optical time domain reflectometer optical transmission section optical transponder unit optical transport network optical wavelength shared protection
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault. Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength. A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then, two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service among stations. optical channel payload unit optical channel payload unit-k A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the second company under its own brand. See optical spectrum analyzer See optical supervisory channel See Open Systems Interconnection optical switch node See optical signal-to-noise ratio See open shortest path first See optical time domain reflectometer optical terminal multiplexer See optical transport network See optical transmission section See optical transponder unit optical channel transport unit-k An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified number of consecutive frame bit positions. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals. Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet. See optical wavelength shared protection
OPU OPUk orderwire original equipment manufacturer OSA OSC OSI OSN OSNR OSPF OTDR OTM OTN OTS OTU OTUk out of frame Output optical power overhead cabling OWSP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2519
E Glossary
P
PA packet over SDH/ SONET packet switched network Packing case Paired slots pass-through PBS PCB PCC PCC PCS PDH PDL PDU PE peak burst size pre-amplifier A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission. See peak burst size See printed circuit board protection communication channel See policy and charging control See physical coding sublayer See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See polarization dependent loss Protocol Data Unit Provider Edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics. protection ground A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency. See physical sublayer & physical layer
PHY
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2520
E Glossary
physical coding sublayer physical sublayer & physical layer PID PIM-DM PIM-SM PIN PIR plesiochronous digital hierarchy PLL PMD PMI POH point to multipoint
The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications. 1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer: In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC photonics integrated device protocol independent multicast-dense mode See protocol independent multicast sparse mode See Positive Intrinsic Negative See peak information rate A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. See phase-locked loop polarization mode dispersion payload missing indication path overhead A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations (from one to many).
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating over Ethernet PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression. Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component loss when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units. policy and charging control POS Positive Intrinsic Negative Power box Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer network. See packet over SDH/SONET Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices from current overload. PPP PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2521
E Glossary
See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock See primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line, or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line. A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above, the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection protection. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. PSI PSN PSTN PT PTMP PTN PTP public switched telephone network payload structure identifier See packet switched network See public switched telephone network payload type See point to multipoint packet transport network Point-To-Point A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
Q
QA QoS quality of service Q adaptation See quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2522
E Glossary
R
radio network controller RAI RAM An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. remote alarm indication See random access memory
random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit (CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order. Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile memory that can be written to as well as read. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Receiver Sensitivity An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).
reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/ add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel. This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power, which equalizes the optical power at the channel level. Reed Solomon Code reference clock Reflectance REG Regeneration REI Resource Reservation Protocol A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications. A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference. The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. Remote Error Indication The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). Radio Frequency Requirement for Comments remote failure indication A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. See Routing Information Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2523
E Glossary
remote network monitoring See radio network controller See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. See Reed Solomon Code In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol return to zero code
RS Code RS232
RSTP RSVP RZ
S
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol. The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement, which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off, IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm. See storage area network service access point source access point identifiers stimulated Brillouin scattering See square connector See signal degrade SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system. See synchronous digital hierarchy
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2524
SDH
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
See Serial Digital Interface serious disturbance period Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example, 10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is 129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255. 255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all 192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Netid 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address. A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH. Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address.
Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals. Serial Line Interface Protocol
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service protection SES SETS settings A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end. See severely errored second See synchronous equipment timing source Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) . SF SFP SFTP shock-proof reinforce shortcut menu side door See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable See Secure File Transfer Protocol A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment room so that the cabinet stands stably. A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an objects name or icon. This is also referred to a context menu. The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against unexpected touch and environment impact.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2525
E Glossary
side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total ratio source spectrum to the second largest peak. side trough signal cable signal degrade signal fail signal to noise ratio The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10 microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance. See service level agreement See Serial Line Interface Protocol single longitudinal mode section monitoring A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See single-mode fiber See side mode suppression ratio See subnetwork connection protection See subnetwork connection tunnel protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC includes different classes of services (CoS). See synchronous optical network
SLA SLIP SLM SM small form-factor pluggable SMF SMSR SNCP SNCTP SNMP SNR soft permanent connections SONET
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2526
E Glossary
span
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SPC SPM SQL square connector SRLG SRS SSM SSMB SSU STM STM-1 STM-4 storage area network See soft permanent connections self phase modulation See structured query language Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style". Shared Risk Link Group stimulated Raman scattering See Synchronization Status Message synchronization status message byte synchronization supply unit Synchronous Transfer Mode See synchronous transport mode 1 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4 An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers, tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the devices appear as locally attached devices. See Spanning Tree Protocol A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying, updating, and managing data in relational database systems. Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management. A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A subnetwork ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.
sub-network number
subnet mask
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2527
E Glossary
subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, tunnel protection the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel. support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy the insulation requirements. An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met. There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Suppression state
Switching priority
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronize NE time synchronous digital hierarchy To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as to synchronize all NEs with the server. A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock. A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
T
TCM TCP TDM TE Tandem Connection Monitoring See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2528
E Glossary
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals. See Trivial File Transfer Protocol trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Transaction Language 1 Type/Length/Value See terminal multiplexer See Telecommunication Management Network traffic Policing A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.
time to live
Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol. 1 TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1 facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2529
E Glossary
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines. Two Rate Three Color Marker trail trace identifier See time to live tributary unit See tributary unit group
U
UAS UAT UDP unavailable second See unavailable time event See User Datagram Protocol
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive seconds. UNI universal time coordinated Unprotected See user network interface The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide. Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation rights of a user in the NMS.
upload
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2530
E Glossary
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches). UTC See universal time coordinated
V
VB VC VCG VCI virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container virtual bridge See virtual container See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 s or 500 s. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. VLAN VOA voice over IP See virtual local area network Variable Optical Attenuator An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private network Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2531
E Glossary
W
WAN wavelength division multiplexing See wide area network A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. WDM WEEE wide area network See wavelength division multiplexing waste electrical and electronic equipment A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working. weighted round Robin wavelength selective switching Wait To Restore wavelength cross-connection protection The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between working and protection channels.
Working path Working service WRR WSS WTR WXCP WXCP service
X
XFP XPM 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable cross-phase modulation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2532